Micro Station v 8 i 4 Advanced Users

TRN012270-1/0001

MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users

Bentley Institute Course Guide

Trademarks

AccuDraw, Bentley, the “B” Bentley logo, MDL, MicroStation and SmartLine are registered trademarks; PopSet and Raster Manager are trademarks; Bentley SELECT is a service mark of Bentley Systems, Incorporated or Bentley Software, Inc.

Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.

Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Acrobat logo, Distiller, Exchange, and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Windows, Microsoft and Visual Basic are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.

Other brands and product names are the trademarks of their respective owners.

Patents

United States Patent Nos. 5,8.15,415 and 5,784,068 and 6,199,125.

Copyrights

©2000-2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated. MicroStation ©1998 Bentley Systems, Incorporated. IGDS file formats ©1981-1988 Intergraph Corporation. Intergraph Raster File Formats ©1993 Intergraph Corporation. Portions ©1992 – 1994 Summit Software Company. Portions ©1992 – 1997 Spotlight Graphics, Inc. Portions ©1993 – 1995 Criterion Software Ltd. and its licensors. Portions ©1992 – 1998 Sun MicroSystems, Inc. Portions ©Unigraphics Solutions, Inc. Icc ©1991 – 1995 by AT&T, Christopher W. Fraser, and David R. Hanson. All rights reserved. Portions ©1997 – 1999 HMR, Inc. All rights reserved. Portions ©1992 – 1997 STEP Tools, Inc. Sentry Spelling-Checker Engine ©1993 Wintertree Software Inc. Unpublished – rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. All rights reserved. 8.11.5.11

MicroStation V8i for Advanced Users ii Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

For the Instructor

Data set

The data set files for this course are the delivered MicroStation Examples files. This practice makes use of the example project structures to illustrate best practices.

However, the AccuDraw 3D and Creating Multi-Scale Detail Sheets modules use files that are not included in the delivered example files.

• The AccuDraw 3D module uses AccuDraw_3D.dgn

• The Creating Multi-Scale Detail Sheets module, Attach multi-scaled details exercise, uses Multi-Scaled Detail-Refs.dgn

Find these files in the course’s \Dataset folder in the Bentley Institute datasource and provide them to students if you will presenting these modules.

Note that a completed sample Civil.dgnlib (for the Customize module) is provided in the \dgnlib folder.

Google Earth

The Google Earth module requires the Google Earth application and an Internet connection.

Nov-08 iii For the Instructor

Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Nov-08

Table of Contents

For the Instructor ___________________________________iii

Course Overview ____________________________________1Course Description ____________________________________ 1Target Audience ______________________________________ 1Prerequisites _________________________________________ 1Course Objectives _____________________________________ 1Modules Included _____________________________________ 2Introductory Knowledge________________________________ 3

Questions ________________________________________ 3Answers _________________________________________ 3

Design File Settings _________________________________5Module Overview _____________________________________ 5Module Prerequisites___________________________________ 5Module Objectives ____________________________________ 5Introductory Knowledge________________________________ 6


Settings Saved in the Design File__________________________ 7Active angle and active scale__________________________ 7Angle Readout ____________________________________ 7Color ___________________________________________ 8Direction Readout _________________________________ 8Element Attributes _________________________________ 8Fence, Locks, Snaps ________________________________ 9The grid _________________________________________ 9Isometric ________________________________________ 9Views ___________________________________________ 9Working Units ____________________________________ 9

User Preferences ______________________________________ 11Setting preferences _________________________________ 12Additional preferences ______________________________ 12Managing preferences_______________________________ 13

Module Review _______________________________________ 14Questions ________________________________________ 14

v Table of ContentsCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Table of Contents

Answers _________________________________________ 14

Working with Cells __________________________________15Module Overview _____________________________________ 15Module Prerequisites ___________________________________ 15Module Objectives ____________________________________ 15Introductory Knowledge ________________________________ 16


Cell Libraries _________________________________________ 16Creating and Editing Cells _______________________________ 18

Annotation cells ___________________________________ 19Shared Cells__________________________________________ 20Display All Cells In Path ________________________________ 22Cell Index ___________________________________________ 22Create an HTML Page from a Cell Library __________________ 22Module Review _______________________________________ 23


Grouping Elements Together _________________________25Module Overview _____________________________________ 25Module Objectives ____________________________________ 25Introductory Knowledge ________________________________ 26


Levels ______________________________________________ 26Creating level definitions_____________________________ 26Symbology _______________________________________ 28Updating level definitions ____________________________ 30Levels in multiple files ______________________________ 30Copying level definitions_____________________________ 30Level import and export _____________________________ 30Moving elements between levels _______________________ 31Jumping to levels __________________________________ 31Working with level libraries___________________________ 31Transparency and priority ____________________________ 31Reference levels ___________________________________ 32

Graphic Groups ______________________________________ 32Creating a graphic group_____________________________ 33Adding elements to an existing graphic group_____________ 33The graphic group lock______________________________ 33Information about graphic groups _____________________ 35Graphic groups and Element Selection __________________ 35Dropping elements from a group ______________________ 35

Named Groups _______________________________________ 36

Table of Contents vi Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Named groups and graphic groups _____________________ 36Member types _____________________________________ 37Named group hierarchies ____________________________ 41Displaysets _______________________________________ 42Quicksets ________________________________________ 42Named groups and references_________________________ 43

Complex Chains and Shapes _____________________________ 43The Group Command__________________________________ 43Module Review _______________________________________ 44


Annotation _________________________________________45Module Overview _____________________________________ 45Module Prerequisites ___________________________________ 45Module Objectives ____________________________________ 45Introductory Knowledge ________________________________ 46


Annotation Scale ______________________________________ 46What is Annotation Scale? ___________________________ 46Model based control ________________________________ 47Text ____________________________________________ 47

Change status of existing annotation text_______________ 50Change model scale to text scale _____________________ 50

Tags ____________________________________________ 50Dimensions ______________________________________ 51

Change status of existing dimension text _______________ 51Change model scale to dimension scale ________________ 52

Cells ____________________________________________ 52Change status of existing annotation cells ________________ 54Line Style Scale ____________________________________ 54Changing Scale ____________________________________ 54

Word Processor Text Editor _____________________________ 55Selecting fonts ____________________________________ 55Tabs, indents and schemes ___________________________ 55Symbols _________________________________________ 57Text fields________________________________________ 58Fields and elements_________________________________ 60Placeholder fields __________________________________ 61Subscript, and Superscript____________________________ 62Change case ______________________________________ 62

Text Styles Dialog _____________________________________ 62Advanced tab _____________________________________ 62Text Style remapping _______________________________ 63

Tools for Annotating___________________________________ 64

Nov-08 vii Table of ContentsCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Table of Contents

Place Text________________________________________ 64Change Case ______________________________________ 64Edit Text ________________________________________ 64Place Note options _________________________________ 65XYZ Text tools ___________________________________ 67Find/Replace Text _________________________________ 70

Dimensions __________________________________________ 71Changing attributes_________________________________ 71Editing dimension text ______________________________ 71Updating attributes _________________________________ 72Updating attributes globally __________________________ 72Add a description __________________________________ 72Dimensions and rotated views ________________________ 72Dimension associativity _____________________________ 73Retrieving dimension styles from STG files ______________ 74

Feature Control Frames_________________________________ 75Module Review _______________________________________ 76


Working with Tags __________________________________79Module Overview _____________________________________ 79Module Prerequisites ___________________________________ 79Module Objectives ____________________________________ 79Introductory Knowledge ________________________________ 80


Creating and Using Tags ________________________________ 81Creating tags sets __________________________________ 81Defining tags _____________________________________ 81Placing tags_______________________________________ 83File-wide tag display ________________________________ 84Changing tags _____________________________________ 85Reviewing tag data _________________________________ 85Tag set libraries____________________________________ 85

Reporting on Tag Data _________________________________ 86Creating a template _________________________________ 86Generating reports _________________________________ 87

Selecting Tags ________________________________________ 88Changing Tags to Text _________________________________ 89Modifying Cells with Tags _______________________________ 89Cells Containing Only Tags ______________________________ 91

Alternative method to position the tag __________________ 92Tags and Databases____________________________________ 93

Tag to database____________________________________ 93Database to tag ____________________________________ 93

Table of Contents viii Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Module Review _______________________________________ 95Questions ________________________________________ 95Answers _________________________________________ 95

Custom Line Styles __________________________________97Module Overview _____________________________________ 97Module Prerequisites ___________________________________ 97Module Objectives ____________________________________ 97Introductory Knowledge ________________________________ 98


Style Components _____________________________________ 99Creating a Custom Line Style_____________________________ 101

Stroke patterns ____________________________________ 101Stroke Pattern options ______________________________ 103Point symbols _____________________________________ 104Compound components _____________________________ 106Using an origin and terminator ________________________ 107

Managing Line Styles___________________________________ 109Add the styles to a DGNLIB _________________________ 109Managing resource styles_____________________________ 109Import from V7 or AutoCAD ________________________ 109Exporting styles ___________________________________ 109

Modifying Line Styles __________________________________ 110Modifying line style attributes _________________________ 110Changing direction _________________________________ 110Drop line styles____________________________________ 111


Tools and Techniques to Enhance Productivity __________113Module Overview _____________________________________ 113Module Prerequisites ___________________________________ 113Module Objectives ____________________________________ 113Introductory Knowledge ________________________________ 114


Files________________________________________________ 114Global Origin _____________________________________ 114

Dialogs _____________________________________________ 115File Open Dialog __________________________________ 115Saved views dialog _________________________________ 116

The Status Bar________________________________________ 117Special Element Attributes ______________________________ 118

Primary and Construction elements ____________________ 118

Nov-08 ix Table of ContentsCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Table of Contents

The Snappable attribute _____________________________ 119The Locked attribute _______________________________ 120The Area attribute__________________________________ 120

Tools - Point Elements _________________________________ 122Solving design problems with points____________________ 122

Tools - Align Elements by Edge __________________________ 124Tools - Curves________________________________________ 126

Composite curves __________________________________ 126Point curves ______________________________________ 126B-spline curves ____________________________________ 127

Tools - Cells _________________________________________ 129Annotation scale for cells ____________________________ 129Cell placement options ______________________________ 129Cell index ________________________________________ 131

Tools - Selecting Elements ______________________________ 131Select By Attributes ________________________________ 131Element Selection __________________________________ 132

Tools - Change Attributes _______________________________ 133Tools - Detailing Symbols _______________________________ 134Clip Volumes ________________________________________ 134

Clip Volume Options _______________________________ 137Clip Volumes and View Attributes _____________________ 138Clip Volume Settings and Display Style__________________ 139Applying a clip volume ______________________________ 139

Browsing Element Information___________________________ 141Set the Default Snap Mode as a User Preference ______________ 142Module Review _______________________________________ 143


Working with AccuDraw in 3D ________________________145Module Overview _____________________________________ 145Module Prerequisites ___________________________________ 145Module Objectives ____________________________________ 145Introductory Knowledge ________________________________ 146


The Drawing Planes ___________________________________ 146AccuDraw and Element Placement in 3D ___________________ 147Using AccuDraw’s Rotated Drawing Planes _________________ 150Orthogonal Drawing Plane Rotation _______________________ 152Tentative Snaps and AccuDraw___________________________ 156Module Review _______________________________________ 158


Table of Contents x Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Data Management __________________________________159Module Overview _____________________________________ 159Module Prerequisites ___________________________________ 159Module Objectives ____________________________________ 159Introductory Knowledge ________________________________ 160


Standards Checker_____________________________________ 161Configuring settings ________________________________ 161Performing checks _________________________________ 162

Dimension Audit______________________________________ 164Using the options __________________________________ 164

Data Cleanup ________________________________________ 165General settings ___________________________________ 165Finding overlaps ___________________________________ 166Finding gaps ______________________________________ 166

Compare Design Files Graphically ________________________ 168Merging Files_________________________________________ 168

From MicroStation _________________________________ 168From a command prompt____________________________ 169Merging references _________________________________ 170

File Fence ___________________________________________ 170Copy/Move Fence Contents to New File ________________ 170Using a key-in _____________________________________ 171

File Compression _____________________________________ 172Module Review _______________________________________ 173


Linking Project Data ________________________________175Module Overview _____________________________________ 175Module Prerequisites ___________________________________ 175Module Objectives ____________________________________ 175Introductory Knowledge ________________________________ 175


HTML Author _______________________________________ 176Creating an HTML file from a cell library ________________ 176Create HTML File dialog ____________________________ 177Design file saved views ______________________________ 178Basic macros______________________________________ 178Design file snapshot ________________________________ 179

Engineering Links _____________________________________ 179HTML statements to control MicroStation_______________ 181

Project Explorer ______________________________________ 183Document links ___________________________________ 184

Nov-08 xi Table of ContentsCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Table of Contents

Linking project files to elements _______________________ 184Link properties ____________________________________ 184Validating links ____________________________________ 185


Composing Sheets __________________________________187Module Overview _____________________________________ 187Module Prerequisites ___________________________________ 187Module Objectives ____________________________________ 187Introductory Knowledge ________________________________ 188


Drawing Composition Workflow Task _____________________ 189Dynamic Views _______________________________________ 189

Glossary _________________________________________ 190Dynamic views overview ____________________________ 191General workflows _________________________________ 192Dynamic view workflow _____________________________ 1932D typical workflow ________________________________ 196Using Project Explorer with dynamic views ______________ 202Configuration variable links __________________________ 203Common uses of harvested files for users________________ 204Design composition ________________________________ 205View composition__________________________________ 206Clip volumes______________________________________ 207Creating a saved view _______________________________ 208Sheet composition _________________________________ 210Detailing symbols __________________________________ 214Numbering sheets and drawings _______________________ 219Annotating section views ____________________________ 220Associate dimension to dynamic volumes and sections ______ 220Simple 3D workflow________________________________ 220

Multi-Scale Detail Sheets ________________________________ 228Scaling the details __________________________________ 228Detail scale options_________________________________ 229Scaling the model __________________________________ 231References and active model annotation scale_____________ 232


Customizing the User Interface _______________________235Module Overview _____________________________________ 235Module Prerequisites ___________________________________ 235

Table of Contents xii Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Module Objectives ____________________________________ 235Introductory Knowledge ________________________________ 236


Personal DGN Libraries ________________________________ 237Enforcing Standards With Element Templates _______________ 238

Creating element templates ___________________________ 238Assigning properties ________________________________ 239Working with element templates_______________________ 240Setting and locking templates _________________________ 240Updating elements using templates _____________________ 241

Customizing Tasks and Tools ____________________________ 242Creating tasks _____________________________________ 242Creating tasks and adding tools________________________ 243Editing tasks ______________________________________ 244Use tasks to define a workflow ________________________ 245Including tasks within tasks___________________________ 246Main Tasks _______________________________________ 246Creating tools _____________________________________ 246Tool icons________________________________________ 247General settings for user tools ________________________ 248Adding advanced tools ______________________________ 248Adding custom tools to tasks _________________________ 249Apply an element template to a tool ____________________ 250Managing tool settings ______________________________ 251Additional tool properties ____________________________ 252

Migrating Resources ___________________________________ 253.Stg resources _____________________________________ 253Importing an m01 file _______________________________ 253

Reporting on Customizations ____________________________ 254Exporting and importing customizations to XML__________ 254

Working with Menus___________________________________ 254Creating menus____________________________________ 255Adding tools to a menu______________________________ 255Menu items_______________________________________ 256Additional menu properties __________________________ 256Context menus ____________________________________ 256Context menus ____________________________________ 257


Protecting Your Intellectual Property ___________________259Module Overview _____________________________________ 259Module Prerequisites ___________________________________ 259Module Objectives ____________________________________ 259

Nov-08 xiii Table of ContentsCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Table of Contents

Introductory Knowledge ________________________________ 260Questions ________________________________________ 260Answers _________________________________________ 260

File Protection________________________________________ 260Distinguish between digital rights and signing files _________ 260Digital rights ______________________________________ 261Rights as defined in MicroStation ______________________ 261

Enabling File Protection ________________________________ 261File protection using a password_______________________ 263The Digital Rights dialog ____________________________ 264Adding additional licenses____________________________ 266Protecting a file with a digital certificate _________________ 268Unencrypting files__________________________________ 269

Application Compliance ________________________________ 269Digital Signatures _____________________________________ 270

What is in a digital signature? _________________________ 271Creating a signature cell to sign files ____________________ 273The Digital Signatures dialog _________________________ 274Signature hierarchies ________________________________ 274Signature hierarchies and signed references_______________ 275Signatures and design history _________________________ 276


Single and Multi-Sheet Printing _______________________279Module Overview _____________________________________ 279Module Prerequisites ___________________________________ 279Module Objectives ____________________________________ 279Introductory Knowledge ________________________________ 280


Printing Single Sheets __________________________________ 280The Print Dialog ______________________________________ 281

General settings ___________________________________ 281Setting print attributes_______________________________ 282Printer and paper size _______________________________ 283Print scale and position______________________________ 284Working with borders_______________________________ 286Levels ___________________________________________ 286User preference settings _____________________________ 286Raster support ____________________________________ 287Sending data to the printer ___________________________ 287PDF support______________________________________ 289Exercise: Determine PDF output ______________________ 290Driver formats ____________________________________ 291

Table of Contents xiv Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Modifying printer drivers ____________________________ 291Print Definition files ________________________________ 296

Printing Sets of Files ___________________________________ 297Print Organizer____________________________________ 297Viewing a print set _________________________________ 298Selecting a printer __________________________________ 298Hierarchical print sets _______________________________ 299Creating Print Sets _________________________________ 299Selecting design files and models ______________________ 300Print Organizer and Project Explorer ___________________ 300PDFs with hierarchical bookmarks _____________________ 303Print preview _____________________________________ 304Print Styles _______________________________________ 304Opening JOB files _________________________________ 305

Pen Tables___________________________________________ 305Creating pen tables _________________________________ 306Text substitutions __________________________________ 306Pen maps ________________________________________ 307Pen Table Options dialog ____________________________ 308The Element Selection Criteria tab _____________________ 309Element Output Actions tab__________________________ 310AutoCAD CTB and STB files_________________________ 313


Google Earth Tools _________________________________317Module Overview _____________________________________ 317Module Prerequisites ___________________________________ 317Module Objectives ____________________________________ 317Introductory Knowledge ________________________________ 318


The Google Earth Environment __________________________ 318How it works _____________________________________ 318

Defining Geographic Location ___________________________ 319Defining a Placemark Monument _________________________ 319Display in the Google Earth Environment __________________ 324Removing Placemark Monuments_________________________ 325Exporting Files _______________________________________ 3253D Warehouse _______________________________________ 325Configuration ________________________________________ 326Working Off-line______________________________________ 326Google Earth Settings __________________________________ 326

General settings ___________________________________ 3273D settings _______________________________________ 328

Nov-08 xv Table of ContentsCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Table of Contents

Google Earth Tools ___________________________________ 329Capturing Google Earth images _______________________ 329Synchronizing Google Earth views _____________________ 330Follow a Google Earth view __________________________ 330Play camera animations in Google Earth_________________ 330

Module Review _______________________________________ 331Review questions __________________________________ 331Review answers____________________________________ 331

Appendix: Using the Settings Manager _________________333Appendix Overview ___________________________________ 333Appendix Objectives___________________________________ 333Using Select Settings ___________________________________ 333Creating Settings Groups________________________________ 335Creating Components __________________________________ 335

True Scale for cells _________________________________ 336Scale option ______________________________________ 336Apply Drawing Scale option __________________________ 336Multi-line components ______________________________ 336Dimension components _____________________________ 337Text components __________________________________ 338

Migrating Components to Styles __________________________ 339Importing Using Customize _____________________________ 340Appendix Review _____________________________________ 341

Review questions __________________________________ 341Review answers____________________________________ 341

Appendix: Digitizing ________________________________343Appendix Overview ___________________________________ 343Appendix Objectives___________________________________ 343The Digitizer Tablet Interface ____________________________ 343

Requirements _____________________________________ 343Installation _______________________________________ 344Configuration _____________________________________ 344Compatibility with other WINTAB Drivers ______________ 344Button assignments_________________________________ 345

Digitizing ___________________________________________ 345Set up to digitize ___________________________________ 346Define the screen partition ___________________________ 346Match the hard copy to the design _____________________ 347

Tools for Digitizing____________________________________ 347Stream line strings__________________________________ 347Point and stream curves _____________________________ 348

Appendix Review _____________________________________ 349Review questions __________________________________ 349Review answers____________________________________ 349

Table of Contents xvi Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Appendix: Imaging for Publishing _____________________351Appendix Overview ___________________________________ 351Appendix Objectives___________________________________ 351PostScript Output _____________________________________ 351

PSCRIPT ________________________________________ 351PDF ____________________________________________ 352

HPGL2/RTL Print Driver ______________________________ 353CGM Output ________________________________________ 354

Exporting ________________________________________ 354Importing ________________________________________ 356

Raster Files __________________________________________ 357Display planes_____________________________________ 358Display priority ____________________________________ 358PDF support______________________________________ 360Cache Manager ____________________________________ 360Binary enhancement ________________________________ 361Draping _________________________________________ 361

Appendix Review _____________________________________ 361Review questions __________________________________ 361Review answers____________________________________ 361

Nov-08 xvii Table of ContentsCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Table of Contents

Table of Contents xviii Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Course Overview

Course Description

This course covers advanced MicroStation features and concepts. It will help users build skills such as adding detail and information to designs, using features to organize design data and using utilities to create and manage output.

Target Audience

This course is recommended for the following audience:

• Those who have experience using MicroStation in a production 2D drafting environment.

Prerequisites

• Knowledge of Microsoft Windows

• For users of MicroStation V8i

• Knowledge of basic MicroStation commands and procedures

• Knowledge of basic MicroStation element placement, modification, and viewing tools

• Knowledge of basic MicroStation 2D drafting techniques

Course Objectives

After completing this course, you will be able to:

• Customize the user interface

• Use additional AccuDraw and other features to increase productivity

• Use annotation scale and create multi-scale detail sheets

Nov-08 1 Course Overview


Modules Included

• Work with tags

• Use features to organize frequently used resources

• Use utilities to verify the accuracy of design data

• Protect your intellectual property

• Assemble information about design data

• Create customized output and control that output

Modules Included

The following modules are included in this course:

Course Overview

Customizing the User Interface

Design File Settings

Tools, Tips and Techniques to Enhance Productivity

Grouping Elements

Annotation Scale

Creating Multi-Scale Detail Sheets

Annotating Designs

Working With Tags

Custom Line Styles

Working With AccuDraw in 3D

Data Management

Linking Project Data

Protecting Your Intellectual Property

Creating Printed Output

Using Batch Print

Course Overview 2 Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Introductory Knowledge

Google Earth

Digitizing (Appendix)

The Settings Manager (Appendix)

Imaging for Publishing (Appendix)


Questions

Before you begin the course, let’s define what you already know.

1 How do you create a new design file?

2 How do you create a model?

3 How do you open the View Attributes dialog?

4 How do you create a cell?

5 How do you create a selection set?

6 How do you control the types of files that are listed in the File Open dialog and file open and save dialogs?

Answers

1 From inside MicroStation, select File > New or click the New icon in the Standard toolbox. Select the desired seed file and provide a name. From the File Open dialog, click the New File icon and follow the preceding steps.

2 Open the Models dialog by selecting File > Models or clicking the Models tool in the Primary too box. Then click Create a new model.

3 Click the View Attributes tool in the view control toolbox, click the Bentley B icon and select View Attributes or select Settings > View Attributes.

4 Select Element > Cells and then open an existing or create a new cell library. Select the geometry that will make up the cell and identify an origin using Place Cell Origin. Then click Create in the Cell Library dialog. You can also create cell geometry in separate models in a DGN file. This file can then be opened as a cell library.

5 Select the Element Selection tool, set the tool settings and use the appropriate mode to identify the elements you want to include.

6 Select the desired file type, or All Files (*.*) from the Files of type options.

Nov-08 3 Course OverviewCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Design File Settings

Module Overview

This module explains the settings that are saved in DGN files as well as personal user preferences that you set yourself.

Module Prerequisites


• Knowledge about models

Module Objectives

After completing this module, you will be able to:

• Understand and set settings that are saved in a DGN file

• Understand and set user preferences

• Manage user preferences

Nov-08 5 Design File Settings




Before you begin this module, let's define what you already know.

Questions

1 What is a model?

2 What are locks?

3 What is a configuration variable?

Answers

1 A model has its own set of eight views and serves as a container for design geometry. The 2D/3D options let you set whether the design model is 2D or 3D.

2 They are settings that let you control the actions of various tools. You selectively enable or disable them to affect the way MicroStation interprets and reacts to your input.

3 A string that defines where MicroStation should look for certain files or classes of files. These let you customize your MicroStation working environment.

Design File Settings 6 Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Settings Saved in the Design File


Features such as view window positions, the active element attributes and view attributes are not automatically saved when you change them. If you want to preserve the layout on the screen exactly the way you see it, always select Save Settings from the File menu. These settings are then stored with the DGN file. If you open a different file, you will likely find different settings. For this reason, these settings are referred to as design file settings.

Other design file settings can be set in the (Settings > Design File) Design File Settings dialog. Set the desired options and select File > Save Settings before exiting the file so that the settings are in effect when the file is reopened.

Active angle and active scale

Use options in these categories to set these values for the DGN file. You can also use the key-in AA=<angle> (AA=45) to set the active angle or AS=<scale> (AS=10) to set the active scale.

Hint: If the angle or scale value is omitted, the current setting is displayed in the status bar.

When you set the active angle or scale in a tool’s tool settings, the value that is stored in the file also changes.

Options set here affect the entire DGN file, not individual models.

Angle Readout

Use options in this category to set the format and accuracy for angle readout. Options set here affect the entire DGN file, not individual models.

You can select from the following formats. DD.DDDD is for Decimal degrees, DD MM SS is for Degrees, minutes, seconds or you can select Gradians or Radians.

Nov-08 7 Design File SettingsCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


Accuracy sets the angle readout accuracy up to 8 decimal places.

Color

Use options in this category to modify the color of highlighted elements, the pointer and selection sets. Options set here affect the entire DGN file, not individual models.

Direction Readout

Use options in this category to set the format, accuracy, mode and direction for direction readout.

Mode sets the way angles are measured.

• Conventional measures angles counterclockwise from the design plane’s positive X-axis.

• Azimuth measures angles clockwise from the design plane’s positive Y-axis.

• Bearing reads out distance axis, angle and direction.

The Base Direction option sets the base direction for angle readout to North, South, East or West. To specify a different direction, select Custom and enter a value.

If you are using the Azimuth mode, the Clockwise option sets the sweep orientation used for direction readout in the clockwise direction.

Options set here affect the entire DGN file, not individual models.

Element Attributes

Use options in this category to set the active attribute settings. If you change attribute values in the Attributes toolbox, the active values in the model also change. Settings are specific to each model in a DGN file.



Fence, Locks, Snaps

Use options in these categories to set the active fence mode, toggle locks, set the active snap mode and toggle the Snap and Association locks. If you change the values using other means, such as in a tool’s tool settings or using any of the locks or snaps dialogs or menus, the active value in the file also changes. Options set here affect the entire DGN file, not individual models.

The grid

This category has controls that are used to set Grid Lock and the grid’s spacing and configuration. Settings are specific to each model in a DGN file. To set the distance between grid references, select Settings > Design File, Grid category and type a value in the Grid Reference field. This field sets the distance between grid references using a multiple of Master/Grid. The Grid Master field sets the distance, in working units, between horizontal grid points in an orthogonal grid.

The appropriate grid unit settings for a design are related to the size of the design, working units, and the required precision.

The grid lock

This lock forces data points to be aligned with the grid.

Isometric

Use options in this category to determine how data points relate to the isometric plane. The Isometric Plane options set the axes of the isometric drawing plane for use with the Isometric lock and the Place Isometric Block and Place Isometric Circle tools. Settings are specific to each model in a DGN file.

Views

Use options in this category to adjust the sizes of view windows and control the display of background images in view windows. Settings are specific to each model in a DGN file.

Working Units

Use options in this category to set real units of measurement for design models. Settings are specific to each model in a DGN file.



Linear Units

Use the Format options to display only master units, both master and sub units, or master, sub and positional units.

You can use Metric and English master and sub units. Select the desired units from the option menus. If you prefer to see a label other than the one listed, simply change text string in the field.

Use the Accuracy options to set decimal accuracy up to six decimal places for coordinates, eight decimal places for scientific accuracy, eight decimal places for angles, or to set fractional accuracy.

Changing the units that are used makes no difference to the actual size of geometry.

Exercise: Changing working units

1 Set the following in the File Open dialog:

Project: Building

2 Open \Designs\BSI300X-9-Sign.dgn.

3 Select Measure Length from the Measure toolbox.

This tool reports the length and angle of a selected element.

4 Enter a data point on any linear component of the sign and note the length.

_______________________________________

5 Select Settings > Drawing Scale.

The Master and Sub units are Millimeters. Suppose you need English units. All you need to do is change the units setting and the elements will measure correctly in the new units.

6 Change master units to Feet and sub units to MicroInches.

7 Enter a data point on the same linear component of the sign and note the length.

_______________________________________

The sign has not changed size, but the units are reported in English units.

If you begin to design and then decide to change the working units, this change only affects the way the elements are measured. Changing units does not change element size.


User Preferences

Note: You can also use the key-in SET UNITS xxxx, where xxxx is a unit name such as Meters.

Exercise: Changing coordinate readout

1 Continuing in BSI300X-9-Sign.dgn, select Settings > Design File, Working Units category and note that the format units are reported in are master and sub units (MU:SU) and that the accuracy is set to four decimal places.

2 Change the following:

Format: MU

Accuracy: 0.12

3 Click OK.

4 Enter a data point on a linear component of the sign and note the length.

Advanced Settings

Changing the Resolution setting in the Advanced settings does change the size of existing geometry in the model. Clicking the Edit button opens the Advanced Unit Settings dialog. The Resolution setting establishes the size of a grid that overlays the drawing area. This grid is used for backward compatibility with older versions of MicroStation.

The resolution value does not affect the accuracy of a model, so changing its value will not increase or decrease the accuracy of the model. However, it can create a situation where a model cannot be properly exported back to a MicroStation V7 file. The Resolution setting will rarely, if ever, have to be changed from the default.

User Preferences

Many features of the user interface are automatically saved and carried from one design session to the next. They are different from settings that are saved with a DGN file.

The User Preference file, UPF file, is a binary file that contains information about the settings established in the Preferences dialog, your Button Assignments, the location of opened toolboxes, the key-in history and more. In addition to MicroStation, some MDL applications may also use the UPF file to store specific settings and preferences.

The Preferences dialog is much like the DGN File Settings dialog, with categories on the left and options on the right. Some of the settings changes take effect immediately. Others require you to restart MicroStation before they become effective.


User Preferences

Setting preferences

You can type a name for a group of preference settings in the Name for preferences field. This changes the description that is stored with the preferences; it does not create a new preferences file.

Exercise: Change user preferences

1 Continuing in BSI300X-9-Sign.dgn, select Workspace > Preferences.

2 Select the Input category.

3 Change the Pointer Size setting from Normal to Full View and click OK.

This setting affects the size of the pointer when a drawing tool is active. It takes effect immediately. The Full View setting may be more comfortable for people who have used other applications.

4 Open the Preferences dialog, select the Task Navigation category, and note the Dialog Presentation Options.

If you enable Show Navigation Tools the keyboard navigation icons will display in the Task Navigation dialog.

Preferences in the Operation category such as Open Two Application Windows and Enter into Untitled design require you to restart MicroStation. This also applies to Look and Feel preferences that affect MicroStation’s interface.

5 Click the Defaults button, and then click OK to return to the default settings.

6 Select File > Close when you are done reviewing preferences.


User Preferences

Managing preferences

By default the UPF file is located in the \Documents and Settings\<username>\Local Settings\Application Data\Bentley\MicroStation\8.11\<encrypted>\prefs folder and will have the same name as the workspace in which you are working. You are working in the delivered examples workspace, so there is a corresponding examples.upf file in the \prefs folder. One is created for each workspace in which you work.

UPF files are written to while you are working. As your preferences and settings change, so does the size of the UPF file. Additionally, preferences and settings may vary for different workspaces.

You can create the configuration variable MS_COMPRESS_USER_PREFS and set it to 1 to detect UPF files that are larger than 500K and compress them.

Note: You may want to check with your administrator before changing any preferences settings on your system.


Module Review

Module Review

Now that you have completed this module, let’s measure what you have learned.

Questions

1 What must you do to preserve the layout on the screen exactly the way you see it?

2 True or False: When settings are saved in the DGN file they will not be available the next time you launch a MicroStation session.

3 Do all DGN file settings affect the entire file?

4 True or False: Changing the units that are used in a file changes the size of geometry in the file.

5 What is the function of the user preference file?

6 True or False: A user preference file is created for each workspace in which you work.

Answers

1 Always select Save Settings from the File menu.

2 False. Settings are then stored with the DGN file. Any time you open it, they will be as they were.

3 No. Some affect the entire DGN file and some individual models.

4 False. Changing between the units that are used makes no difference to the actual size of geometry.

5 A UPF file stores features of the user interface so they are automatically saved and carried from one design session to the next. Such as, settings established in the Preferences dialog, your Button Assignments, the location of opened toolboxes, the key-in history, etc.

6 True.


Working with Cells

Module Overview

Cells can represent complex elements that you use regularly in your designs. Rather than redraw them each time, you can save them in a cell library to recall for repeated use. This module discusses how to create and maintain them.



• Knowledge of basic MicroStation tools


• Knowledge about cell placement

Module Objectives


• Create a cell library

• Create and edit cells

• Create annotation cells

• Access the cells that you need

• Create a cell index

• Create an HTML page from a cell library

Nov-08 15 Working with Cells





Questions

1 What is a model?

2 How do you open one?

3 What is the purpose of a cell?

Answers

1 A model has its own set of eight views and serves as a container for geometry. The 2D/3D options let you set whether the design model is 2D or 3D.

2 Double click it in the Models dialog, or if a view group was created select it in the view groups dialog.

3 Cells can represent complex elements that you use regularly in your designs.

Cell Libraries

Cell libraries are really DGN files that contain one or more models, one for each cell. The cells are simply design models that have the option Can be placed as a cell enabled. Cells created in this fashion have the model’s origin as their origin. There can be 2D and 3D cells in the same library.

Because of the file format there is no limit to the size of a cell library or the individual cells in it. Cell names and descriptions are only limited by the maximum character string permitted by an operating system. Considering this, developing a standard naming convention for cells and libraries so names remain realistic is a good idea.

You should also consider the working units that you use for your models. You may want to create the cells using the units that you use in the models. However, the True Scale option, located in the tool settings, lets MicroStation scale cells created in one unit of measurement (Metric) when placed in a design with different units (English). A cell that was created at 1 meter wide can be placed in a file with feet as master units, and with True Scale enabled, it will measure 3.2808 feet. True Scale aligns the units in the cell one to the units in the design. This means you can define multiple working units in the same library. If cells are placed with True Scale enabled, they will be the correct size regardless of DGN file units.

Open a cell library just like a DGN file. To access the geometry of individual cells you open the, File > Models, Models dialog. This dialog is used to create, manage and switch between

Working with Cells 16 Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Cell Libraries

different models in the active DGN file. In the dialog, double click the model corresponding to a specific cell.

Attach all the cell libraries that are contained in a folder by selecting File > Attach Folder in the Cell Library dialog. You can attach V7 DGN files, 3D Studio (.3DS), or DXF files as cells.

When a cell library is attached, right click on a cell in the Cell Library dialog and select Open for Editing from the pop-up menu to directly open the model that contains the geometry.

Exercise: Create a cell library


Project: Geospatial

2 Open \Drawings\BSI200-D03-Public Works.dgn.

3 Window around the area shown, and look for Market Plaza.

4 Select Element > Cells.

5 In the Cell Library dialog, select File > New.

6 Name the library Landmarks.

Note the use of the .cel extension. It could also be .dgnlib or .dgn.

Nov-08 17 Working with CellsCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating and Editing Cells


Instead of creating your own cell library, you may want to consider using the cell libraries supplied in MicroStation's sample workspaces. Also, many cell libraries can be purchased from third-party vendors and then customized. Another way to add cells to a library is to import them.

Exercise: Create a cell

1 Continuing in BSI200-D03-Public Works.dgn, select Drop Element from the Main toolbox.

2 Enter a data point on the cell representing Market Plaza, and another to accept.

Now the cell is returned to the elements that comprise it and you can change those elements.

3 Select Element Selection and select just the elements that comprised the cell.

You can use any selection mode to select elements and you can also fence the elements you want to include.

4 Select Define Cell Origin from the Cells tools in the Tasks dialog.

5 Enter a data point on the part of the geometry you want to be attached to the pointer when the cell is placed.

A mark appears at the location. The origin can be the center of the geometry, or any meaningful part. You can snap to make the point precise.

6 Reset to end the command.

Any subsequent data points will change the location of the origin.

7 In the Cell Library dialog, click the Create button.

8 Name the cell Shopping and add a description if desired. Leave the cell type set to Graphic. Then, click Create.

Importing cells

Exercise: Import cells into a library file

1 Continuing in BSI200-D03-Public Works.dgn, select File > Open and navigate up two levels to the project \cell folder.

2 Open Landmarks.cel.

3 Open the Models dialog.

4 Double click on the Shopping model.



You see the geometry representing the cell you created.

5 In the Models dialog, click Import Models.

6 In the Import Models From dialog, navigate up one level to the project \cell folder, change the file type filter to All Files (*.*), select Geospatial.CEL and click Open.

7 Select all of the models in the list except the Default model and click OK.

Note: You can resize the dialog to see more of the models.

To edit cells, just open the .cel, .dgn, or .dgnlib file that contains the model representing the geometry and edit the model. To create your own, create a model in the library file and draw the geometry.

Annotation cells

When creating a model that will be placed as a cell, you have the option of associating an Annotation Scale to the model. Any text or cells that you place in the sheet model with the Annotation Scale lock enabled in the tool settings will automatically be scaled by that amount.

For example, if you were creating a 1m = 200m scale drawing, any cell that you place would have to be 200 times larger than normal so that it prints at the correct size. With Annotation Scale set to 200:1, you don't have to worry about calculating the size of the cell. If you turn on the Annotation Scale lock and place a 5mm cell, it will be placed in the sheet model as 1,000mm high, but when printed at 1:200 scale it will be scaled to 5mm high.

How to create a cell for placement as an annotation cell:

Open the library. In the Models dialog, select the cell model, and then click the Edit Model Properties icon. In the Model Properties dialog, enable the Can be placed as a cell and Can be placed as an annotation cell check boxes. If creating your own cell, enable these check boxes at creation time.

How to change the model’s annotation scale:

Open the library, and, in the cell model select Settings > Drawing Scale. Change the Annotation Scale to the desired value and click Yes in the Alert dialog.

How to make an existing cell an annotation cell:

Open the library that contains the cell as a DGN file. In the Models dialog, select the cell model and click the Edit Model Properties icon. In the Model Properties dialog, turn on Can be placed as a cell and Can be placed as an annotation cell. Model Properties dialog with added Cell Properties Click OK.

You can toggle the annotation scale lock for previously placed annotation cells using the key-ins ANNOTATIONSCALE ADD and ANNOTATIONSCALE REMOVE. If a selection


Shared Cells

set is active, the key-ins apply only to selected annotation cells. If there is no selection set, all annotation cells in the model are included.

Note: The key-ins are useful if you place one of these cells with the Annotation Scale lock toggled to the wrong state.

Use the key-in ANNOTATIONSCALE CHANGE <value> to change the annotation scale of selected or all annotation cells.

Shared Cells

A shared cell is a cell whose elements are stored only once in a DGN file, regardless of how often the cell is placed. Any change made to one instance of a shared cell changes all instances of that shared cell.

To place one, enable Use Shared Cells in the Cell Library dialog. The first time you place a cell with Use Shared Cells on, the shared cell definition, which stores the elements comprising the cell, is stored in the DGN file in much the same way as it is stored in the cell library. A shared cell can have many instances in a DGN but only one definition.

The cell library does not need to be attached to place subsequent instances of the shared cell. When a shared cell instance is replaced using the Replace Cells tool, all instances of the cell are replaced. It is not necessary to know where the shared cell definition is in the DGN file; identifying any instance of the shared cell identifies the actual definition.

For an unshared cell, the library definition is stored in the DGN file each time the cell is placed. Using shared cells is a way to reduce DGN file size. The reduction is greatest in files with cells that have a large number of component elements or instances.

Exercise: Shared cells

1 Continuing in Landmarks.cel, in the Shopping model, click Previous model twice to return to BSI200-D03-Public Works.dgn.

2 Select Place Active Cell, and then click the magnifying glass next to the Active Cell field.

3 In the Cell Library dialog, select File > Attach and attach Landmarks.cel.

4 Scroll to the Shopping cell, select it, and click the Placement button.

5 Enable the Use Shared Cells check box.

6 Set the following tool settings:

X Scale: 1.000

Y Scale: 1.000


Shared Cells

7 Place a couple of the cells in the drawing.

Exercise: Edit the cell and update the shared cells

1 In the Cell Library dialog, right click the Shopping cell and select Open for Editing.

2 Select Element Selection and click Select All in the tool settings.

3 Select Rotate Element from the Main toolbox with the following tool settings:

Method: Active Angle and type 90 in the input field below it

4 Clear the selection set.

5 Click Previous model to return to BSI200-D03-Public Works.dgn.

6 In the Cell Library dialog, disable the Use Shared Cells check box.

If you leave it enabled you will be placing more copies of the original definition and not the new definition.

7 Place another Shopping cell.

8 Select Replace Cells with the following tool setting:

Method: Replace

Mode: Global

9 Identify one of the shared Shopping cells you placed.

10 Identify the new one.

11 Click Yes in the Alert.

12 Select File > Close.

The use of shared cells is recommended for the following reasons:

• Shared cells are faster to place and manipulate than unshared cells. The first time a cell is placed in the DGN file, the cell library in which it is stored must be attached. If the cell is placed as a shared cell, it is not necessary to have the cell library attached to place additional instances of that cell.

• All instances of a shared cell in the DGN file are replaced when any instance of that shared cell is replaced.

• Shared cells can be associated with points on other elements, if Association Lock (Settings > Locks > Association) is on. For example, if a shared door cell is placed in a wall and associated with that wall, the door will automatically move if the wall is moved.

• Shared cells usually reduce DGN file size, thereby improving performance.

Note: Note that the DWG workmode supports only shared cells.


Display All Cells In Path

Display All Cells In Path

This option determines which cells you see in the Cell library Dialog. Check with your administrator regarding the option.

If this option in enabled and Use Shared Cells is off, cells are displayed in the following order: first, normal cells from the cell libraries specified by the MS_CELLLIST configuration variable, then normal cells listed in the directory specified by the MS_BLOCKLIST configuration variable.

If on and Use Shared Cells is on, cells are displayed in the following order: shared cells in the open DGN file, shared cells in the attached cell library, cells in the cell libraries listed in MS_CELLLIST, and cells in the directory listed in MS_BLOCKLIST.

Cell Index

A cell index contains all of the models in the active DGN file that have the Can be placed as cell option enabled.

Find the Place Cell Index tool in the Cells toolbox. Tool settings let you set the size of the box in which each cell appears. The size is based on the active text style.

You can also set the number of cells per row and you can choose whether to display grid lines, similar to showing grid lines in spreadsheet applications. You can include cell names and descriptions. The Insertion Points option displays the cell origin.

A cell index can be used as a screen menu if the Grid Lines option is enabled.

Create an HTML Page from a Cell Library

You can create an HTML document from a cell library. The HTML document is created and stored in the directory defined in the Create HTML File dialog. You can then publish the document on the Internet by uploading it to a Web server.

To do so, select HTML Author From the Utilities menu. Enable the Cell Library radio button in the HTML Author dialog and Click OK. Select a cell library and click Open. In The HTML Cell Page dialog, select the cells you want to include and adjust any other settings. When you click OK, the Create HTML File dialog opens. Change title, description or destination folder and click OK.


Module Review

Module Review


Questions

1 What does true scale do?

2 How do place a cell using it?

3 How do create, or edit, a cell?

4 Why is it important to disable the Use Shared Cells check box in the Cell Library dialog before placing an updated version of a shared cell?

5 Why would you use shared cells?

Answers

1 It lets MicroStation scale cells created in one unit of measurement (Metric) when placed in a design with different units (English).

2 Enable the check box in the tool settings at placement time.

3 Open the desired library file and open the model containing the cell to edit, or create a new model and draw the geometry for a new cell.

4 If you leave it enabled you will be placing more copies of the original definition and not the new definition.

5 It is not necessary to have the cell library attached to place additional instances of that cell.

All instances of a shared cell in the DGN file are replaced when any instance of that shared cell is replaced.

Shared cells usually reduce DGN file size, thereby improving performance.


Module Review


Grouping Elements Together

Module Overview

Creating a cell is a formal way to associate a number of elements. This module discusses different methods for grouping elements in more casual relationships.





Module Objectives


• Work with levels

• Work with Graphic groups

• Work with Named groups

• Work with Complex chains and shapes

• Work with Groups

Dec-08 25 Grouping Elements Together





Questions

1 What is a level?

2 What function do locks perform?

3 What is a hierarchy?

4 What are complex elements, such as cells?

Answers

1 It is like a transparent overlay. Levels make it easier to see, and work with, different aspects of a design.

2 Locks are settings that let you control the actions of various tools.

3 A hierarchy is a system of things ranked one above another. A parent/child relationship.

4 A complex element is created by combining several primitive elements.

Levels

You can group elements by organizing data in logical levels. The display of elements residing on particular levels can be toggled to display only the information, elements, that you want to see or with which you want to work.

You can isolate elements on a particular level, and even those of specific types, using the Element Selection tool’s attribute tabs.

Creating level definitions

You can create an unlimited number of titled level definitions. When a level is created, a level element is created in the DGN file. Once a level element is created, it can be used by any design element.

Each level definition consists of the following properties:

• A level name up to 512 characters long

Grouping Elements Together 26 Dec-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Levels

• ByLevel symbology, which is stored with the level and is applied to elements when they are placed on that level.

• Override symbology which is a second set of symbology that is stored with the level

• External referencing

By default, MicroStation will use the levels defined within a DGN file. However, levels can be stored in design libraries, providing support for design standards enforcement.

It is most efficient to define and save a level structure before users begin work. A variety of sample level structures are delivered in the example files. When you create your own level structure, group individual levels and groups of levels hierarchically for easy maintenance. It is easiest to map out all top level groups before defining the level structure.

Note: Level names and groups are settings that must be saved. Select File > Save Settings. If you do not save settings, the level structure is lost when you close the DGN file.

The Level Manager

This is the primary tool used to create and maintain level definitions. Open the dialog by selecting Settings > Level > Manager or click the Level Manager tool in the Primary tools toolbox. Select the tool to open the dialog or click the downward arrow next to it to open a pop-up version.

Attributes are listed in columns.

• The Modified column indicates whether the level’s attributes are consistent with those in a library or reference. Hold the pointer over the mark in the column to see a description of the difference.

• The color, style and weight columns show the ByLevel symbology assigned to the level.

• The Used column contains a dot if the level is in use in the current design. You cannot delete a level if it is in use.

• The Priority column sets the display priority of elements on the level. Those with a higher priority display in front.

• The Transparency column lets you assign transparency for elements on the level.

Right click on any heading to open a menu from which you can select the columns you want to display.

• The File column shows the file in which the level definition is found.

Hint: The key-in Level Purge allows you to delete a level that contains elements. Elements are moved to the Default level unless a destination level is specified.

Dec-08 27 Grouping Elements TogetherCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Levels

Symbology

In addition to the usual active element attributes settings, elements can be placed with symbology settings inherited from the level on which they are placed. This is called ByLevel symbology. ByLevel is an element attribute defined for a level in the Level Manager dialog and then applied to an element at placement time.

In addition, all elements on a level, whether placed with usual or ByLevel symbology, can be displayed with an alternate set of symbology using the Overrides option. Overrides is a view attribute that can be used to alter the appearance of elements from their normal or ByLevel symbology.

ByLevel symbology

Element symbology that can be controlled using ByLevel includes color, line style and line weight. To use the ByLevel symbology associated with a level, select ByLevel for color, style or weight on the Attributes tool bar or set it in a tool’s tool settings.

Note: If the ByLevel symbology definitions for a level are later changed, any elements on the level that have been placed with the ByLevel attribute will dynamically reflect the changes.

AutoCAD users will recognize this capability as being the same as the ByLayer attribute value. This feature allows for a close working relationship between DWG and DGN files.

Override symbology

Each level can have a defined set of level symbology overrides. By default, levels are created with overrides enabled and set to color 0, style 0 and weight 0. Overrides can be modified by setting the Symbology option to Override and then selecting the desired symbology.

MicroStation users familiar with level symbology will recognize this functionality. Unlike level symbology, which required the global application of its settings, symbology overrides can be applied on a level by level basis.

Important: Level Overrides must be enabled in the View Attributes dialog for the override symbology to display.

The ByLevel display of an element cannot be turned off because it is an element attribute, not a view attribute. Display can be altered by changing the element attributes to something other than ByLevel or by using Overrides to temporarily change the display to the override symbology.


Levels

Exercise: Create a new level and assign symbology


Project: Civil

2 Move up one level to the \dgnlib folder and open civil.dgnlib.

3 Open the Level Manager.

4 Click New Level, name the level Plan Markups, and set the following attributes:

Color: 3

Style: 0

Weight: 1

Priority: 300

5 In the Level Manager, change the Symbology option to Overrides.

6 Set the following attributes:

Color: 1

Weight: 2

Exercise: Use the different symbologies

1 Select File > Open and open \dgn\Sheets\BSI400-D01-Sections.dgn.

2 In the Attributes toolbox, make Plan Markups the active level and make sure that color, style and weight are set to ByLevel.

3 Select Place Text with the following tool settings:

Method: By Origin

Text Style: 1/2 in

4 Type the following in the text editor:

Add section STA 10+00 to STA 24+00

5 Place the text on the sheet.

The text is blue, the override symbology.

6 Open the View Attributes dialog.

7 Click the Level Overrides icon.

The text is now red, the ByLevel symbology.


Levels

Exercise: Modify a level’s symbology

1 Continuing in BSI400-D01-Sections.dgn, in the Level Manager, set Symbology to ByLevel and change the color of the level Plan Markups to 1.

The text changes color. A dot appears in the Modified column. The field is populated if one or more of the level attributes differs from the source from which the level is being read. The source could be either a DGN library or a level in a reference file.

2 Move the pointer over the dot and pop-up information will define the difference.


Updating level definitions

You can update selected levels by right clicking the level name and selecting Update levels. All selected levels are updated to match the source definition.

Levels in multiple files

References are listed in a hierarchy tree under the master file in the Level Manager dialog. Right click on a reference name to open a menu from which you can open the References dialog or perform functions, such as controlling display or detaching.

Hint: Adding the File column makes it easy to see the name of the file in which a level is present.

Since you can select multiple files, you can change symbology on levels that exist in multiple files, as long as the level is not from a library.

Copying level definitions

Right clicking a level name in the Level Manager dialog opens a pop-up menu that enables you to cut, copy, and paste levels. The Copy function can be used to copy level definitions between a master file and DGN files, which are attached to it as references.

Level import and export

If you want to add levels select Level > Import in the Level Manager. In the Level/Filter Import dialog, you can select specific levels you want to add to a source. The level definition is imported directly into the file. Import levels from “.dgn”, “.dgnlib”, “.csv”, “.dwg” and “.dxf ” files. Select Level > Export to export levels.


Levels

Moving elements between levels

Right click on a level name in the Level Manager dialog and select Remap Elements to move elements from one level, or several levels, to a different level.

When you select the menu item, the Remap Elements to Level dialog appears so you can make the change. The selected level, or levels, are listed as the source. Select the destination level for elements that are on the source levels from the Destination option list.

Jumping to levels

There is a Jump to Active Level item on the right click menu from the right frame of the Level Manager dialog, or the level list in the Level Display dialog. Right click and select it and the active level is highlighted in the dialog. This is useful when working with a large number of levels because it eliminates the need to scroll through the level list to find the active level.

Working with level libraries

The Modified column in the Level Manager dialog indicates whether a level has been modified. A bullet appears if one or more of the active file’s level attributes or properties differ from the library source level. Pop-up information listing the attribute or property that is out-of-synch appears when the pointer is over the modified icon.

The name of the level library a level is derived from is listed in the Library column. To turn on display of this column, right click on a column heading and select it from the pop-up menu.

Transparency and priority

Set transparency or priority so elements obscured by other elements can be seen.


Graphic Groups

Exercise: Assign priority and transparency


Project: Geospatial

2 Open \Designs\BSI200-R03-Public Works.dgn.

3 Open the References dialog and attach BSI200-R02-Land Acquisition.dgn, the Limit model.

4 Click the View Attributes tool in the view control toolbox and click the Transparency icon.

5 Right click on a column heading and add the Transparency column.

6 Click in the Transparency column and set the transparency to 50.

The elements behind the boundary become visible.


Priority works the same way. Increase elements priority to move them to the top of the design so they are always seen. Assign either attribute when placing elements or add the column to the Level Manager or References dialogs and change the setting there.

Reference levels

• Identify reference levels easily using the File column. This makes it easier to control settings for reference levels. Right click on a column heading and add the column.

• The Modified column also indicates if a reference attachment level is out-of-sync with the attachment source.

• The display state of attachment levels remains consistent regardless of how they are changed in the source file.

Graphic Groups

Graphic groups are a quick method for grouping elements. Without breaking up the grouping you can add, remove, or manipulate individual member elements. In all other respects, the elements that comprise a graphic group are like any other elements in the DGN file. The distinction only becomes apparent when the graphic group lock is enabled.

When the Graphic Group lock is enabled, if you select Copy and identify an element in a graphic group, all elements in the graphic group will be copied. When Graphic Group lock is disabled, the Copy tool only affects the identified element.


Graphic Groups

Note: Copy, Delete and Move manipulate all elements in a graphic group whether they are displayed or not. Caution should be used to assure that you know which elements belong to a graphic group.

Creating a graphic group

The Add to Graphic Group tool adds elements to a new graphic group or to an existing graphic group and can be used to combine graphic groups.

Adding elements to an existing graphic group

To add elements to an existing graphic group, select an element that belongs to the group first, then each succeeding element will be added to the group.

Exercise: Create a graphic group


Project: Plant

2 Open \Designs\BSI700-A0101-PumpHouse.dgn.

3 Select Element Selection.

4 Expand the tool settings if necessary, select the Color tab, and click on color 34.

5 Select Add to Graphic Group from the Groups toolbox.

6 Enter a data point in the view to accept.

7 Click Clear in the tool settings to release the selection set and close the Element Information dialog.

You can also join two graphic groups together using the Add to Graphic Group tool. By selecting two elements that belong to two different graphic groups, you add the elements from the second group to the first. The identity of the second graphic group ceases to exist, as an element can belong to only one graphic group at a time.

The graphic group lock

You can access the graphic group lock by selecting Settings > Locks > Graphic Group or click the Active Locks icon in the status bar and select it from the menu.


Graphic Groups

Exercise: Work with the graphic group

1 Continuing in BSI700-A0101-PumpHouse.dgn, select Copy Element.

2 Copy the first window to the opposite wall.

The graphic group lock is not on so the window moves individually.

3 Select Edit > Undo.

4 Click the Active Locks icon in the status bar and click Graphic Group.

5 Select any window and copy the windows to the opposite wall.

This time they all move.

6 Reset.


Graphic Groups

Information about graphic groups

There are several ways to tell whether an element belongs to a graphic group. One way is to use Element Information. Select an element, or elements, and open the Element Information dialog. The Groups tab will be available and you can see the graphic group number.

When the Graphic Group lock is on, AccuSnap’s pop-up information also indicates whether an element is part of a graphic group and shows the group number.

Graphic groups and Element Selection

Not all MicroStation tools respect graphic group lock. Graphic groups are ignored when you use Element Selection to select an element for manipulation.

Dropping elements from a group

You can break up a graphic group using Drop From Graphic Group to return all of the elements to ungrouped status. If the graphic group lock is on when selecting the group you want to drop, all elements are ungrouped. If the graphic group lock is off, only the selected element is ungrouped.

Exercise: Drop the graphic group

1 Continuing in BSI700-A0101-PumpHouse.dgn, select Element Selection with the following tool settings:

Method: Individual

Mode: Add

2 Enter a data point on a window in the original graphic group and then one on a window in the copied group.

All windows are highlighted.

3 Select Drop from Graphic Group.

4 Enter a data point.

The graphic group associations are dropped.

5 Click Clear in the tool settings to release the selection set.


Named Groups

Named Groups

Named groups are another method for grouping elements. They can include elements from the active file and also those from references, whether directly attached or nested. Elements can belong to more than one named group simultaneously.

Named groups and graphic groups

The graphic group tools can be used to create and drop named groups and the graphic group lock applies to named groups. MicroStation’s tools work with named groups the same as graphic groups.

Exercise: Create a named group with the graphic group tool

1 Continuing in BSI700-A0101-PumpHouse.dgn, select Add to Graphic Group.

2 Click Create New Named Group in the tool settings.

3 Name the group Front.

Leave the Select all members when any member selected check box disabled. If this check box is enabled, when one element of the named group is selected using the Element Selection tool, all members will be selected.

4 Click OK.

The named group is listed in the named group option list in the tool settings.

5 In the tool settings, leave Member Type at Active.

6 Enter a data point on the left-most window.

Note: In this design, be careful not to highlight and select the feature solid that represents the structure.

7 Enter a data point to accept.


Named Groups

8 Enter a data point on the window next to it and enter a data point to accept.

9 Change Member Type to Passive.

10 Enter a data point to identify, and then one to accept, each of the remaining three front windows.

A named group consisting of the windows is created.

Member types

The member type options let you define how other members of the group are affected when one member is selected or manipulated. When the graphic group lock is off, both active and passive members can be operated on individually. When it is on, active members are operated upon as a group, but passive members are still operated upon individually. There can be active and passive members in the same named group.


Named Groups

Exercise: Demonstrate the difference between active and passive

1 Continuing in BSI700-A0101-PumpHouse.dgn, select Move.

2 Select the left-most front window and move it.

All the windows that are part of the window group move. If you actually move elements during the exercises, use Undo to move them back into place.

3 Select one of the three windows on the right and move it.

Only this window moves. These three are passive member of the group, so they can be operated upon independently.

Elements can also belong to more than one named group.

Exercise: Use elements as members in more than one group

1 Continuing in BSI700-A0101-PumpHouse.dgn, turn the Graphic Group lock off.

2 Select Add to Graphic Group.

3 Create a named group named Back.


Named Groups

4 Add the five windows at the back of the pump house to the group as Active members.

5 Create a named group named Left.

6 Add the two left-most front windows and the two left-most back windows to the group as Active members.

7 Turn the Graphic Group lock on.

8 Select Move.


Named Groups

9 Select the left-most rear window and move it.

The two front windows and all the back windows move because this window is an active member of both the Back and Left groups.

10 Select one of the back windows on the right and move it.

Only the back windows move, as these are active members of the Back group only.

Think of using this in a situation where a contour line and its elevation annotation, or a part and its part number, are grouped together. If future design crowds the text, as a passive member of the contour or part grouping, the textual information could be moved into a more visible position.


Named Groups

Selecting elements in a group

The selectable column in the Named Groups dialog can be toggled for each group. When the graphic group lock is on and members are selected with the Element Selection tool, if selectable is checked, all members of the named group will be selected. If it is unchecked, the propagation settings apply.

When a named group is selected in the groups list elements of the named group are selected when you click Select Elements in Named Group in the Named Groups dialog.

Named group hierarchies

Adding child groups to a parent group creates a hierarchy of named groups. When a hierarchy has been created, manipulating the parent group will include any involved child groups. You can also manipulate, add, and drop individual elements within the groups included in the hierarchy.

Exercise: Create a named group hierarchy

1 Continuing in BSI700-A0101-PumpHouse.dgn, select Utilities > Named Groups.

2 Click Show Hierarchy.

The dialog divides into two panes. The left, or hierarchy, frame lists existing hierarchies. The right frame displays details about existing named groups.

3 Click New Named Group and create a group named Windows.

4 Drag the Windows group to the hierarchy frame.

5 In the Hierarchy frame, select Windows.

6 In the right frame, select the Front group.

7 Click Add Named Group to Parent.

In the hierarchy frame, the Windows group becomes expandable and the Front group is added as a child group.

Although the Front group has been made a child of the Windows group, the original group is also in place.

8 In the right frame, select the Back group.

9 Click Add Named Group to Parent.

10 With the Windows group highlighted in the hierarchy frame, click Select Elements in Named Group.

All the elements in both groups are selected.



Named Groups

Note: When the hierarchy frame is displayed, you must select a group name in the right frame to add members to it. When the group is selected, the necessary icons become enabled.

Displaysets

Displayset display is controlled in the View Attributes dialog. When using Displaysets you select a named group and then display only those elements in the selected view.

Exercise: Use a displayset with named groups

1 Continuing in BSI700-A0101-PumpHouse.dgn, open the View Attributes dialog and click the Displayset icon.

2 Select the Back group in the right frame of the Named Groups dialog.

Selecting in the right frame selects only the Back group members. Selecting in the left frame would select the entire hierarchy.

3 Click Put Elements into the Displayset.

All elements are removed from the view except those in the Back group.

4 Hold down the Shift key, press the right mouse button, and select Clear Displayset from the pop-up menu.

5 Select File > Close when you are done.

A pop-up menu that can be used for creating and managing named groups and Displaysets can be opened by right clicking inside the Named Groups dialog.

Quicksets

Quicksets let you save up to ten sets of graphic elements for later recall. By default, quicksets are given the names Quickset1 through to Quickset0 but can be renamed. Once renamed, they are no longer considered quicksets and their previous designation can be used for a new quickset.

Groups of elements can be created and recalled using the Quickset Save and Quickset Recall menus from the Shift + right mouse button pop-up menu.

You can also create up to ten quicksets using the keyboard shortcut Ctrl-Shift-n where “n” is the quickset number. You can recall them by using Ctrl-n. When creating or recalling a quickset, the numbers in the alpha-numeric section of the keyboard must be used, not those from the numeric keypad.

These quicksets can be used to easily group elements for manipulation. A quickset has an advantage over a Selection Set in that it is durable, and not a one time only grouping.


Complex Chains and Shapes

To recall the quickset, hold down the Ctrl key and press 1 on the keyboard or press Shift, click the right mouse button and select Quickset Recall > 1.

Named groups and references

Elements from references can be included in a named group. When you select elements from a reference, they are not automatically copied into the master file. Elements from references are only pointed to by a named group element in the master file.

Important: If you detach a reference containing elements that are part of a named group only undoing the detachment, not reattaching, will return the members to the named group. You must also close and reopen the Named Groups dialog.

Complex Chains and Shapes

A complex chain is a series of connected open elements such as lines, line strings, arcs, or curves that are grouped as a single entity.

A complex shape, like a complex chain, is a series of connected open elements grouped as a single object. The difference is that the first and last element in a complex shape are connected, thereby closing a shape.

You create complex chains and shapes from existing elements with tools in the Groups toolbox.

To reverse the grouping, you can use the Drop Element tool to drop the status of the element to its component elements so they can be manipulated individually.

Note: You can also use the Place SmartLine tool to create a complex shape or chain.

The Group Command

There is a quick way to select a number of elements and group them so that you can manipulate them as a single element. This group is a complex element whose component elements do not have to be connected.

To create a group, first select the elements that will compose the group and then select Edit > Group. The elements are grouped and can be manipulated as a single element. The group is


Module Review

actually an unnamed cell. Unlike named cells, groups are not defined in cell libraries. You manipulate and modify groups just as you do simple elements.

To break the group, first select the group and then select Edit > Ungroup. The elements are ungrouped and now may be manipulated individually.

Module Review


Questions

1 Why are levels considered a grouping mechanism?

2 True or False: When working with Graphic Groups you can add, remove, or manipulate individual member elements without breaking up the group.

3 What is the function of the Graphic Group lock?

4 True or False: Named Groups can only include elements from the active file.

5 True or False: The Graphic Group lock has no impact on named groups.

6 If you detach a reference that contains elements from a named group, what can you do to restore the elements to the group?

Answers

1 Because you can organize data by purpose on different levels. You can then isolate the data when working.

2 True. Use the Add to Graphic Group tool.

3 When it is on, any manipulation performed on one member of a graphic group is performed on all members. When it is off, the members of a graphic group can be manipulated individually.

4 False. They can include elements from the active file and also those from references, whether directly attached or nested.

5 False. Named Groups respect the Graphic Group lock just like graphic groups.

6 You must undo the reference detachment and reopen the Named Group dialog. Reattaching will not restore the elements to the group.


Annotation

Module Overview

When you enable the annotation scale lock and place elements that respect annotation scale, these elements will scale automatically based upon the scale of the model in which they are placed. This module discusses how annotation sale applies to different elements and presents methods for applying and modifying annotation scale. It also presents tools and techniques for annotating designs.



• Familiarity with MicroStation’s text and dimensioning tools


Module Objectives


• Apply annotation scale to cells, text or dimensions

• Change a model’s annotation scale

• Alter the annotation scale status of elements

• Change the annotation scale of specific elements

• Use the text editor to add tabs, indents, symbols and fields

• Remap text styles

• Use XYZ Text tools

• Work with dimensions more efficiently

Nov-08 45 Annotation





Questions

1 How do you change an existing model’s properties?

2 What is the relationship between models and cells?

3 Where do you set the type of text editor you will use?

4 What is a font?

5 How do you open the Key-in browser?

Answers

1 Select the model in the Models dialog and click Edit Model Properties, or right click and select Properties, to open the Properties dialog.

2 Whether a file has the .cel or .dgn extension, you can open it as a design. The models in it contain the cell geometry. Models that were created with Can be placed as a cell enabled can be placed as cells. Whether a file has the .cel or .dgn extension, you can attach it in the Cell Library dialog.

3 In the Text category of the Preferences dialog.

4 A style of lettering.

5 Select Utilities > Key-in or press Enter with the pointer in a view.

Annotation Scale

What is Annotation Scale?

You can create a parent/child text style hierarchy so that child styles will have the same attributes, but be different sizes. You can also create just one style for each type, setting the text height and width at the desired plot height, and then place it using annotation scale.

For example, if you were creating a 1m = 200m scale design, any text that you place would have to be 200 times larger than normal so that it prints at the correct size. With the annotation scale set to 1:200, you don't have to worry about calculating the size of the text.

If the annotation scale lock is enabled, text is automatically scaled to the correct output size. For example, a text style that should be printed at 5mm at 1:200 will be placed in the model at

Annotation 46 Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Annotation Scale

a size of 1000mm when the annotation scale lock is enabled. Likewise, the same text will be placed in the model at 2500mm when the annotation scale is set to 1:500. The same rules apply to cells placed with the annotation lock and that are designated as annotation cells.

You can toggle the annotation scale lock in the status bar’s Active Locks menu, the Locks and Lock Toggles dialogs and in many text, dimension and cell placement tool settings.

Model based control

When creating a model you have the option of associating an annotation scale to the model. If you change the model’s annotation scale in the Model Properties dialog, any text, dimensions or cells that you placed with the annotation scale lock enabled in the tool settings, will automatically be scaled by that amount.

When you change a model’s annotation scale, you are prompted whether you’d like to propagate the new annotation scale to existing annotations. Clicking Yes will resize the text, dimensions or cells based on the new scale. If you click No they will not be resized even if they were placed with the lock on.

Text

There is an annotation scale lock in the text placement tools tool settings. Enable it to place text that you want to respect annotation scale.

The following examples show a model drawn at 1:1. The text you see in each model is defined by a text style that has height and width of 0.000850. It was placed using annotation scale.

Annotation scale lock is on

When the annotation scale is changed, the design elements do not change, but the text that was placed with the annotation scale lock on scales appropriately.

Nov-08 47 AnnotationCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Annotation Scale

The first example shows the map at 1:100,000.

In the Models dialog, you can see that the model’s annotation scale is set to 1:100,000. Since the text size is 0.000850 and the model’s annotation scale is set to 100,000 the final text size is 85 (0.000850 x 100000 = 85).

You can see this by making the text style active, typing tx= into the Key-in browser, and then pressing Enter. The result displays in the status bar.

If you edit the text, turning the annotation scale lock off, 0.000850 text will be so small it is barely visible in the model.


Annotation Scale

The second example shows the map at 1:50,000.

The model’s annotation scale is set to 1:50,000. Since the text size is 0.000850 and the model’s annotation scale is set to 1:50,000 the final text size is 42.5 (0.000850 x 50000 = 42.5).

The third example shows the map at 1:250,000.


Annotation Scale

The model’s annotation scale is set to 1:250,000. Since the text size is 0.000850 and the model’s annotation scale is set to 1:250,000 the final text size is 212.5 (0.000850 x 250000 = 212.5).

Change status of existing annotation text

• For previously placed annotation text, you can toggle the annotation scale lock with the key-ins ANNOTATIONSCALE ADD and ANNOTATIONSCALE REMOVE. If a selection set is active, the key-ins apply only to selected annotation text. If no selection set is active, all annotation text in the model is included.

• The Edit Text tool settings also have an annotation scale lock. Use it to toggle the status of existing text.

• The Change Text Attributes tool has an annotation scale lock to toggle the status.

Change model scale to text scale

The Match Text Attributes tool settings have a check box that lets you match the annotation scale of the selected text element. When the Match Annotation Scale check box is enabled, it modifies the annotation scale of the model to that of the selected text element. It also turns on annotation scale lock if necessary.

Once the model’s annotation scale has been modified you can use the Change Text Attributes tool, with the annotation scale check box enabled, to modify other text elements to match the new annotation scale.

Tags

Tags support annotation scale. As a result, when there is a change in a model’s annotation scale, the tags in the update to the new annotation scale. Enable or disable the annotation scale lock in locks menu or in the place text tool settings, as tags use the active text placement settings, to place tags that respect annotation scale.

The following example shows a sheet model composed of tagged details. The original scale is Full Scale 1:1.


Annotation Scale

Full Scale 1:1

The model is then scaled to 1:2.5. Note that the tag beneath the model on the left was placed with the annotation scale lock enabled, but the other tags were not. They do not scale with the model.

1:2.5

Dimensions

There is an annotation scale lock in the dimensioning tools tool settings. Enable it so the annotation scale is applied to any dimension text that is placed in a model.

Change status of existing dimension text

The Change Dimension tool has an annotation scale lock to toggle the status.


Annotation Scale

Change model scale to dimension scale

The Match Dimension Settings tool has a check box that lets you match the annotation scale of the selected dimension element. When the Match Annotation Scale check box is enabled, it modifies the annotation scale for the model to that of the selected dimension element. It also turns on annotation scale lock if necessary.

Once the annotation scale has been modified you can use the Change Dimension tool, with the annotation scale lock enabled, to modify other dimension elements to match the new annotation scale.

Cells

When you create a new model, you can specify that it can be placed as a cell and if so, you can also specify that it can be placed as an annotation cell. These options are located in the Cell Properties section of the Create Model dialog. For existing models, you can use the Model Properties dialog to set these properties.

In the (Element > Cells) Cell Library dialog, annotation cells can be identified by an annotation icon in the Annotation column.

The Place Active Cell tool settings have an annotation scale lock. Enable it to place the annotation cells with annotation scale applied. Then, when you change a model’s annotation scale, annotation cells in the model are automatically scaled by the new factor.


Annotation Scale

The following example shows a sheet model composed of annotation cells and detail markers. The original scale is 1:50.

1:50

The model is then scaled to 1:100. Note that the first model in the second row was not placed as an annotation cell. It does not scale with the model.

1:100

Note: If an annotation cell is using annotation scale, text and dimensions that are part of the cell will also use the same scale.


Annotation Scale

Note: There is a column in the Models dialog to help you identify annotation cells. To enable its display, right click a column heading and enable Is Annotation Cell.

Change status of existing annotation cells

• For previously placed annotation cells, you can toggle the annotation scale lock with the key-ins ANNOTATIONSCALE ADD and ANNOTATIONSCALE REMOVE. If a selection set is active, the key-ins apply only to selected annotation cells. If no selection set is active, all annotation cells for the model are included.

• You can also change the status using the Use Annotation Scale field on the General tab of the Element Info dialog.

Line Style Scale

Every model can have a global line style scale that is applied to all line styles within the model.

You can also set the global line style scale to be the same as the annotation scale. This is useful for styles that must retain a relationship to sheet size.

If you change the global line style scale for the model, all line styles will be scaled by that amount.

Changing Scale

You can change the existing annotation scale factor of previously placed elements with annotation scale different ways.

• If you change the scale in the Models properties dialog, you change the scale for all elements in the model that respect annotation scale.

• Use the key-in ANNOTATIONSCALE CHANGE <scale> to change the scale of existing annotation cells. If a selection set is active, the key-ins apply only to selected annotation cells. If no selection set is active, all annotation cells for the model are included.

Note: You can look up the value of a scale in ...WorkSpace\System\Data\scales.def. Open it with a text editor and note the values in the right hand column.


Word Processor Text Editor

• You can change the annotation scale for detailing symbols or annotation cells in the general tab of the Element Info dialog.


Selecting fonts

A good way to decide which font is the best to use is to change the preview in the Text Styles dialog so that it shows characters that are often mistaken for each other. Select View > Preview Text in the Text Styles dialog to add them. Then change the font and see the results.

Lower case I and L, the number one, an exclamation point, upper case O and the number zero

Tabs, indents and schemes

The Word Processor text editor lets you set first line indents, paragraph indents and tab stops. Indents and tab stops and are only available in Word Wrap mode.

Tab ruler showing paragraph indent, first line indent and tab stops

Tabs

To set a tab stop, click on the tab ruler. You can also right click on the tab ruler and select Indents and Tabs from the pop-up menu. Then identify the position numerically in the Tab Settings section of the Indents and Tabs Settings dialog. Click Set after each entry.

To move a tab stop, place the pointer on a tab stop and drag the marker. To clear tab stops, click on the tab stop marker in the tab ruler. You can also clear tab stops in the Indents and Tabs Settings dialog.

First line indents

To set a first line indent, select the paragraph you want to indent, right click on the tab ruler and select Indents and Tabs. Set the first line indentation numerically in the field and click OK. You can also drag the first line indent marker that is on the top at the left of the tab ruler to the position where you want the text to start.



Paragraph indents

To set a paragraph indent, right click on the tab ruler and select Indents and Tabs. Set the paragraph indentation numerically in the input field and click OK. You can also drag the paragraph indent marker that is on the bottom at the left of the tab ruler to the position where you want the text to start.

Schemes

Once you have set tabs and indents you can save the arrangement. To save a scheme, right click on the tab ruler and select Save Scheme from the pop-up menu. Type a name for the new scheme in the Save Scheme dialog and click OK. To retrieve a scheme, right click on the tab ruler and select Tab Schemes from the pop-up menu. Select the scheme and click Select.

Exercise: Create a street index scheme


Project: Geospatial

2 Move up one level to the \seed folder and open BSI200-G01-City Grid.dgn.

3 Select Place Text with the following tool setting:

Text Style: Map Coords

4 Right click on the Word Processor’s tab ruler and select Indents and Tabs from the pop-up menu.

5 In the Tab Settings field, type 345.

6 Click Set and click OK.

7 Zoom In on the index at the top of the border so you can read the street names.

8 Type one of the street names into the text editor in capital letters, press Tab and type the grid coordinates.

9 Place the string near the index.

The spacing matches the street index.

10 Right click on the tab ruler and select Save Scheme.



11 Name the scheme Street index and click OK.

Symbols

You can insert symbols associated with the active font and add frequently used symbols to your Favorite List for faster access.

To insert a symbol while entering or editing text, put the cursor in the desired location and click Insert Symbol in the Word Processor.

Exercise: Add a symbol

1 Continuing in BSI200-G01-City Grid.dgn, use the view controls so you can see the Legend.

2 In the Word Processor, set the active font to Webdings if it is available.

3 Click Insert Symbol.

4 Scroll to the end of the symbols and click on the P symbol, which is first in the third row up.

5 Click Insert.

6 In the Place Text tool settings, enable the Height and Width check boxes and set them to 65.0000.

7 Place the symbol under the 7 symbol.

8 In the tool settings, disable the Height and Width check boxes.

9 In the Word Processor, change the font to Arial.

10 In the Word Processor, type PARKING and then place it next to the P symbol.




Favorites list

To add a symbol to your favorites list, right click the symbol in the Symbols dialog and select Add to Favorite List from the pop-up menu. In the Add Character to Favorite List dialog, type a description of the symbol. This description will appear in the favorites list when you click the arrow to the right of the Insert Symbol icon.

To modify your favorites list, click Manage Favorite List in the Symbols dialog.

Text fields

Fields are text strings derived from the attributes of an element, the properties of a model or the properties of a file. Place text fields using only the Word Processor text editor.

Fields based on element attributes are updated to reflect changes whenever a change to the element causes the attribute to change. Fields based on file or model properties are updated when the file is opened.

Note: You can drag and drop an element property from the Element Information dialog.

Exercise: Add a file property field


Project: Plant

2 Open \Sheets\BSI700-P1083-001-PS Sheet.dgn.

3 Window Area around the border’s title block.


Method: By Origin

Text Style: 1/8” Text

5 In the Word Processor, right click and select Insert Field.

6 Select File Properties in the Field Type dialog and click OK.

7 In the Fields Editor dialog, click in the File Name row.



8 In the File Name Format area, set Path to False.

Setting the path to false excludes this information from the text field.

You can also toggle display of the root file name, showing only the extension, or show only the file’s extension. You can select the case in which you want the field to display. There is a preview of the field contents at the bottom left of the dialog.

9 Click OK.

10 Place the text under the existing title information in the title block.

The string reflects the file name.

11 Select File > Save Settings.

Exercise: Change file properties

1 Continuing in BSI700-P1083-001-PS Sheet.dgn, select File > Close.

2 In the File Open dialog, right click on BSI700-P1083-001-PS Sheet.dgn and select Rename.

3 Change the file name to BSI700-P1083-001-PS Sheet-FINAL.dgn.

4 Reopen the file.

5 With the pointer in the view, press Enter.

6 In the Key-in browser, put focus in the input field and type the following:

FIELD UPDATE ALL

7 Press Enter.

The file name text field updates.

Note: Note that if Update Fields Automatically is enabled for a model the field would update without issuing the key-in.



A field can appear anywhere within a text string and can span multiple words or lines within multi-line text.

Text field background

In order to distinguish fields from text that is entered directly, fields have a light gray background. Its display can be toggled in the Preferences dialog. Select Workspace > Preferences, and select the Text category. Enable the Hide Field Background check box and click OK.

Note: Fields are similar in MicroStation and AutoCAD. A MicroStation field will be saved to DWG format as long as the underlying field property exists within AutoCAD.

Fields and elements

Exercise: Update a field by modifying an element

1 Continuing in BSI700-P1083-001-PS Sheet.dgn, Fit View.

2 Select Copy Element and make a copy of the detail at the upper right of the sheet.

3 Select Place Text.

4 In the Word Processor, right click and select Insert Field.

5 Select Element Properties in the Field Type dialog and click OK.

6 Enter a data point on the copied detail.

7 In the Fields Editor dialog, expand the Geometry sections and click in the Volume row, and then click OK.



8 Place the field below the detail and then Zoom In on it so you can read the contents of the field.

9 Select Scale from the Main toolbox, with the following tool settings:

Method: Active Scale

X, Y, and Z scale: 1.5

10 Enter a data point on the detail.

The field updates.


Placeholder fields

A placeholder field is a field placed in a model as target for future population.

Placeholder fields can be those pointing to the properties of a regular, not shared, cell and those pointing to the properties of a link target attached to a regular cell.

To insert a field you right click in the Word Processor text editor at the point at which you want to insert the field, and then select Insert Field from the pop-up menu. The Field Type dialog lets you select the type you’re creating. Along with Element, Model, and File properties, you can select Place Holder Cell and Place Holder Link properties.

You can open the Field Type by right clicking in the Word Processor text editor and selecting Insert Field from the pop-up menu, or click the Insert Field icon in the text editor’s tools.

Fields based on element attributes are updated to reflect changes whenever a change to the element causes the attribute to change. Fields based on file or model properties are updated when the file is opened.


Text Styles Dialog

When you insert the field placeholder, you see the field name until a value is inserted.

Placeholder link name and cell name placeholders

Subscript, and Superscript

Icons let you further define text using superscript and subscript. In the placement tool settings, the Apply changes to all text check box must be disabled to place superscript and subscript text.

• The Superscript icon lets you create text with superscript. Type in the text, click the superscript icon, and then type in the desired number.

• The Subscript icon lets you create text with subscript. Type in the text, click the superscript icon, then type in the desired number.

Change case

To change character case, highlight the characters you want to change in the Word Processor text editor, then right click in the and select Change Case > Upper Case or Change Case > Lower Case from the pop-up menu.

Text Styles Dialog

When changes are made, options change color to indicate variations from the saved style. Other features are as follows.

Advanced tab

Options on the Advanced tab are arranged on tabs, similar to the Element Information dialog. The options that let you compare text styles now let you use Comparison and Difference modes.


Text Styles Dialog

Comparison mode shows a side by side comparison of the properties of two selected text styles. This can help identify subtle.

Text Styles dialog in Comparison mode

Differences mode shows the differences in the properties of two selected text styles. This shows the attributes that separate, or distinguish, contrasting styles.

Text Styles dialog in Differences mode

Text Style remapping

Right click on a text style name in the Text Styles dialog and select Remap Elements to change the text style of all text elements having one text style to another text style. When you select it, the Remap Elements to Text Style dialog appears so you can make the change. The selected text style is listed as the source. Select the destination style from the Destination option list.


Tools for Annotating


Place Text

The tool settings no longer contain check boxes to enable or disable the various text attributes such as height and width, font and justification. All attributes are available at all times.

Change Case

This tool, from the (Tools > Text) Text toolbox, is used to change the case of a string of text. Case change options include the following.

• Upper Case: Changes all characters to upper case.

• Lower Case: Changes all characters to lower case.

• Title Case: Match the case of the first letter of the first word in the string. If it begins with a capital letter, all words in the string will begin with a capital letter.

• First Capital: Capitalizes the first letter of the first word in the string.

Edit Text

When using Edit Text, from the Text toolbox or the Drawing tasks, the active tool settings are set to those of the text you are editing. The text style, height, width and font are set to match those of the text you identify.

Previously, when you terminated the tool, the altered tool settings remained. Tool settings now revert to the previous settings once the tool is terminated.



Place Note options

Additional frames

When the Place Note icon is clicked, you can place notes.

As alternatives to using a line or box to frame note text, you can use a rotated box, circle, capsule, hexagon, rotated hexagon, triangle, pentagon, or octagon. Frames resize dynamically if the text changes.

You can enable the Frame Scale option on the Text tab of the Dimension Styles dialog to set the size of a text frame. However, if you use this setting, the frame will not resize dynamically if the text changes.

Note: All options are disabled in DWG workmode except the none and box options.



Rotation

The Text Rotation setting sets the rotation of the text relative to the leader line.

Reset Style

In the tool settings, Reset Style restores the tool settings to the defaults set for either the text or dimension style you are using if they are changed during placement.

Multiple leader lines

Press and hold the Ctrl key when placing a note’s leader lines and you can position more than one.

Callouts

When the Callout icon is clicked, you can place callouts. Use this to place lines of text with a callout, as a dimension element.



XYZ Text tools

Use these tools to import, export, and label coordinate points. Select Tools > Tool Boxes and enable XYZ Text to open it.

Labeling point coordinates

This tool lets you label an individual point using the pointer to identify the location. It uses the active text attribute settings.

• Order defines the order in which the labeled point displays, XYZ or YXZ. The YXZ format is used if a text file is stored with Northings and Eastings

• Units defines the coordinate format, such as Master Units, Sub Units, etc.

• Accuracy specifies the unit of accuracy for displaying the point coordinates.

• Separator defines the coordinate delimiter as either a new line, comma or space

• View defines the view to use when placing the coordinate label. You can also use the pointer to identify the location by selecting the Cursor option. Prefix lets you specify the prefix for the x, y and z coordinates

• The x, y and z fields dynamically display the coordinates of the current pointer location

Exercise: Label points


Project: Geospatial

2 Open \Designs\BSI200-R01-Environmental.dgn, Trails model.

3 Set the active level to County Data.

4 Select Element > Text Styles, select the style Map Coords Large, and click Activate.

5 Close the dialog.

6 Select Tools > Tool Boxes and open the XYZ Text toolbox.

7 Select Label Point Coordinate with the following tool settings:

Order: XYZ

Units: Master

Accuracy: 0

Separator: Newline

View: Cursor

X, Y & Z Prefix: leave the defaults

The coordinate values are attached to the pointer and they change as you move the pointer over the design.



8 Snap to, and then enter a data point at, the end extents of the trails.

The tool labels the exact location at which you enter a data point. You can use the manipulation tools to move the values after they are placed for readability.

Label Element Coordinates

This tool lets you label elements individually, using a selection set or fence, or globally. The tool settings are like the Label Point Coordinate tool. There are also Single, Fence and All processing options.

Exercise: Label the landmarks

1 Open \Drawings\BSI200-R03-Public Works.dgn, Landmarks model.

2 Set the active level to County Data.

3 Open the References dialog and turn off display of the streets model.

4 Select Label Element Coordinates with the following tool settings:

Order: XYZ

Units: Master

Accuracy: 1

Separator: Newline

View: Cursor

X, Y & Z Prefix: leave the defaults



5 Click All in the tool settings.

6 Click OK in the alert.

The tool labels the vertices of elements. If an element is a cell or text, the origin is labeled. You can use the manipulation tools to move the values for readability after they are placed.

Export Coordinates

This tool lets you export coordinates derived from graphic elements into an ASCII text file.

• Filename is the name of the file to which the coordinates will be exported.

• Prefix and Suffix let you add prefixes and suffixes to the coordinate string.

• The Point # text field and check box let you add a point number to each entry in the text file. Each series of coordinates will be prefixed with a number, beginning with the number specified in the text field. Enable the check box next to use the field.

• Single, Fence and All let you export single coordinates, the coordinates of a selection set, of all elements in a fence or of all graphic elements in a design.

Exercise: Exporting coordinates

1 Continuing in BSI200-R03-Public Works.dgn, select Export Coordinates with the following tool settings:

Filename: landmarks.txt

Order: XYZ

Format: Master

Accuracy: 0

Separator: Space

View: 1

2 Click All in the tool settings.

3 Click OK in the alert.

4 Open Notepad and navigate to the text file.

The default location is the same folder as the design, in this case ...WorkSpace\Projects\Examples\Geospatial\dgn.

Import Coordinates

This tool lets you import coordinates from an ASCII text file and place them as points, text or cells. Many users use AccuDraw or a key-in to place a cell at a particular coordinate. The Import Coordinates tool can make this easier.

• Filename lists the full path and filename of the source ASCII text file. The file must contain x and y or x, y and z coordinates separated by either spaces or commas



• The Import field has options to import points, text that you specify in the text field, or cells that you specify in the cells field

• Order defines the order in which the coordinates are imported

• View is the destination view into which you want to import the coordinates

Note: Right click the status bar and select Running Coordinates to see a continuous coordinate readout as the pointer moves around a design.

Exercise: Use Import Coordinates to place cells

1 Open \Sheets\BSI200-M02-City Small.dgn.

2 Launch Notepad and type the following lines:

1571645.1319, 9767352.9255

1568868.7962, 9767330.1827

1573620.5086, 9769789.3070

The first number is a Y coordinate, the second is an X coordinate.

3 Select File > Save, name the file, and save it to a location you will remember. Exit Notepad.

4 Select Element > Cells and attach Geospatial.cel.

5 Select Import Coordinates with the following tool settings:

Filename: Browse to the text file you created

Import: Cell

Order: XYZ

View: 1

Cell: HOSP

6 Click Process.

The Hospital cells have been placed based on the coordinates stored in the text file.


Find/Replace Text

Select Edit > Find/Replace Text to open the dialog.

• The Find/Replace Text tool can find and replace text in enter data fields.


Dimensions

• The Zoom Factor slider lets you set the zoom factor used to zoom in or out on the text you are searching for in the model. This factor ranges from 5, zoomed out, to 100, zoomed in.

• Use the Change options to replace text or to append or prepend the value in the With field.

Dimensions

Once drawing objects have been established at the proper size, scale, and orientation, adding dimensions conveys important information.

Changing attributes

After placing a dimension element, you can change its appearance by modifying the dimension settings. You can do this individually, selecting one dimension element, or create a selection set containing multiple dimension elements.

You can also change dimensions globally by updating the style’s attributes in the Dimension Styles dialog and then selecting Yes in the update alert that appears when you save the changes.

Editing dimension text

Use Edit Text to make changes to the dimension text. When you identify dimension text to edit, you see an asterisk in the text editor.

This represents the automatic dimension value associated with the existing text. You can type suffix text or prefix text. Although this text won’t automatically update, the automatically generated value, the asterisk, will still update. This lets you type a prefix or suffix and still have an associative dimension value.

You can also replace the automatic value, the asterisk.

Warning: If you delete or replace the asterisk, the text displayed in the dimension element will be what you type. It will not reflect the actual, automatically dimensioned value. If you delete the asterisk when editing dimension text, you can restore the automatic dimension value by editing the dimension and re-inserting the asterisk.


Dimensions

Note: If you actually want dimension text to actually display as an asterisk, select the Edit Text tool, identify the dimension text and add, or replace the asterisk in the text editor, with the string %%42.

Updating attributes

Use the Change Dimension tool to change a dimension element to the active dimension attributes, which can be set in the Dimension Styles dialog or by selecting a dimension style in the tool’s tool settings.

Updating attributes globally

Right click on a dimension style name in the Dimension Styles dialog and select Remap Elements to change the text style of all dimension elements having one dimension style to another dimension style. When you select it, the Remap Elements to Dimension Style dialog appears so you can make the change. The selected dimension style is listed as the source. Select the destination style from the Destination option list.

Add a description

Enable Show Secondary Units on the Units tab of the Dimension Styles dialog and then use Edit Text to edit the lower dimension, adding the description. This lets you manipulate the entire string when using the Modify tool.

Dimensions and rotated views

Dimension text will rotate about the dimension line when a view is rotated. It rotates relative to its original orientation.

How to make dimension text remain parallel to the view:

1. Rotate the view.

2. In the Key-in browser type CHANGE DIMENSION VIEW <#>.


Dimensions

3. Identify the dimension text and accept.

Dimension associativity

An association means an element’s position in the design plane is defined in relation to another element. When the element is moved, the associated element moves with it. Dimension elements can be associated with the elements whose dimensions they display. These dimensions update when the actual dimensions of the element with which they are associated change.

Association points are connected to the element being dimensioned. To place association points, the Association and Snap locks must be on. Enabling the Association lock enables the Snap lock. Enable the Association lock in the dimensioning tools tool settings or in one of the locks menus.

The Element Dimensioning tool creates all possible associations automatically if the Association lock is on. Snapping is unnecessary. If using dimensioning tools other than Element Dimensioning, you must snap tentative points to the element being dimensioned to create associations.

Reminder: Avoid mixing associated and non-associated dimensions in a design. If the types become mixed, treat all dimension values, and subsequent design changes, as if all the dimensions are non-associative.

Change associativity

Reassociate

Dimensions that have lost their association to the element that they are dimensioning, display as a heavy dashed line. Display Broken Associations with Different Symbology, in the Operation category of the Preferences dialog controls this feature.

Use the Reassociate Dimension tool from the dimensioning toolbox to fix lost associations.


Dimensions

Select the tool and then click on the dimension.

Use Utilities > Dimension Audit to search all the dimensions in the active model and report any association problems.

The Find Non-Associative Dimensions option finds dimensions that were placed with the association lock off or were not snapped to an element correctly. Step through the results to zoom to the problem and use Reassociate Dimension to fix it.

The Find Lost Associations option finds dimensions that have failed associations. The dimension displays as a heavy dashed line. Use Reassociate Dimension with a fence to fix a number of lost associations.

Drop association

Use the Drop Association tool in the Drop toolbox to discontinue an association between a dimension witness line and another element. The association point is converted to a non-associative vertex with its own coordinates. It is then independent of the other element.

Select Tools > Drop to open the toolbox. Then select the tool, identify the association point and accept the drop.

Retrieving dimension styles from STG files

You can retrieve dimension settings that are stored in .stg files and create dimensions styles from them.

To retrieve dimension settings:

1. Select Element > Dimension Styles to open the Dimension Styles dialog.

2. Select Settings > Manage to open the Select Settings dialog.

3. In the Select Settings dialog, select the group containing the desired component.


Feature Control Frames

4. Select the desired component from the Component list. The active dimension settings are now set by the component.

5. In the Dimension Styles dialog, click Create Dimension Style.

6. Type a name and description and click OK.

7. Click Save. The active dimension settings are saved to the new style.

Feature Control Frames

Geometric tolerancing is the specification of how much a manufactured object can deviate from the geometry shown in a design. They specify the maximum variation that is allowed in form or position from true geometry. Feature control frames contain symbols that represent geometric tolerances.

Use the Geometric Tolerance dialog to build a feature control frame. Open it by selecting the Geometric Tolerance tool in the Misc(ellaneous) Dimensions toolbox (Tools > Tool Boxes > Misc Dimensions).

The Tool option menu lets you select between using Place Note, with a leader line, or Place Text to place the symbols.

Select a font from the Font menu to set the geometric tolerance font. When a new font is selected, the buttons change to show the symbols it contains. This is similar to the Word Processor's symbols dialog. When the Geometric Tolerance dialog is closed, the Active Font is set back to the previous Active Font.

Then, click buttons in the Geometric Tolerance dialog to select the desired symbols. The symbols display as lowercase characters in the Word Processor, but appear as symbols in the dynamically displayed text element.


Module Review

When using Feature Control Symbols, left ( [ ) and right ( ] ) brackets form the ends of compartments. Vertical line (|) separates compartments.

Feature Control Symbol identification

In the Text Editor dialog, you can intersperse standard characters with symbols by typing uppercase letters or numerals. In the Word Processor, you can type symbols only.

Module Review


Questions

1 How do you enable the annotation scale lock?

2 What happens when you enable the Match Annotation Scale check box in the Match Text Attributes or Match Dimension Settings tool settings?

3 True or False: If an annotation cell is using annotation scale, text and dimensions that are part of the cell will also use the same scale.

4 How can you find out the value of one of the available scale options?

5 What is a good way to decide which font is the best to use?

6 True or False: You can place text fields using any style text editor.

7 What is the purpose of the XYZ text tools?

8 What is dimension associativity?

9 What do you see when you initially insert a field placeholder?

10 True or False: The Apply changes to all text check box must be enabled to place superscript and subscript text.


Module Review

Answers

1 You can enable the annotation scale lock in the status bar’s Active Locks menu, the Locks and Lock Toggles dialogs and in many text, dimension and cell placement tool settings.

2 When the Match Annotation Scale check box is enabled, it modifies the annotation scale of the model to that of the selected text element. It also turns on annotation scale lock if necessary.

3 True.

4 You can look up the value of a scale in ...WorkSpace\System\Data\scales.def. Open it with a text editor and note the values in the right column.

5 Change the preview in the Text Styles dialog so that it shows characters that are often mistaken for each other.

6 False. Place text fields using only the Word Processor text editor.

7 To import, export, and label coordinate points.

8 An association means an element’s position in the design plane is defined in relation to another element. When the element is moved, the associated element moves with it.

9 When you insert the field placeholder, you see the field name until a value is inserted.

10 False. The Apply changes to all text check box must be disabled to place superscript and subscript text.


Module Review


Working with Tags

Module Overview

This module covers the steps required to create, attach, review and change tags. You will complete exercises using files that contain tags and tag data to increase your understanding of the way tags work and enable you to work with them more efficiently.


• Familiarity with cells, models and references

• Some understanding of the a database works

Module Objectives


• Create, attach, review and change tags

• Create tag libraries and reports

• Edit cell graphics without deleting an attached tag

• Create a cell consisting of only a tag

• Change tag data to text

• Import tags to, and export them from, a database

Nov-08 79 Working with Tags





Questions

1 Why would you add non-graphic data to a design?

2 What is the importance of assigning a data type to non-graphic data?

3 What happens when you drop a cell element?

4 What is the relationship between cells and models?

5 What is a database table made up of?

Answers

1 To add information with which to create reports, schedules, etc. To standardize title blocks. To include information that can be updated from, or that you can use to update, databases.

2 They can be useful in reports and are relevant if tags are to be used in a database

3 It is reduced to its component parts, which are no longer associated to one another.

4 When you open a cell library as a DGN file cells are stored as models in the file. When models are created with the option to place as a cell enabled you can do so.

5 Rows and columns that are designed to hold specific data.

Working with Tags 80 Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating and Using Tags


Designs are often accompanied by non-graphic data such as material lists, schedules, specifications or title block information. Tags are non-graphic attributes that you can attach to elements to accommodate this data.

Creating tags sets

Tags are grouped into tag sets and the first step in using them is to create one.

Exercise: Create a tag set


Project: Geospatial

2 Open \Drawings\BSI200-D02-Land Acquisition.dgn, and open the Wards Labels model.

3 Select Element > Tags > Define.

4 In the Tag Sets dialog, click Add in the Sets frame.

5 Type the name Wards and click OK.

Once a set is created, you can click Duplicate and use it as a seed tag set from which to create another.

If you highlight a set and click Remove, the set is deleted and all of the set’s member tags are detached from elements.

Defining tags

The next step is to define individual tags. Determine whether the tag name will be most meaningful or the tag’s value. Depending upon the attachment option used, you can display either.

Nov-08 81 Working with TagsCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


Remember that the first tag you create will be the last tag listed in the set. The last will be listed first.

Exercise: Create tags

1 Continuing in BSI200-R02-Land Acquisition.dgn, in the Tag Sets dialog, Click Add in the Tags frame.

2 Enter the following in the Define Tag dialog:

Tag Name: Ward Name

Prompt: Ward name?

Type: Character

Variable: Enabled

Default Tag Value: Ward ___

Display Tag: Disabled

3 Click OK.

If you want to assign tags to elements but do not want the tag value to display, disable the Display Tag check box. You will not see the tags when placed, but you can query them.

Exercise: Complete the set

1 Continuing in BSI200-R02-Land Acquisition.dgn, create the following tags:

Tag Name: Ward #

Prompt: Ward #?

Type: Integer

Variable: Enabled

Default Tag Value: none


Tag Name: Poll #

Prompt: Poll #?

Type: Integer

Variable: Enabled

Default Tag Value: none




Data types

The following data types can be applied to tags.

• Character is for text data and there is a maximum 1024 characters

• An Integer is a 4-byte numerical value

• Real is an 8-byte floating point value

These types can be useful when reporting and are important if tags will be used to coordinate information with a database.

Tag values

If the Default check box is enabled in the Define Tag dialog, the tag will be attached with the default value you specify already supplied.

When Default is enabled you can also enable Confirm. On tag placement, an alert opens to confirm the entered value.

Placing tags

Now that the set is defined, you can tag elements. First select the tag set you want to attach and then set parameters. Tags are placed with the active text attributes.

If a tag set is placed with the Association option disabled, the tag names display rather than the default tag values. If placed with Association enabled the default tag values display rather than the names.

Exercise: Attach tags with different display parameters

1 Continuing in BSI200-D02-Land Acquisition.dgn, Zoom In to Otonabee Ward 1.

2 Select Attach Tags from the Tasks dialog, with the following tool settings:

Association: Disabled



Note: If there is more than one tag set in a file, they are all listed and you must select the set you want to attach.

3 Following the status bar prompt, enter a data point anywhere in the file.

You did not have to identify an element to which to attach the tag because it will not be associated to one. You see the tag names, not the default values.

4 Select Edit > Undo Attach Tags.

5 In the Attach Tags tool settings, set the following:

Association: Enabled

You are prompted to identify an element. Now you can enter or change values. They will display if Display Tag is enabled.

6 Enter a data point on poll number 114.

7 In the Attach Tags dialog, click in the Value field for each tag and type the following:

Ward Name: Otonabee

Ward #: 1

Poll #: 114

Do not click OK yet.

8 Click in the tags Display column.

Though created with display disabled, it can be enabled at placement.

9 Click OK.

10 Enter a data point to place the tag text.

To remove tags from an element, select the Delete Tags tool and then click the element to which tags are attached. If you enabled Remove Visible only, only tags with display enabled will be deleted. Hidden tags remain.

File-wide tag display

Tag display can be controlled on a view window or file-wide basis in the View Attributes dialog. Toggle the Tags icon to enable or disable their display.



Changing tags

Once placed, tag values can be changed. Select Change Tags, select a tag set, select the tag that you want to change in the tool settings and set the change parameters.

Exercise: Change tag display

1 Continuing in BSI200-R02-Land Acquisition.dgn, select Change Tags with the following tool settings:

Display: Enabled and set to Off

Mode: Single

Modes let you change all tags at once, or use a fence. You see that the Poll # tag is highlighted in the tool settings.

2 Enter a data point on the Poll # tag, 114.

3 Enter a data point, and one to accept, on the Ward # and Ward Name tags.

Finding and replacing

Use the Find and Replace With fields in the tool settings as you would in other applications. Select the tag you want to change, type the value you want to change and supply the value with which to replace it.

If you enable Ignore Find Value, any value that is in the Find field is ignored and the selected tags are changed, regardless of existing value, to the Replace With value.

Reviewing tag data

You can review tag data, whether displayed or not.

Exercise: Review the hidden tag data

1 Continuing in BSI200-R02-Land Acquisition.dgn, select Review Tags.

2 Enter a data point on poll number 114.

3 Click OK when done.

Tag set libraries

You can create a tag set library that includes the selected tag set definitions. These libraries can be used across DGN files. The default location for the library file is the project \out folder.


Reporting on Tag Data

Exercise: Create a tag library and import it into another file

1 Move up two levels and open \seed\BSI200-G01-City Grid.dgn.

2 Select Element > Tags > Define.

3 Select the tag set inciv_ftrlink.

4 In the Tag Sets dialog, select File > Export > Create Tag Library.

5 Name the library IDs and click Save.

6 Click Previous Model to return to BSI200-R02-Land Acquisition.dgn.

7 In the Tag Sets dialog, select File > Import > From Tag Library.

8 Select IDs.tlb and click Open.

Any tag sets contained in a library are listed in the Import Sets dialog.

9 Select inciv_ftrlink and click OK.


You can generate variations of reports on tags. Reports can contain information about graphic element attributes, as well as tags. Report output is in the form of line-separated, comma-delimited ASCII text files. They can be formatted and printed using a text editor or word processing application.

Exercise: Add tags for a report

1 Continuing in BSI200-R02-Land Acquisition.dgn, attach the Wards tag set to two of the poll numbers in Otonabee Ward 1.

After you have entered Otonabee for the Ward Name tag you can right, select Copy, and copy the value to the clipboard. Then, for the next tag, right click and Paste it. The Ward # will be 1 for both polls. Only the Poll # will differ.

Creating a template

First you generate tag report template files, each of which specifies a single tag set and desired member tags, plus any graphic element attributes, on which to report. Output format is selected in the Generate Templates dialog and can be either text or XML.

Exercise: Create a report template

1 Continuing in BSI200-R02-Land Acquisition.dgn, select Element > Tags > Generate Templates.

2 Select the Wards tag set.

3 Select the Poll # tag and click Add to add it to the report.



4 Add the following columns:

Ward #

Ward Name

x

y

The columns in the report file output are in the same order as specified in the Report Columns list.

5 Select Report On > Tagged Elements.

This report will report only on elements that have tags attached. You can also report on any of the available attributes for all elements in a file.

6 Click in the Report File Name field and enter Ward data.

7 Press Enter.

8 In the Generate Templates dialog, select File > Save As.

9 Save the template as Ward data.tmp.

This template will produce a report that contains the values of the specified tags and well as their XY coordinates in the file. The template file itself can be used with any DGN file in which the tag set is defined.

Generating reports

To generate a report, select the desired template.

Exercise: Generate the report

1 Continuing in BSI200-R02-Land Acquisition.dgn, select Element > Tags > Generate Reports.

2 Select Ward data.tmp and click Done.

The report is also saved to the project’s \out folder with a .rpt extension.

3 Open the report in Notepad.

Note: Change Files of type to All Files.

4 Exit Notepad when done.


Selecting Tags

Selecting Tags

Use the Element Selection tool’s element type tab to select Tag elements and then refine the search using attributes on the other tabs if desired.

To select or isolate a specific tag, use the (Edit > Select By Attributes) Select By Attributes utility. The Mode options determine how filtered elements are handled.

• You can select what you want to do with the elements. Do you want the results to include or exclude the filtered tag?

• You can select the filtered elements with selection handles (Selection) or display only the filtered elements (Display). The Location option filters the location of elements and then they can be selected by using Select All.

Exercise: Select specific tags by attribute

1 Continuing in BSI200-R02-Land Acquisition.dgn, select Edit > Select By Attributes.

2 In the Select By Attributes dialog, leave the selection mode at Selection.

3 Click the Tags button.

4 From the Tag options select Wards.Poll #.

5 From the Operator options, select not equal to.

6 In the Expression field, type 114.

This field holds a value that is relevant to the tag and operator that you have chosen.

7 Click Insert.

You can further refine criteria by inserting additional evaluations. Evaluate additional tags, or the same one, using the desired operator and relevant expression. Since there are few tags in this design, this exercise uses only simple criteria.

8 Return to the Select By Attributes dialog and click Execute.

The poll numbers to which you added tags for the reporting exercise are selected.

You can add level or symbology criteria from the Select By Attributes dialog to refine searches. If you set the color to 3, the search you created would return nothing as the poll numbers to which the tags are attached are color 200.

9 Close the Select By Attributes dialog, clicking Cancel in the alert to stop filtering.




Changing Tags to Text

Changing Tags to Text

To change tag values into text elements, type the key-in CHANGE TAGS DROPTEXT and enter a data point on the element to which they are attached.

Modifying Cells with Tags

You can change the graphics of cells that have tags attached without deleting the tags. You must do this without dropping the cell since, when you drop a cell with a tag attached, the tag is deleted.

Exercise: Disassociate tags from shared cells


Project: Building

2 Open \Sheets\BSI300AE101-Plan.dgn.

3 Zoom In on the top of the referenced design.

4 Select Place Active Cell from the Tasks dialog, and click the magnifying glass next to the Active Cell field.

5 In the Cell Library dialog, select the Room Label cell and click Placement.

6 Place the cell in two of the offices.

First you select the cells that you want to modify and disassociate the tags.

7 Create a selection set containing the two cells.

8 Open the Key-in browser, type the following and press Enter:

CHANGE TAGS DROPASSOC

9 Enter a data point.

The tags are now orphan and display the tag name rather than the value.



Modifying Cells with Tags

Use CHANGE TAGS DROPASSOC to remove the association between any element and its tags.

There are many ways to identify the elements from which you want to disassociate or reassociate tags. Use the key-in LEVEL ELEMENT DELETE <levelname> to identify parts of cells that are on a specific level. You can also use the Element Selection tool’s attribute tabs.

Exercise: Change the graphics and reassociate the tags

1 Continuing in BSI300AE101-Plan.dgn, select Place Ellipse with the following tool settings:

Method: Center

Fill Type: None

2 Place an ellipse that is approximately the same size as the room label block.

3 Copy the ellipse to the other office.

4 Delete the room label blocks.

Finally, reassociate the tags to the new shapes.

5 Create a selection set that includes the ellipses and the tags.

6 In the Key-in browser, type the following and press Enter:

CHANGE TAGS REASSOC

7 Enter a data point on one of the ellipses.



Note: If there are multiple tags on a single element, select them all before executing the key-ins.


Cells Containing Only Tags


Use a cell like this to populate title blocks.

Exercise: Create a Tags model

1 Continuing in the Building project, in the File Open dialog, move up two levels to the \seed folder.

2 Click New File.

3 Create a new file named BSI300A-0-Border.dgn, using 3dMetricSeed.dgn as the seed file.

4 Open the file.

5 Create a 2D Sheet model with the following parameters:

Name: Tags

Display Sheet Layout: Disabled

6 Maximize View 1.

Exercise: Positioning the title block tag

1 Continuing in BSI300A-0-Border.dgn, select Element > Cells.

2 Attach the file Examples\Building\seed\sheetseed.dgn.

3 Select 1to100 and click Placement.

4 Select Place Active Cell and place the cell in the file.

5 Fit View.

6 Move the border so that the lower right corner is at the axis of the ACS triad.

You can use this border to attach and position the tag values in the title block, but you will not allow the element to remain in the model.

7 Select Review Tags and enter a data point on the border.

There is a tag set named TitleBlock defined. It has already been attached to the border and positioned in the title block. Since the tags are attached and positioned, you just need to copy them into the model.



8 In the expanded Element Selection tool settings, select the Element Type tab and click Tag.

9 Select Copy.

10 Snap to the lower right corner of the title block and enter a data point at that location.

AccuDraw indicates that you are at X,Y=0,0.

11 Enter a data point at exactly the same location to accept.

This location becomes the origin for placement. You can attach the file as a cell library and use the model as a cell. The origin will always be in the lower right corner.

12 Select Element Selection and clear the selection set.

13 Delete the border cell.

When the cell is placed in a title block you use Edit Tags to supply the proper values.


If tag data is not present, you define a tag set containing the necessary tags, use Attach Tags to attach the tag set and then use Manipulation tools to position the tags. Remember that if Association is enabled, the default tag values display. If not, the tag names display.

You can also create the cell using traditional cell creation methods, remembering to use the lower right corner of the title block at X,Y=0,0 when defining the origin.

Alternative method to position the tag

Another method is to attach the desired border as a reference. You use a reference so you can position the tags in the title block, and then detach so the title block is no longer in the model.

Then create the tag set that will hold the title block data. Attach the tag set at the lower right corner of the title block. You can attach the tag set to the reference non-associated, but you


Tags and Databases

need to create an element to which to attach it using the Associative option. A point element at the lower right corner will work. Then, move the tags into the proper locations in the title block and detach the reference.

If the title block tags already exist in the referenced border, just copy them into the file, making sure that you snap to, and accept at, the lower right corner.

Tags and Databases

Tag to database

Use the Tag to Database dialog to export tag data from a DGN file into an existing database table that is designed to hold this data. The tag is inserted into the column in the table which has the same name as the tag. To open the dialog, select File > Export > To Database from the Tag Sets dialog. The Tag to Database dialog lists the available tag sets which you can add to the Export tags list.

Once a set is added to the export list you can select it and click Details to open a dialog containing information about the tags. The types are the standard data types supported MicroStation. Enable the Export to table check box to select individual tags to export. Disable it to exclude the tag.

Database to tag

The database to tag utility is used to convert data records from an external database, which is linked to the active file, into tag data. A database must be attached and properly linked to existing elements in the active file.

Selecting data to import

Using options in the Column Details dialog you can load the tag data into the DGN file and link it to graphic elements. This is enabled by default. You can also display tag data values near the associated graphic element by enabling the Display check box.

To start the conversion process, you need to be in an active file with a valid database attached. Then select File > Import > From Database from the Tag Sets dialog.

Note: An empty Database Tables field indicates that no database is currently attached to the design. Click Cancel, attach the database, and restart the utility. The utility shows only those data tables found in the current MSCATALOG table.

Next, select a database table entry for import from the Database Tables list and click Add.


Tags and Databases

To select individual data fields to import, or to set attachment and display parameters, select the data in the Import Tables list and click Details. Enable Add to set to create a tag data definition for the highlighted database data. Disable it to exclude the data. Enable Attach to load all data associated with the highlighted field into the DGN file’s tag set and link it to the graphic elements.

Importing

When all parameters are set, click Import. The utility creates a tag, type 66, for the data in Import Tables list. The definitions are created and loaded with the table definitions from the external database and loaded into this element.

The data from each column in the database is copied into a tag element, type 37. A link between each tag data field and the graphic elements of the design is created if the attach option was enabled. If any data were selected as displayable, the displayable attribute of the tag element is enabled and the data is displayed near the graphic element.


Module Review

Module Review


Questions

1 What is the first step when creating tags?

2 Why would you supply a default tag value?

3 How do you control the display of individual tags?

4 Why create a tag set library?

5 True or False: You can only report on tagged elements in a file.

6 Why is the origin of a cell containing only a tag important?

7 Why can’t you simply drop a cell that has a tag attachment when you want to edit the graphics?

Answers

1 Create a tag set to hold the tags.

2 So that value is placed automatically when the tag is placed.

3 Using the Display check box in the Define Tags the Edit Tags dialogs and the Change Tags tool settings.

4 So tags can be created once and shared across DGN files.

5 False. You can also report on attributes of all elements in a file.

6 So it can be placed consistently. The origin is the point of placement. If it is exact you can always snap to the desired element and position a tag correctly.

7 The tag is deleted when the cell is dropped.


Module Review


Custom Line Styles

Module Overview

This module explains line style components and custom line style creation. It also provides information about managing and modifying line styles.



• Knowledge about cells

Module Objectives


• Create custom line styles

• Manage line styles

• Modify line styles

Nov-08 97 Custom Line Styles





Questions

1 What is a cell?

2 Where do you set the active line style?

Answers

1 A complex element composed of a group of primitive or other complex elements that is stored in a cell library for repeated placement.

2 In the Attributes toolbox or in the DGN File Settings dialog.

Custom Line Styles 98 Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Style Components

Style Components

A custom line style consists of a stroke pattern composed of dash strokes and gap strokes of varying lengths.

If a custom line style includes a repeating symbol such as a text character or other non-linear element, you create a point symbol component.

A compound component is a combination of components of any type. The only way to display both strokes patterns and point symbols is to create a compound component.

Custom line styles can be stored in DGN libraries as well as in resource, .rsc, files.

dashgap

point symbols

stroke patterns

point symbols

Nov-08 99 Custom Line StylesCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Style Components

Exercise: Examine delivered custom line styles


Project: General

2 Open Custom Linestyles.dgn.

3 Select Element > Line Styles > Custom.

4 In the Line Styles dialog, scroll to the {RailRoad} style and select it.

A preview of the style displays at the bottom of the dialog.

5 Click on the preview to activate the style.

6 Select Place SmartLine and place a line in the model.

This line style is comprised of two offset stroke patterns and a point symbol that represents the tie.

7 In the Line Styles dialog, select {Cable/Tele}.

8 Click the preview to activate the style and place a line in the model.

This line style contains text characters.

You can scale the line style to make text more readable or symbols more visible.

9 Change the Scale factor to 20 and place a line in the model.

10 In the Line Styles dialog, select {Tree Line}.

11 Click the preview to activate the style and place a line in the model.


Creating a Custom Line Style


Stroke patterns

A stroke pattern is a pattern of dash strokes and gap strokes that is displayed repeatedly along the length of an element. For each dash you specify the length, color and width.

Exercise: Create a line style library and a line style name

1 Continuing in Custom Linestyles.dgn, select Element > Line Styles > Edit.

2 In the Line Style Editor, select File > New.

3 Name the library linestyles.

4 Select Edit > Create > Name in the Line Style Editor.

A new Unnamed style is created.

5 Change Unnamed to Arrow and press Tab.

6 Select File > Save in the Line Style Editor.

It is a good idea to save after each completed, or edited, name, segment, or point type since the changes are not automatically saved.

Exercise: Create a stroke pattern

1 Continuing in Custom Linestyles.dgn, select Edit > Create > Stroke Pattern.

2 Below the Components frame, change “new stroke component” to Arrow - Stroke and press Tab.

Next you will link the style to the stroke pattern component.



3 With Arrow highlighted in the styles list and Arrow - Stroke is highlighted in the components list, select Edit > Link.

Double arrows appear next to the Arrow - Stroke component. Next you will define the stroke pattern.

4 Click Add in the Stroke Pattern frame at the bottom of the Line Style Editor.

A stroke pattern component appears in the Stroke Pattern preview.

5 Set these attributes for the new stroke:

Length: Fixed, 20

Stroke Type: Dash

Invert at: None

Corners: Break

Width: None

Start: 0.0

End: 0.0

Dash Caps: Closed

6 Click Add to add another component.

7 Click the second stroke component, surrounded by handles, in the stroke pattern preview.




Length: Fixed, 6

Stroke Type: Dash

Invert at: None

Corners: Break

Width: Full

Start: 3.0

End: 0.0

Dash Caps: Closed

9 Click Add to add another component.

10 Click the next stroke component, surrounded by handles, in the stroke pattern preview.


Length: Fixed, 20

Stroke Type: Dash

Invert at: None

Corners: Break

Width: None

Start: 0.0

End: 0.0

Dash Caps: Closed

The new stroke pattern appears in the preview area.


13 Select Arrow from the style option list in the Attributes toolbox and place a SmartLine in the model.

Stroke Pattern options

Length is either fixed or variable. If it is variable, the stroke length can be adjusted if the stroke pattern is shifted, or if a specific number of repetitions of the pattern must be displayed.



The Stroke Type is either dash or gap. Dash strokes are displayed and gap strokes are not. They appear as a gap in the line.

The Invert at setting controls whether the stroke is changed from a dash to a gap or vice versa. Set to Origin, the stroke is inverted at the origin of the element. End means the stroke is inverted at the end of the element. Both means the stroke is inverted in both the first and last repetitions of the pattern.

The Corners options determine whether the stroke pattern is bent, Break, when the stroke extends farther than an element vertex or if the stroke bypasses the vertex and continues straight to the nearest point on the element.

Width is in master units. None means the start and end width settings are ignored and the stroke pattern displays without width. Full means it displays with the specified width. Left or right means only the left or right half of the stroke displays with the specified width.

The Dash Caps options control the appearance of the end of the stroke pattern.

Point symbols

A point symbol defines how a series of symbols such as text or cells are displayed along the length of an element. A point symbol is associated to a stroke pattern component, from which dash stroke information is extracted to place the point symbols.

In the next exercise you will create a point symbol and combine it with a stroke pattern to create fence symbology. This is a compound style.

Exercise: Create the stroke pattern

1 Continuing in Custom Linestyles.dgn, select Edit > Create > Name in the Line Style Editor and name the style Fence.

2 Select Edit > Create > Stroke Pattern.

3 Change “new stroke component” to Fence - Stroke.



4 Click Add three times at the bottom of the Line Style Editor.

Three stroke pattern components appear in the preview.

5 Click the first stroke and set these attributes:

Length: Fixed, 10

Stroke Type: Dash

6 Click the second stroke and set these attributes:

Length: Fixed, 5

Stroke Type: Gap

7 Click the third stroke and set these attributes:

Length: Fixed, 10

Stroke Type: Dash

Now you will create a point component to represent the X in the fence line style.

8 Select Edit > Create > Point.

9 Change “new point component” to Fence - Point.

10 Click Base Stroke Pattern.

11 Select Fence - Stroke in the Base Stroke Pattern dialog and click OK.

Exercise: Create a point symbol

1 Continuing in Custom Linestyles.dgn, set the active line style to 0.

2 Select Place Line with the following tool settings:

Length: 14

Angle: 45

3 Place the line in the design and Zoom In on it.

4 Select Place Line with the following tool settings:

Length: 14

Angle: 315

5 Place the second line to create an X.

This symbol consists of two lines.



6 Select Element Selection and select the x.

7 Click Create in the Line Style Editor.

8 Name the point symbol X and click OK.

9 Snap to the center of the x and enter a data point to define the symbol origin.


Exercise: Associate the point symbol to the base stroke pattern

1 Continuing in Custom Linestyles.dgn, click the center gap stroke in the Fence - Stroke pattern preview.

2 Click Select.

3 In the Select Point Symbol dialog, select X and click OK.

The X point symbol is associated to the center stroke.

Next you must create a new compound component that includes the Fence - Stroke stroke pattern and the Fence - Point point component.

Compound components

Exercise: Create a compound component and name it

1 Continuing in Custom Linestyles.dgn, select Edit > Create > Compound.

2 Change “new compound component” to Fence - Compound.

3 Click Insert.

4 In the Select Component dialog, select Fence - Stroke from the list and click OK.

5 Click Insert.

6 Select Fence - Point from the list and click OK.

The Fence - Stroke and Fence - Point components are added to the Sub-Components list.

Now that the line style definition is created you can associate it with a name.

7 Highlight the name Fence in the Styles list.

8 Highlight Fence - Compound in the components list.



9 With the two entries highlighted, select Edit > Link.

Double arrows appear next to Fence - Compound.


Note: Always check to make sure you have properly linked the component with the new style as the last step in the custom line style creation process.

Note: When creating custom line styles that use a common stroke pattern or point symbol, create one style then copy it, then edit the copies.

Using an origin and terminator

In the following exercises you will create a style with a single terminating arrow and a style with a filled circle as its origin.

Exercise: Create a and define a new stroke pattern

1 Continuing in Custom Linestyles.dgn, select Edit > Create > Name in the Line Style Editor and name the style Pointer

2 Select Edit > Create > Stroke Pattern.

3 Change “new stroke component” to Arrow Terminated Line.

4 In the Stroke Pattern Attributes frame, set the following:

Repetitions: Count, 1

5 Click Add


Length: Variable, 1

Stroke Type: Dash

7 Click Add.

8 Click the new stroke and set the following attributes:

Length: Fixed, 6

Stroke Type: Dash

Width: Left

Start: 3



End: 0

9 Highlight the name Pointer in the Styles list.

10 Highlight Arrow Terminated Line in the components list.

11 Select Edit > Link.


Now you will use this line style as the basis for the next line style.

Exercise: Create a style with an arrow and a graphic

1 Continuing in Custom Linestyles.dgn, select Edit > Create > Point

2 Change “new point component” to Circle Anchor.

3 Select Place Circle with the following tool settings:

Fill Type: Opaque

Fill Color: 1

Diameter: Enabled and set to 3

4 Select Element Selection and select the circle.

5 Click Create.

6 Name the point symbol Circle dia 3 and click OK.

7 Snap to the center of the circle and accept with a data point.

8 Click Origin.

9 Click Select.

10 Select Circle dia 3.

11 Click Base Stroke Pattern.

12 Select Arrow Terminated Line.


Exercise: Continue style creation

1 Continuing in Custom Linestyles.dgn, select Edit > Create > Name in the Line Style Editor and name the style Pointer - Anchored.

2 Select Edit > Create > Compound.

3 Change “new compound component” to Pointer - Anchored Compound.

4 Click Insert and select Arrow Terminated Line.

5 Click Insert and select Circle Anchor.



Managing Line Styles

7 Highlight the name Pointer - Anchored in the Styles list.

8 Highlight the component Pointer - Anchored Compound.

9 Select Edit > Link.


Managing Line Styles

Add the styles to a DGNLIB

Exercise: Add the styles to the DGN libraries

1 Continuing in Custom Linestyles.dgn, select File > New from the main menu bar.

2 Navigate to the General project’s \Dgnlib folder.

This project is set up so that MS_DGNLIBLIST points to the files in this folder.

3 Name the new file linestyles.dgnlib.

4 In the Line Style Editor, select File > Import > MicroStation Resource File (RSC).

5 Select linestyle.rsc and click Open.

The styles are added to the file and can be read from it.

Managing resource styles

Select File > Manage in the Line Style Editor to open a utility that manages line styles in multiple resource files. Use the Manage Line Style Definitions dialog to copy line styles from one resource file to another and rename or delete line styles in a resource file

Import from V7 or AutoCAD

Use the Import utility to import line styles from a V7 line style library or an AutoCAD .lin file into the open DGN library or resource file. Select File > Import in the Line Style Editor and then locate the file to import.

Exporting styles

Select File > Export From DGN to select or create the “.rsc” file to which to export. You can export all custom line styles stored in the active file to an RSC file. This capability is useful in the case where users of MicroStation/J (V7) need to use custom line styles created with MicroStation V8.


Modifying Line Styles

Modifying Line Styles

Modifying line style attributes

Use the Modify Line Style Attributes tool to edit the line style attributes of existing elements. Use the icons to select whether the width, scale or shift is changed.

Exercise: Modify line style attributes

1 Open Custom Linestyles.dgn.

2 Window Area around the custom styles you placed in the file.

3 Select Modify Line Style Attributes with the following tool setting:

Modify: Shift

4 Enter a data point on a Cable/Tele (CT) line.

5 Move the pointer to reposition the letters.

The Shift check box is available when the Shift icon is selected. Enable it and type the shift distance, relative to the beginning of the element. Results depend on the Absolute setting.

If the Absolute check box is enabled the value represents the actual shift distance. If Absolute is disabled, the value represents the amount to modify the existing shift distance.

Note: To globally change scale of line styles, open the DGN File Settings dialog and select the Element Attributes category. Set the global line style scale and click OK.

Changing direction

In addition to shifting element positions along a line, you may want to change the direction. The direction is determined by the order in which you entered the data points when you placed the original element.

Exercise: Reverse the arrow direction

1 Continuing in line.dgn, select Tools > B-spline Curves > Modify Curves.

2 Select Change Element Direction with the following tool setting:

Mode: Change Direction

3 Identify the SmartLine you placed using the Arrow style.



Module Review

Drop line styles

To modify a component of a custom line style, you must convert the custom line style to primitive elements.

Exercise: Drop a line style

1 Continuing in line.dgn, select Tools > Drop.

2 Select Drop Line Style.

3 Enter a data point on the Cable/Tele (CT) line.

The line style is dropped and you can edit the text or otherwise change the components.


Module Review


Questions

1 Of what does a custom line style consist?

2 When do you create a point symbol?

3 What is a compound component?

4 True or False: Custom line styles must be stored in .rsc files.

5 In what units is component width stored?

Answers

1 A custom line style consists of a stroke pattern composed of dash strokes and gap strokes of varying lengths.

2 If a custom line style includes a repeating symbol such as a text character or other non-linear element.

3 A compound component is a combination of components of any type. The only way to display both strokes patterns and point symbols is to create a compound component.

4 False. Custom line styles can be stored in DGN libraries and files as well as .rsc files.

5 Width is in master units.


Module Review


Tools and Techniques to Enhance Productivity

Module Overview

This module discusses features, settings and additional element types that you can use to enhance your designs, as well as your productivity.





Module Objectives


• Better manage files using File Open dialog

• Create and use elements that have special attributes

• Use point and curve elements

• Work more effectively with cells

• Select specific elements

• Work with clip volumes

• Browse Element Information

• Set the Default Snap Mode as a User Preference

Nov-08 113 Tools and Techniques to Enhance Productivity





Questions

1 What is a selection set?

2 What is annotation scale?

3 How do you open the standard Element Information dialog?

Answers

1 A group of elements that is selected for modification or manipulation using Element Selection or Select By Attributes, or by selecting Edit > Select All.

2 Annotation scale is defined for each model in a DGN file. It sets the scale for text, cells and dimensioning so they can be scaled to the appropriate size when printing. When the Annotation Scale lock is on, the active annotation scale is applied.

3 Click the tool on the Standard toolbox, select Element > Information, or select Properties from the Reset pop-up menu.

Files

Global Origin

A new Global Origin dialog displays when you key in GO= or ACTIVE ORIGIN. Its two options let you define coordinates for a monument point, to relocate the global origin, or you can set it back to the default position at the center of the design plane.

Global origin settings by monument point

The Monument Point option for Mode, in the Global Origin dialog, lets you input values for x, y, and z (for 3D), which are located at the monument point that you select in the model.

Tools and Techniques to Enhance Productivity 114 Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Dialogs

Global origin settings by design plane center

The Center option for Mode, in the Global Origin dialog, lets you set the Global Origin of the model back to the center of the design plane or cube.

Dialogs

File Open Dialog

Thumbnails

MicroStation stores a thumbnail image in each DGN file in a bitmap format. They can be seen in the file open dialogs as well as Windows Explorer. This is useful if you want to have a particular view show as the thumbnail, such as a plan title, a station coordinate, or a title block.

The thumbnail image is created and updated using the lowest numbered open view. If views 4 through 8 are open, View 4 is used. However, if there is a saved view named Preview, that saved view’s settings are used.

Exercise: Manipulating the preview


Project: Building

2 Select \Sheets\BSI300AE101-Plan.dgn.

3 Note the thumbnail displayed in the File Open dialog.

4 Open the file.

5 Window Area around the title of the plan in the lower right corner.


7 Select File > Close to return to the File Open dialog.

The thumbnail has been updated to the new view.

8 Reopen the file.

9 Select Utilities > Saved Views.

10 Click Save View.

Nov-08 115 Tools and Techniques to Enhance ProductivityCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Dialogs

11 In the Create Save View dialog, set the following:

Method: From View

Name: Preview

12 Following the status bar prompt, enter a data point in the view.

13 Fit View and select File > Save Settings.

14 Select File > Close to return to the File Open dialog.

The thumbnail shows the contents of the saved view.

Grouping files

One of the Windows style features of the File Open dialog is the ability to group files. You can use details and groups to list file data in useful ways.

Exercise: Group files

1 In the File Open dialog click the View Menu icon and select Details.

2 Right click in the file list and select Arrange Icons By > Show in Groups.

Files are grouped alphabetically.

3 Right click and Arrange Icons By > Modified.

Files are grouped by modified date.

4 Return to List mode if desired.

Saved views dialog

Saved views can now be displayed as a graphical element within design and sheet models. Once displayed, a saved view can be selected and manipulated like a standard element. The View Attributes dialog includes sections for Presentation and Clip Volume Settings of Saved Views.


The Status Bar

When you click the Show column in the Saved View dialog, graphics show the parameters of the view if the View Attribute Boundary Display is enabled. The saved view graphics can be selected with the Element Selection tool or a fence, and manipulated like a regular element.

Saved Views can be used from the Active File or a Link Set in any attached DGN library.

The Clip Volume column shows the named clip volume, such as a named fence, that is associated with the saved view. The named clip volume is displayed only for saved views, detail views, and plan views. For section views and elevation views, the section clip element is displayed.

Click in the column and select the clip volume you want to apply to the saved view. This is done in a drawing composition workflow.

If a named clip volume or section clip element to which a saved view is associated is deleted, the saved view will now contain its own clip volume and will behave like a saved view with a non-associative clip volume.

The Status Bar

• Right click in the status bar to open a menu that lets you select the sections of the status bar you want to display.


Special Element Attributes

If you display the Running Coordinates section of the status bar, as you move the pointer, the coordinates of the current position display, related to the active snap mode.

Coordinates of the intersection

If you left click in the area, a menu opens. The Delta modes show the X, Y, and Z displacement from the last data point. The Distance modes show the distance and direction from the last data point. If you left click the Running Coordinates section then the following menu appears:

The Delta modes show the X, Y, and Z displacement from the last data point. The Distance modes show the distance and direction from the last data point. The default value is Position.

• Left click in any section of the status bar to see a menu of options related to that section.

• Left click in the Fence section to change the fence mode, or in the Element Selection section to change selection criteria.

• Left click the Locks icon and select Full to open the Locks dialog (or Settings > Locks > Full).


This section examines element properties other than level, color, style or transparency.

Primary and Construction elements

An element belongs to either the Primary or Construction class. The elements you place in a design usually belong to the Primary class. These elements are fundamental to the completed design. However, you may need to create temporary elements that help you develop a design,



but are not actually part of the completed design. These elements can be created as Construction class elements.

One of the features of these elements is that you can selectively display them in a view. This lets you hide them so they only display for reference purposes. Control the display of Construction class elements in the View Attributes dialog by clicking the Constructions icon.

Construction elements shown on the left aid in designTheir display is turned off on the right

Note: Display of construction elements can also be toggled in the printer configuration file.

Setting the attribute

To set the active class for a series of elements, select Settings > Design File and select the Element Attributes category. From the Class option menu, select Primary or Construction and click OK. All elements you place will now have this attribute.

Warning: Be careful when setting the construction attribute. An element retains this attribute unless you reset it. You could create an entire design using Construction class elements and doing so could cause problems during editing or when printing.

Changing an element’s class

You can change an element’s class using the Change Element Attributes tool or in the Element Information dialog, General category. Fence operations are supported when you use Change Element Attributes. Element Information requires that you modify an element individually.

The Snappable attribute

This attribute determines whether AccuSnap snaps to an element and if you can execute a tentative snap on it.



If an element is not snappable, AccuSnap displays the universal No icon. If you attempt to tentative snap, the crosshair indicates that you cannot do so.

Tentative snap to a not snappable element, left, and a snappable element, right

You can change the snappable status on the Extended tab of the Element Information dialog.

Note: You can create a Graphic Cell with only one snap point by creating the cell graphics and then changing the elements’ attributes so they are Not Snappable. Then place a snappable construction point element at the origin and create the cell.

The Locked attribute

Elements can be locked in place in a DGN file. Once set, this attribute keeps you from moving, modifying, or deleting an element, but it does not keep you from copying. When an element is created, it is unlocked by default.

You can lock and unlock elements two different ways.

• Select Lock or Unlock from the Edit menu.

• Change the Locked property in the Element Information dialog, Extended tab.

To modify element properties when you want to select and manipulate specific design elements, do the following.

1. Lock any elements that you want to preserve.

2. Use Delete Fence Contents to remove desired elements.

3. Move desired elements into place.

The Area attribute

The Area element attribute is either set to Solid or Hole. This attribute can be set in many element placement tools’ tool settings. Use the Change Element to Active Area tool to change it. You can also change this attribute in the Element Information dialog, Extended tab.



Exercise: Create a hole element and hatch

1 Set the following in the MicroStation Manger:

Project: General

2 Open BaseGeometry.dgn.

3 Open the Ellipses Model.

4 With the Drawing tasks active, select Place Circle with the following tool settings:

Method: Center

Area: Solid

Fill type: None

5 Place a circle inside one of the unfilled ellipses.

6 Change the following tool setting:

Area: Hole

7 Place a circle inside one of the unfilled ellipses.

8 Select Hatch Area with the following tool settings:

Method: Element

Associative Pattern: Disabled

Search for Holes: View Levels (expand the tool settings)

9 On both double ellipses, enter a data point on an outer ellipse and enter a data point to accept.

The hole element is recognized.


Use the Search for Holes options when creating a non-associative pattern. You can ignore hole elements by selecting No. Search for them on the same level as the element being


Tools - Point Elements

patterned by selecting Element Levels. Select View Levels to search on all levels displayed in the view.

To place an associated pattern with interior holes, use the Flood method with Locate Interior Shapes and Associative Region Boundary enabled. Note that the interior shapes do not have to be hole elements. This lets you modify the shape and keep the holes free from the pattern.

Grouping holes

Use the Group Hole tool from the Groups toolbox to identify a solid element and the hole elements to be associated with that solid.

To group a solid with many hole elements, you can make the outer shape a solid and the inner shapes holes by using the Area options when creating the elements. Then make a selection set of all the elements and select Edit > Group. This creates the grouped holes. Next, clear the selection set. To fill the element, select Change Element Fill Type or use a patterning tool to pattern it.


Points are often used as reference points or construction aids in a DGN file. The Active Point can be a cell, a text character, a symbol, or a line with no (zero) length.

Place Active Point, Points Between, Point on Element, at Intersection, Along Element, at Distance Along

Solving design problems with points

If you need to divide an irregular element into segments of equal length, you can use points to assist you.



• To place evenly spaced points along a right of way, first select Use Points Along Element. Following the status bar prompt, identify the element along which you want to place the points. Following the status bar prompt, enter the end point.

Note: When specifying the number of points, you add one to the number of evenly divided spaces you wish to create.

Next, place evenly spaced points along the boundary at the back of the lots using the same technique.

Now you can use a linear tool to draw lot line by snapping to the points.


Tools - Align Elements by Edge

• You can project the lot lines to the center of the road using (Construct Active) Point at Intersection. Select the tool, identify the lot line, and then the centerline of the road near the lot line. Enter a data point to accept.

• Using Construct Pnts Between (Data Points) and a cell as the point type you can evenly space cells. You specify the number of cells to place and the chain is dynamic until placed.

• Use the (Project Active) Point on Element tool to put an active point on the element that is closest to a data point that you enter.

• (Construct Active Point at) Distance Along Element puts an Active Point on an element at a specified distance from where the element is identified.


This tool, in the Manipulate toolbox, provides an easy way to align elements to a common edge on another element. Tool settings determine how to align the element and whether the original elements should be copied. Status bar prompts provide instructions about the selection order required to align the elements.



Exercise: Align elements to one elevation

1 Open Text.dgn, and open the TextStyles model.

The notes in the frame as aligned about an imaginary centerline. This will be changed so they are aligned with the left edge of the top note.

2 Select Element Selection, with the following tool settings:

Method: Block

Mode: Add

3 Following the status bar prompt, place a block around the text strings below “Title text style (from DGNLib)”.

The elements highlight.

4 Select Align Elements by Edge, with the following tool settings:

Align: Left

Make Copy: Disabled

5 Enter a data point on the text “Title text style (from DGNLib)”.

This becomes the base element for the alignment.


The text strings align to the left.

7 Reset.

8 In the Element Selection tool settings, click Clear to release the elements.



Tools - Curves

Tools - Curves

Composite curves

Like Place SmartLine, Place Composite Curve is another tool that creates complex chains and shapes. Find this tool in the Tools > Curves toolbox, as a child of the Create Curves tool or select Tools > Tool Boxes and open the Create Curves toolbox.

Tool settings for this tool let you select the type of curve and specify the curve radius and angle parameters for each segment during construction. The Mode options let you select any of four element segment types.

• Line Segments constructs line strings generated by continuous data points.

• Arcs by Edge transitions from a line segment into a tangent arc.

• Arcs by Center identifies the center of the new tangent arc.

• Bézier Curve creates a mathematically generated, free form curve used where the position of every point which forms the absolute curve line is critical, such as in an airfoil.

Place Composite Curve lets you place line segments and turn them into a curve. With the smooth corners option selected, the curve is placed tangent to the line segment. The tool also lets you place reversed tangent curves.

Point curves

Point curves are based on a relatively simple mathematical formula. There are no settings that control the curve’s shape. As you place a point curve, it is dynamically displayed as you enter data points. You can place active points or other elements to snap to as you place the point curve, and you can enter data points using AccuDraw.

The Place Point or Stream Curve tool from the Linear Elements toolbox works like other tools that place element strings.

Place a curve string element with this tool by entering successive data points at desired locations and then reset to accept. The result is a gently curving element passing through each data point. Establish the magnitude of the curve by the angle and distance between data points.


Tools - Curves

B-spline curves

A B-spline curve is more complex than a point curve. A B-spline curve’s shape is determined by the number and location of its poles, which are represented as vertices of the curve’s control polygon, and its order. With B-splines, you can adjust the settings as you watch the curve update, then accept the curve when it has the correct shape.

B-spline curves are drawn with the Place B-spline Curve tool from the Create Curves tools, as well as with several 2D B-spline tools.

B-spline by Points

You can place a B-spline curve by entering data points or construct it by identifying a line string or shape. Do this by selecting Points or Picking Line String from the Input By options in the tool settings.

The method of defining the curve is also set in the tool settings.

• Using Control Points, the poles, or vertices, of the control polygon are defined by data points or by the vertices of the selected line string or shape. The number of poles must be greater than, or equal to, the order that you type in the order field.

Data points define the curveThe Order is 4 and it is an open curve

• Using Through Points, the curve passes through points defined by data points, or the vertices of the selected line string or shape and is interpolated at each point. The curve is cubic, defaulting to Order=4, with continuous second derivatives which minimize the curvature.

• Using L-Square By Tol, least squares by tolerance, the curve is approximated based on points defined by data points, or the vertices of the selected line string or shape. Adjust the maximum deviation of the input points from the curve using the Tolerance field.


Tools - Curves

After the approximation curve is created, the maximum deviation and the mean deviation display in the status bar.

• Using L-Square By Num, least squares by number, the sum of the squares of the distances from data points, or the vertices of the selected line string or shape, to corresponding points on the curve is minimized. The control polygon has the active number of poles.

If the number of data points or vertices is the same as the number of poles, the curve passes through all the data points or vertices.

If the curve is open, the curve begins and ends at the first last data points. If it is closed, the curve approximates all data points or vertices and does not need to pass through any of them unless there are the same number as the number of poles.

• A Catmull-Rom is a cubic, order = 4, NURBS curve that is interpolated. Extra poles are added to resemble the shape defined by the data points entered.

It uses the formula Number of Poles = 3 × (Data Points - 1) + 1.

Special 2D tools

Tools in the Create Curves toolbox are used to place special types of 2D B-spline curves.


Tools - Cells

• The Conic Curve tool is used to place a conic section such as a hyperbola, parabola, or partial ellipse.

• The Spiral Curve tool is used to place a transitional spiral and this is most commonly used for highway design.

• The Interpolation by Arcs tool is used to place a complex chain of arcs that passes through a given set of points.

Tools - Cells

Annotation scale for cells

The Cell Library dialog has a column to indicate this cell property. You use the Place Active Cell tool to place annotation cells.

When you make a cell that can be placed as an annotation cell active for placement, the annotation scale lock, similar to the one for text and dimensioning tools, becomes active. If the model’s annotation scale is changed, the cells placed with this lock enabled will also scale.

This topic is covered further in the Annotation Scale module.

Cell placement options

There are additional placement options that provide precision when placing cells.

• The Mirror option lets you mirror a cell about the horizontal or vertical axis, or about both the horizontal and vertical axes.

The first cell is not mirroredThe remaining cells are mirrored Horizontal, Vertical and Both

• The Interactive options let you define size and rotation using data points. Define just the scale or just the rotation angle, or define both scale and rotation.


Tools - Cells

The following options let you apply the active scale to cells, the same as the options in the Scale tool settings. If a check box is off, the active scale is not applied.

• Use the Scale Multi-line Offsets option to apply the active scale to multi-line offsets.

The active scale is 1.5Scale Multi-line Offsets disabled at leftScale Multi-line Offsets enabled at right

• Use the Scale Dimension Values option to apply the active scale to dimension values.

The active scale is 1.5Scale Dimension Values disabled at leftScale Dimension Values enabled at right

• Use the Scale Annotations option to apply the active scale to elements that are scaled by annotation scale.

The active scale is 1.5Scale Annotations disabled at leftScale Annotations enabled at right

Note: These settings do not affect shared cells; elements in shared cells always scale.


Tools - Selecting Elements

Cell index

A cell index contains all of the models in the active file that have the Can be placed as cell option enabled.

Find the Place Cell Index tool in the Cells toolbox. Tool settings let you set the size of the box in which each cell appears. The size is based on the active text style.

You can also set the number of cells per row and you can select whether or not to display grid lines, similar to showing grid lines in spreadsheet applications. You can include cell names and descriptions. The Insertion Points option displays the cell origin.

A cell index can be used as a screen menu if the Grid Lines option is enabled.


Select By Attributes

Use this utility to filter the display of selected elements, the selectability of elements or to select elements based on their cell or tag values. Select Element > Select By Attributes to open it.

Defining search criteria

• Use level, element type and symbology to set search parameters based on these attributes.

• Click Properties and select by properties such as element class, snappable, modified, etc.

• Click Tags to set parameters to select specific tags.

• From the Tools menu, select Set Select By from Element to open a dialog that contains check boxes for many element attributes. Enable or disable the check boxes to match the element criteria you wish to match. Then click on the element you want to match. This sets the filter criteria.

• From the Settings menu, you can open dialogs to select settings related to specific text or tags.

Displaying results

Once you define search criteria, you must decide what to do with elements that meet it. The options in the Mode section determine this.

• Inclusive selects all the elements that meet the search criteria and adds them to the selection set.

• Exclusive selects all elements that do not meet the search criteria and adds them to the selection set.



You can also select whether to isolate the elements by creating a selection set or by displaying them.

• Selection means select the element and add it to the selection set, just like using Element Selection.

• Location filters the location of elements meeting the search criteria. All other elements are displayed, but are not accessible. You can then use Select All to select those elements.

• Display shows only the elements meeting the search criteria.

As long as Select By Attribute is active, the filtering criteria affects all further MicroStation actions. This means tools like Copy and Delete will only work on the elements identified by Select By Attributes. Filtering even affects fence operations.

Warning: Select By Attributes searches all levels whether they are displayed or not, so it is possible to select and modify elements that are not visible. Work carefully to prevent editing elements that you do not want to affect.

Note: Make a copy of a large file prior to modifying selected elements, as the Undo buffer may not be large enough for you to recover from a mistake.

Ending filtering

Terminating Select By Attributes requires an additional step. When you close the Select By Attributes dialog, an alert appears.

If you click OK, any search criteria you have established remains in effect until you either exit the DGN file or restart the Select By Attributes command. Click Cancel to end the filtering.

Element Selection

Options in the tool settings let you select elements by one or more attributes such as level, color, style, weight, type and class. For existing selection sets, the attributes of the selected elements appear in a highlighted group at the top of each tab.

Top row, left to right: Element Type, Element Class and Element Template tabsBottom row, Level, Color, Style and Weight tabs

To add elements to an existing selection set by attributes, select an attribute that is not highlighted. If an element with that attribute exists, it will be added to the set. To remove elements with specific attributes from the current set, select the attribute from the highlighted list at the top of each tab.


Tools - Change Attributes

Exercise: Selection by Attributes


Project: Geospatial

2 Open \Designs\BSI200-R02-Land Acquisition.dgn.

3 Open the Wards model.

4 Select Element Selection and click the Show Extended Settings arrow to expand the tool settings.

5 Select the color tab.

6 Click on color 1.

All elements that are color 1 are selected.

7 Select the Level tab.

The selected elements are on the levels that are highlighted.

8 Select the other tabs.

You see the attributes and element types of the selected elements grouped and highlighted at the top of each tab.



More attributes tabs, hidden by default, can be added to the Element Selection tool. To display them right click on the attributes tabs in the tool settings and turn on the desired attributes. These attributes are Text Styles, Dimension Styles, Multi-line Styles, Transparency, and Display Priority.

Tools - Change Attributes

Enhancements to the Change Attributes tool make it easier to select attributes from an existing element to apply to another.

• Use the Match element attributes by selection dropper icon to match the element attributes in the tool settings to those of a selected element in the model.

• The Change Entire Element option will, for example, change the color for a text style to green, where the existing text color is red and the underline color blue. If Change Entire


Tools - Detailing Symbols

Element is off, only the text will change color. If Change Entire Element is on, both the text and the underline will change to the new color.

How to match the element attributes in the tool settings to those of a selected element in the model and set Active Attributes:

First, enable the Use Active Attributes check box. Then, click the dropper icon. The status bar prompts you to identify the element to match. When you do, the active file attributes change.

If the Change Entire Element option is enabled, the attributes for an entire complex element are changed.

Tools - Detailing Symbols

When you place a Section, Detail, or Elevation marker, if you enable the Create Section, Detail, or Elevation View check box, a new saved view is created.

You define the area of the view by identifying the model in which you want to create the saved view, and then enter two data points to place the marker. A dashed box defines the clip area in a sheet model or the clip volume in the design model. Clicking the detailing symbol toggles the display of the dashed box.

Multiple section markers can be linked to the same saved view. If two designers have a plan view of the same building and both want to place a section marker at the same location, they can both link to the same saved view.

Clip Volumes

During a design session, you may want to work on a particular element and rotate it to view from various angles. When you do this with clipping planes set, however, parts may disappear


Clip Volumes

or other elements appear in the display depth. MicroStation’s Clip Volume tools let you select a discrete volume, within the design cube, for display.

This tool is helpful when you have elements on the same level, and you do not want to see all of them.

You can use 2D or 3D elements to define the volume. When you use a 2D shape, the clipping volume is created by sweeping the 2D shape through the entire model. The sweep direction is perpendicular to the plane of the 2D element. MicroStation creates a 2D clipping shape using active attributes. When a 3D element is used, it defines the entire clip volume.

Before

After applying a clip volume - half of the train is cut away


Clip Volumes

Operations, such as view rotation, fence processing, hidden line removal, and rendering, honor the clip volumes. They ignore any elements that are not displayed within the defined volume for the view.

Clipping elements may consist of any solid, other than spheres or feature solids, or closed extrusion, cylinders, or closed planar elements (shapes, circles, ellipses, complex shapes, grouped holes). If a planar element is chosen, or you use the clipping elements by points options, the clipping volume is generated by sweeping the planar element through the entire model. Planar elements may be selected in any view, because the sweep direction is orthogonal to the plane of the element. Similarly, clip elements that you define by points may be drawn in any view. AccuDraw can be used to set the correct orientation of the clip element.

Set Clip Volume options using icons in the tool settings.

• By Element applies a clip volume from an existing element.

• By Section Plane

• By 2 Points lets you apply a clip volume by defining a rectangular clipping element with 2 data points

• By Polygon lets you apply a clip volume by interactively defining vertices of a polygon with data points. The polygon can be closed by entering a data point at the start point, or by clicking the Close Element button.

• By Element Range applies a clip volume that encloses the range of a selected element or group of elements. If a selection set is active, the clip element will enclose the entire group of elements.

• Show/Hide Clip Element toggles the display of a view's clip volume element. Same function as Display Clip Element.

• Clear Clip Volume removes the current clip volume (but not the element) from a view.

Clip Volume Extended Options are set at the bottom of the tool settings.

• Apply Clip Volume from Named Fence creates a clip volume from the named fence, selected from the list, and applies the clip volume to the active view.

• Delete deletes the named fence selected in the named fence list.

• Save creates a named fence from the clip volume in the active view is created.


Clip Volumes

Clip Volume Options

By Element

Apply Clip By Section Plane

Apply Clip By 2 Points

Apply Clip Volume By Polygon


Clip Volumes

Clip Volumes and View Attributes

The View Attributes dialog has Clip Volume Settings. When a view contains a Clip Volume the View Attributes dialog will display a Clip Volume tab. The settings on this tab provide various ways to display the Clip Volumes.

In this view the Clip Volume Settings of the View Attributes Settings are set to display the Forward volume of the Clip Element with the From View option enabled. The Back, Cut and Outside options are disabled.

Here is the same view with different options selected from the Clip Volume Settings.


Clip Volumes

Clip Volume Settings and Display Style

When a Display Style is created or an existing style is modified, enabling the Clip Volume box in the Display Style window will place the style as an additional option in the Clip Volume Settings.

Clicking on the magnifying glass will open the Display Styles dialog.

Applying a clip volume

You can use a clip volume to isolate a part of the model so that you can work on it without the confusion from the display of other parts of the model.

Exercise: Applying a clip volume by 2 points.

1 Set the following in the MicroStation Manager:

Project: Plant



Clip Volumes

3 Click Rotate View in View 2’s View Control toolbox, and select Top View.

4 Fit View, and then Zoom Out.

5 From View 2’s View Control toolbox, select the Clip Volume tool with the following tool settings:

Apply Clip Volume By 2 Points

Display Clip Element: Enabled

6 In the View Rotation toolbox, select Top View.

7 Enter data points to create a Clip Element.

8 Enter a data point in the View, to accept the clip volume.

9 In the tool settings, click Show or Hide Clip Element, and enter a data point in the view.

The clip element disappears.

10 Select Rotate View, and rotate the view.

Only the elements in the clip volume are visible during the rotation.

11 Click Rotate View in View 2’s View Control toolbox, and select Isometric View.

No other elements appear in the view.


Browsing Element Information

12 Select the Clip Volume tool, click Clear Clip Volume in the tool settings, and enter a data point in the view.


Browsing Element Information

Selection, Model or File browse modes can be used in the standard Element Information dialog. You can select a single mode or you can display all three modes simultaneously. Selection mode is active by default.

Right click <Selection> in the selection tree and select Dialog Properties from the pop-up menu. This adds a Dialog Properties tab where you set the browse mode and can choose the way data is organized. Organize selected elements by Name, Level, Color, Style, or Weight.

When you browse All, tabs let you switch between Selection, Model, and File modes. To switch to another mode, right click the top entry in the selection tree and select Dialog


Set the Default Snap Mode as a User Preference

Properties pop-up menu. Right click on the top most entry in the tree at any time to switch modes or the method of organization.

Browsing All (Selection, Model, and File) with elements organized by Name

• Selection mode lists the selected elements and their properties. This is legacy behavior.

• Model mode lists the saved views, named groups and models in the file. Expand the entry to see a list of all elements contained in that saved view, named group, or model.

• File mode shows file-wide information. Tag sets and text styles are listed and you can review their properties. All models are also listed and information about the model itself is displayed.

When browsing by File, click on each model entry to obtain information about it. Right click on a model and select Make Active to switch to that model. Then, select elements in that model to obtain information about them.

Set the Default Snap Mode as a User Preference

The variable MS_SNAPMODE_SOURCE controls the location from which the default snap mode and multi-snap settings come.

MS_SNAPMODE_SOURCE = 0, or undefined, takes the default snap mode from the active file.

MS_SNAPMODE_SOURCE = 1 stores the default snap mode as a user preference and applies it to each file when opened.


Module Review

Module Review


Questions

1 What is a construction element?

2 True or False: When an element is created, it is unlocked by default.

3 True or False: Once dropped, a dimension cannot be recovered.

4 If you edit dimension text, replacing its automatic value, can you change the value back to the automatic value?

5 What is a typical use for a point element?

6 How do you change the text style of all text elements having one text style to another text style?

7 How do you place multiple leader lines with Place Note?

8 What can Select By Attributes do that Element Selection cannot?

Answers

1 A temporary element that helps you develop a design and can be selectively displayed.

2 True.

3 True.

4 Yes. Edit the value and replace it with an asterisk.

5 A few examples: To divide an irregular element into segments of equal length. To place evenly spaced points along an element. As reference points.

6 Use Remap Elements in the Text Styles dialog.

7 Press and hold the Ctrl key when placing a note’s leader lines.

8 A few examples: select cells by name, text by string, select specific tag elements, filter elements by display.


Module Review


Working with AccuDraw in 3D

Module Overview

AccuDraw was designed to work with the 3D design environment. This module advances your use of AccuDraw from 2D to 3D.


• Knowledge of MicroStation’s drawing tools

• Knowledge of AccuDraw’s interface components

• Some knowledge about how to use AccuDraw in 2D

Module Objectives


• Use AccuDraw in the 3D drawing planes

• Design using AccuDraw’s 3D shortcuts as an aid

• Use AccuDraw and snaps in 3D

Nov-08 145 Working with AccuDraw in 3D





Questions

1 Name the two AccuDraw interface components.

2 Describe the method used to draw a 10 unit long line using AccuDraw.

3 Name three AccuDraw shortcuts.

Answers

1 The compass and the AccuDraw window.

2 Index to the desired axis and type 10 in the AccuDraw window.

3 The space bar toggles between Rectangular and Polar mode. <O> moves the compass to the current pointer position or a tentative point. Press Enter to Smart Lock; it will index to the closest axis and lock the opposite field value. <R><Q> temporarily changes the rotation of the compass to a user defined angle.

The Drawing Planes

Rotated views such as Isometric or Right Isometric let you view a design more clearly. When working in these views, if you want to draw an object on the Top or Front plane, you can rotate the AccuDraw compass to that plane using an AccuDraw shortcut. You do this by

Working with AccuDraw in 3D 146 Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

AccuDraw and Element Placement in 3D

rotating AccuDraw’s compass to an orthogonal plane with one of the shortcuts V (view), T (top), F (front), or S (side).

No matter which view you are working in, you can use AccuDraw shortcuts to rotate its compass to the Top (T), Front (F), Side (S) or View (V) orientation

Note: Remember that the focus must be in the AccuDraw window for shortcuts to work.


Placing elements in a 2D file is as simple as drawing on a sheet of paper. All elements are on one plane, the x,y plane. When you place the same elements in a 3D model, by default they are placed in the AccuDraw drawing plane. The AccuDraw drawing plane can be rotated to match the view you are using, or it can be defined to be a particular rotation.

In the following exercises you will draw an open rectangular box using 2D blocks.

Exercise: Open the model and draw the base surface

NOTE: These exercises require a file that is not one of the delivered MicroStation Example files. It must be provided by an instructor.


User: untitled

Project: Untitled

2 Open AccuDraw_3D.dgn from the class data set.

3 Open the model AccuDraw_01.

You can see the ACS triad in each view. It indicates the directions of the 3 axes. You toggle the display of the ACS triad in the View Attributes dialog.

4 With focus in the AccuDraw window, press <V> on the keyboard.

Nov-08 147 Working with AccuDraw in 3DCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


This is the AccuDraw shortcut for View orientation.

First you will draw the base of the box using the Top view. You will use AccuDraw to input precise dimensions for the block. This part of the exercise is no different than working in 2D.

5 Select Place Block from the Drawing tasks.

6 Enter a data point in the lower left corner of the Top view.

7 Move the pointer to the right and, with it indexed to AccuDraw’s x-axis, type 1.5 and do NOT enter a data point.

8 Move the pointer upward and type 1.25.

9 Enter a data point to complete the block.

10 Fit each view.

Top, Isometric, Front and Right views

The block appears as a line in both the Front and Right views, where you see the just edge in the view.

Each view has an active depth, where data points fall by default if you do not snap to an element. Here, you will snap to the block that you just drew and use AccuDraw to keep the pointer at that depth in the view.

Next you will use the Front and Right views to draw the front and right faces of the box.

Exercise: Use Front and Right views to draw corresponding faces for the box

1 Continuing in AccuDraw_3D.dgn, in model AccuDraw_01, select Place Block.

2 In the Front view, snap to the left end of the existing block, which appears as a line in this view, and accept with a data point.

3 Move the pointer to the right and, with it indexed to AccuDraw’s x-axis, type 1.5.



4 Move the pointer upward, type 0.5, and enter a data point to complete the block.

5 Fit each view.

For the right face, you can snap to existing elements to place the points.

6 Select Place Block.

7 In the Right view, snap to the right end of the base (the horizontal line) and accept with a data point.

8 Continuing in the Right view, snap to the top of the front surface (the vertical line) and accept with a data point.

As you do this, watch the Isometric view to ensure that you are snapping to the correct points and that you are placing the block correctly.

9 Fit each view.

To complete the box, you can use the Copy tool to copy the existing faces and create the opposite sides. When you copy an element in 3D, it retains its current orientation. That means a vertical face remains vertical, a horizontal face remains horizontal, and so on.

Copy the existing faces to complete the box

1 Continuing in AccuDraw_3D.dgn, in model AccuDraw_01, select Copy from the Main toolbox with the following tool setting:

Copies: 1

2 In the Front view, identify the block representing the front face at its lower left vertex.

The face is attached to the pointer. As you move the pointer in the other views, the front face element retains its current orientation.


Using AccuDraw’s Rotated Drawing Planes

3 In the Isometric view, snap to the back left vertex of the base block and accept to complete the copy.

4 Reset.

5 In the Right view, identify the block representing the right face at its lower right vertex.

6 In the Isometric view, snap to the back left vertex of the base block and accept to complete the copy.

7 Reset.

8 Click the View Display Mode view control in the Isometric view’s view control toolbox and change the display mode to Hidden Line.

9 Select Rotate View.

10 Rotate the Isometric view and make sure that you have correctly drawn all the surfaces for the open box.

In this exercise, you used MicroStation’s views to help you correctly orient the elements. Of the four views, the Isometric view displays the model best. You can see the three faces clearly.


Now you will use AccuDraw and a single view to place elements aligned with any of the orthogonal views; Top, Front, Side.



In the following exercises, you will work in the Isometric view and let AccuDraw help you align the elements correctly.

Exercise: Place an element in the Top view orientation

1 Continuing in AccuDraw_3D.dgn, open model AccuDraw_02.

This model has been saved with four views open and arranged so that the Isometric view is larger than the others. You will use that view.

2 With AccuDraw active, select Place Block.

3 Enter a data point at bottom center of the Isometric view.

4 Move the pointer and check the other views to see if the block is at an angle.

You are drawing it parallel to the Isometric view, which does not align with the orthogonal views.

5 Press <T> to set AccuDraw’s drawing plane to a Top orientation.

Note that the AccuDraw compass rotates to a Top view orientation in the active, Isometric, view.

The block now is aligned correctly in the orthogonal views.

6 In the Isometric view, move the pointer to the right, index to the x-axis and type 3.

7 Move the pointer to the left and type 2, followed by a data point.

The block is placed in the horizontal, Top, plane.

8 Fit each view.

You can place elements in the Front and Side alignments using AccuDraw’s <F> and <S> shortcuts.

Exercise: Using AccuDraw’s Front and Side rotations

1 Continuing in AccuDraw_3D.dgn, in model AccuDraw_02, select Place Block.

2 In the Isometric view, snap to the right-most vertex of the existing block and enter a data point.

3 Press <S> to change AccuDraw’s drawing plane to the side orientation,


Orthogonal Drawing Plane Rotation

This is the same as the Left and Right orthogonal views.

4 Without entering a data point, snap to the vertex above and to the left of the start point.

5 Press <O> to relocate AccuDraw’s origin to this point.

6 Move the pointer upward, index to the y-axis and type 1.

7 With the pointer still indexed to the y-axis, accept with a data point.

8 With the Place Block tool still active, snap to the upper right vertex of the block you just placed.

9 Press <F> to switch AccuDraw’s drawing plane to the front rotation.

10 Snap to the front left vertex of the horizontal base block and accept with a data point.


AccuDraw’s drawing plane lets you work in any view, while still maintaining the correct plane for the elements that you are drawing. You can still snap to elements that are not on the current drawing plane and AccuDraw responds accordingly.

When you work in 2D, AccuDraw’s drawing plane axes change depending on the active tool and the location of the previous two data points. Similarly, as you draw in 3D, you may



observe the drawing plane axes change as you enter data points. The alignment of the drawing plane depends on the tool you are using and the location of the previous data points.

In 3D models the three previous data points are considered to be the minimum requirement to describe a planar surface. Where less than three data points have been entered, the view orientation is also considered.

As you complete the following exercise, use the other open views to check the orientation of the element that you are drawing.

Exercise: Automatic drawing plane rotation in AccuDraw


This model has been saved with Top, Isometric, Front and Right views open.

2 Select Place SmartLine with the following tool settings:

Segment Type: Lines

Vertex Type: Sharp

Join Elements: Enabled

3 In the tool settings, click the arrow at bottom right to open the SmartLine Placement Settings and ensure that Rotate AccuDraw to segments is enabled and click OK.

4 Snap to the center of the circle at location 1 and accept with a data point.

Note that AccuDraw’s drawing plane currently aligns with the view.


AccuDraw uses the two data points, plus the view, to set the drawing plane orientation. This results in a drawing plane that is not aligned with any of the standard Top, Front or Side drawing planes.


AccuDraw’s drawing plane now aligns itself with the plane of the three data points. In this case, the points are aligned with the Top drawing plane.

7 Continue snapping to the centers of the circles at locations 4 and 5, noting that, for each point, the drawing plane aligns with the three previously placed data points as follows.

Point 4: Side (from points 2, 3 and 4)

Point 5: Front (points 3, 4, 5)



8 Reset to complete.

As the SmartLine is drawn, AccuDraw’s drawing plane changes orientation

Other tools that rely on the view orientation also can be used with AccuDraw. For example, Mirror, Rotate and Array all use the view orientation to define the direction of the mirror or the axis of rotation.

Exercise: Using AccuDraw to mirror copy


This model has been saved with a large Isometric view in which to work and smaller Top, Front, and Right views to use to check your work.

2 Select Mirror, with the following settings:

Mirror About: Vertical

Make Copy: Enabled

All other settings Disabled

3 Identify the end chair at location 1.

The AccuDraw compass indicates that it is in View mode. When you move the pointer, the chair is mirrored about a vertical line in the Isometric view.

4 Press <T> to set AccuDraw to Top view rotation.

The chair is mirrored about a vertical line in Top orientation. You can see this clearly in the orthogonal views.



5 Snap to the table base at location 2 and accept with a data point.

6 Reset to complete the operation.

7 Change the Mirror About setting to Vertical.

8 Identify the side chair at location 3.

9 Snap to the center of the table edge at location 4 and accept with a data point.


You can use AccuDraw to define the axis of rotation when rotating elements.

Exercise: Use AccuDraw to rotate elements


2 Select Rotate, with the following settings:

Method: Active Angle - 90°

Copies: Enabled and set to 3

All other options: Disabled

3 In the Isometric view, identify the chair at location 1.


Tentative Snaps and AccuDraw

4 Snap to the center of the table base at location 2 and accept with a data point.

5 Reset to complete the operation.


In 2D, all elements are on the same plane. In 3D, the elements often are on different planes. Sometimes when working in 3D you will locate elements relative to others already present in the model. Do this by snapping.

Exercise: Draw the paved area for the building complex

1 Continuing in AccuDraw_3D.dgn, open model AccuDraw_06 in.

2 Select Place SmartLine with the following tool settings:

Segment Type: Lines

Vertex Type: Rounded

Rounding Radius: 1.5


3 Press <T> to switch to the Top plane.

4 Move the pointer down to the left and, with it indexed to the x-axis, press Return to constrain the point to this axis. Do not enter a data point.

5 Snap to the vertex at location 2 and accept with a data point.



As you snap to the vertex, a dashed line displays back to the point you are placing, perpendicular to the x-axis. This is what you would expect in 2D.

6 With the pointer still at location 2, press Return to constrain the next point to the y-axis.

7 Snap to the vertex at location 3.

As you snap to the vertex, a dashed line displays from the snap point, vertically, down to the plane of the element that you are drawing and then across to the point that you are placing.

8 Accept with a data point.

9 Position the pointer and press Return to constrain the next point to the y-axis.


11 Constrain the next point to the y-axis.



Module Review



Module Review


Questions

1 Which view orientation best displays a model?

2 How can you rotate the AccuDraw compass to an orthogonal plane?

3 True or False: When you place the same elements in a 3D model, by default, they are placed in the same plane as the view.

4 True or False: By default, data points fall at a view's active depth.

5 What is the minimum requirement to describe a planar surface?

Answers

1 The Isometric view.

2 Using one of the shortcuts V (view), T (top), F (front), or S (side).

3 False. When you place the same elements in a 3D model, by default, they are placed in the AccuDraw drawing plane.

4 True. Each view has an active depth, where data points fall if you do not snap to an element.

5 The three previous data points.


Data Management

Module Overview

This module presents utilities, tools and techniques that will help manage file content so that designs are accurate and file size is kept to a minimum. You will also learn ways to ensure standards compliance.


• Knowledge about DGN libraries

• Knowledge about fences

• Knowledge about dimensions

Module Objectives


• Check file contents against standards

• Check dimensions for problems

• Locate and process design data that requires cleanup

• Graphically compare master and reference files

• Use file compression options

• Merge and extract file contents

Nov-08 159 Data Management





Questions

1 What is a DGN library?

2 What is an associated dimension?

3 What are the fence types and processing methods?

4 Do you know how to control the display of elements in a view?

Answers

1 It is a file in which you store commonly used definitions such as those for levels, cells, text, etc. MicroStation reads these files and retrieves definitions from them.

2 It is a dimension that was placed with the association lock enabled. When the element to which it is associated changes, it changes.

3 You can place fence shapes, or create them from a view or DGN file. Fenced elements are processed as follows; Inside is only elements completely inside, Overlap is only elements inside or overlapping, Clip is elements completely inside and parts of elements inside and overlapping, Void is only elements completely outside.

4 Control element display by toggling level display or using options in the View Attributes dialog. You can also use clipping.

Data Management 160 Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Standards Checker

Standards Checker

The Standards Checker lets you compare information in your DGN file against standards that you have established. This utility lets you select the type of information to check, as well as the standard values for that information. It examines the active file and compares the contents to the standards you defined. To use it you must first define a set of standards checks in a DGN library.

You can store the settings in the same DGN library in which you store other project-wide information, or you can use a separate DGN library.

Configuring settings

Multiple Standards Checker settings can be stored in one DGN library. This means you can establish more lenient standards to use earlier in a project and stricter standards to use near project completion. You might also store sets of special checks.

Exercise: Configuring settings


Project: General

2 Move up one level to the \dgnlib folder, change Files of type to All Files, and open general.dgnlib.

This is the DGN library in which Standards Checker settings are configured for the delivered projects.

3 Select Utilities > Standards Checker > Configure.

The Standards Checker Settings dialog is where you define the checks that will be saved. First create, or select the name of, the desired collection of settings from the Settings Name options. Currently the CheckLevels settings are active. You can see that this collection only checks levels, because only level checks are enabled.

You can create a collection that checks for any or all check types by enabling the check boxes and selecting the desired settings.

4 Click the Settings button next to Check Levels.

For each check type you must select where the standards will be stored and the properties that you want checked.

Nov-08 161 Data ManagementCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Standards Checker

The check boxes that are enabled are the level attributes that will be checked when the check is run. If you wanted to check for locked levels, enable the Lock State check box and click OK.

5 Select Configured DgnLibs from the Standard Levels Source option list.

When level checks are performed, the standards the levels in the active file will be checked against are stored in DGN libraries that are identified in MS_DGNLIBLIST.

If you select the Selected DgnLibs option, you can browse to add or remove DGN libraries from the list. If you select the active file, you can create a standards file that includes both the actual standards (levels, text styles, dimension styles, etc.) and the settings for checking those standards.

6 Click OK.

7 Click the Settings button next to Check Element Templates.

When defining the checks for templates, you can enable Check Local Templates to check the active file’s local templates against the templates defined in DGN libraries. Check Elements checks all elements in the active file against the local templates with which they are associated.

8 Click Cancel twice to exit the dialogs.


Performing checks

When you check a file you can select a named collection of settings to check against or you can enable the check boxes for the type of checks you want to perform. When you select a named collection, only the check boxes for checks defined in it are enabled.

Checking for only the settings in CheckLineStyles and checking for Text, Dimension and Line styles

Exercise: Execute a check


Project: Building


Standards Checker


3 Select File > Save As and save it as BSI300AE101-PlanCHECK.dgn.

4 Select Utilities > Standards Checker > Check.

5 Select the Settings Name CheckElementsWithTemplates.

This collection of settings checks for differences between elements and the local template.

6 Enable the following in the Options section and click OK.

Interactive

Show Ignored Problems

7 Note the problem description in the upper section and the explanation of the difference in the lower section of the dialog.

8 Click Skip.

The following problem shows that an element placed associated to the room label template is not on the correct level and is not the correct weight.

9 Click Cancel.

Exercise: Check and fix

1 Continuing in BSI300AE101-PlanCHECK.dgn, select Utilities > Standards Checker > Check.

2 Enable only the Check Text Styles and Check Dimension Styles check boxes and click OK.

3 Skip the first problem, then click Fix three times to repair the next three problems.

4 Skip the next two problems.

5 Click OK in the completed dialog.

6 Select Utilities > Standards Checker > Check.

7 Enable only the Check Text Styles and Check Dimension Styles check boxes and click OK.

8 Click Skip.

Only the skipped problems remain.

9 Click Cancel.


Dimension Audit


Dimension Audit

Use this utility to search all the dimensions in the active model and report any problems.

Using the options

You can search using a single option or a combination of options. Find Non-Associative Dimensions finds dimensions that were placed with the association lock off or were not snapped to an element correctly.

Exercise: Find Non-Associative Dimensions

1 Open BSI300AE501-Details.dgn.

2 Select Utilities > Dimension Audit.

3 Enable only the Find Non-Associative Dimensions icon.

4 Click Dimension Audit Find.

Problems are reported.

5 Click the Show Report (downward) arrow at the lower right of the tool settings to see a detailed report.

6 Click Next Item.

Each problem dimension is highlighted with a dashed ellipse. You can now use the Reassociate Dimensions tool to fix the problem. If the problem is corrected, the ellipse becomes solid.

Other search options are available.

• Find Lost Associations finds dimensions that have failed associations. The dimension displays as a heavy dashed line.

• Find Overridden Text finds dimensions whose text has been edited. To reinstate the original dimension value you select the Edit Text tool, select the dimension text element and then type * in the text editor.

• Find Dropped Dimension finds dimensions that have been dropped to their component elements.

Exercise: Find and fix overridden text

1 Continuing in BSI300AE501-Details.dgn, select Utilities > Dimension Audit.

2 Enable only the Find Overridden Text icon.


Data Cleanup

3 Click Dimension Audit Find.

Problems are reported.

4 Click Next Item.

5 Select Edit Text from the Tasks dialog.

6 Enter a data point on the text string.

7 In the text editor, replace it with *.

This is dimension text that has been edited and lost its dynamic dimension value.

8 Enter a data point in the file.

The dynamic value is restored.


Data Cleanup

The Design File Cleanup dialog lets you identify duplicated elements, overlapping elements, and gaps between elements in the active file.

You can use each tab as an independent search or you can combine all the tabs into a single search that locates gaps, duplicates, and overlaps simultaneously. On the Overlaps and Gaps tabs you can set different symbology for flags. The flags are construction elements, so you can turn their display off in the View Attributes dialog.

General settings

The General tab is the main tab of this dialog and ties the other tabs together. Use it to define which of the settings entered on the other three tabs will be used. For example, if you only want to correct gaps in a design, set the Cleanup Action for Duplicates and Overlaps both to -none-.

• Only elements and levels in the view selected in the Process View options are processed.

• When Create Backup is enabled, MicroStation creates a backup file in the folder specified by MS_BACKUP.

• A data cleanup flag is a cell placed in the design to show where duplicates and overlaps occur. You can define different attributes for duplicates and overlaps. If Save Flags in File is enabled, MicroStation writes the flags to the file. You can manipulate them just as you


Data Cleanup

can any other MicroStation element, but you can only delete these manually. You can clear flags that have not been written to the file by using Update View to refresh the screen.

Note: You can assign flags to a unique level or set other attribute and then select them using the Element Selection tool’s attribute tabs.

• Use the Flag Size parameter to set the size of the flag.

• Cleanup Actions determine what is done when problems occur. You can opt to select a duplicate, overlap or gap. You can opt to flag, or interactively show overlaps or gaps. The # Found list displays the number of problems. The status bar shows information as

Cleanup Finished [D=0 O=5 G=2]

The number of Duplicate elements is 0, the number of Overlapping elements is 5 and the number of Gaps is 2.

Finding overlaps

The Overlaps tab lets you identify any elements that overlap by a definable amount, helping you find problems where elements overlap slightly. Use the Overlaps tab along with the Gaps tab to identify elements that have small intersections and gaps in them.

• The Match option sets the element attributes to use in searching for overlapping elements. If you do not check any of the attributes in the list, all overlapping elements in the specified view are found. If you only enabled Color and Style, only elements with the same color and line style are found.

Finding gaps

This tab lets you identify gaps between the endpoints of elements. You cannot automatically fix these gaps, but you can use the tool in Interactive mode, selected from the Action menu, and edit the gaps as you identify them one by one.

• Gaps Smaller Than and Gaps and Larger Than lets you define a tolerance for gaps. Any elements that form a gap larger or smaller than the defined range will be ignored.

• Ignore Coincident Ends ignores endpoints which are shared across elements. For example, an element which appears as a single line string but is actually a series of line segments includes many coincident endpoints.

Exercise: Clean up duplicates


Project: Geospatial


Data Cleanup

2 Open \Designs\BSI200-R03-Public Works.dgn.

3 Select Utilities > Data Cleanup.

4 Set the following on the General tab:

Create Backup: Enabled

Cleanup Actions: Duplicates: DeleteOverlaps: noneGaps: none

On the Duplicates tab, disable all match criteria.

5 Return to the General tab so you can see the # Found and click Apply.

Eight duplicates are deleted.

Exercise: Identify gaps

1 Continuing in BSI200-R03-Public Works.dgn, set the following on the General tab:

Cleanup Actions: Duplicates: noneOverlaps: noneGaps: Interactive

2 On the Gaps tab, disable all Match criteria.

3 Set Gaps Smaller Than to 0.500 and Gaps Larger Than to 0.050.

4 Click Apply.

The view zooms to the first gap that fits the parameters.

5 This gap is not a problem, so click Next Item in the Interactive Cleanup dialog.

6 Click Next Item until you arrive at gap 8.

This gap is larger and a Modify tool can be used to extend the local line. You can continue clicking the Item arrows to step through all gaps.


Compare Design Files Graphically

7 Click Finish to end the interactive process.


Compare Design Files Graphically

You can distinguish elements in the active file from those in references using options in the References dialog to change reference element color or transparency.

• In the References dialog, select the desired file or files and then select Settings > Adjust Colors. Adjust the Value, Saturation, and Hue to make the file appear in color or grayscale. Enable Print Adjusted Colors and you can print the display you see on the screen.

• In the References dialog, select the desired file or files and then select Settings > Hilite > Hilite to highlight the elements contained in that file. Selecting Boundaries highlights only the file’s boundary.

Merging Files

The Merge utility is used to copy elements from the default model in one DGN file to another.

From MicroStation

You can merge multiple source files into a single destination file by running Merge from the standard File Open dialog, from within MicroStation, or from a system command prompt.

Exercise: Set up the view


Project: Plant


3 Maximize View 3, select Rotate View from the view Control toolbox, and click Right-Isometric.

Note the elements in the view.

4 Select File > Save As and save the file with the name BSI700-A0101-YardLayout.dgn.




Merging Files

Exercise: Merge files

1 From the File Open dialog, press Shift + Esc.

2 Select File > Merge.

3 In the Files to Merge section of the dialog, click Select.

4 Select \Designs\BSI700-S0501-UnloadingPlatform.dgn and click Done.

5 In the Merge Into section of the dialog, click Select.

6 Select \Designs\BSI700-A0101-YardLayout.dgn and click Open.

7 Click Merge.

8 Open BSI700-A0101-YardLayout.dgn and Fit View.

The elements from BSI700-A0101-PumpHouse.dgn are now included in YardLayout.dgn.

To execute the same type of merge from within MicroStation, type MDL LOAD MERGE in the Key-in browser. Then type MERGE <sourcefilename>. All elements from the <sourcefilename> file will be merged into the active file.

From a command prompt

To merge files using the system command prompt, first open it by selecting (Windows) Start > Run, then type CMD in the Run dialog and click OK. Type the following in the command window:

msbatch merge <destination_filename> <sourcefilename_1> [… <sourcefilename_n>]


File Fence

Merging references

You can merge files that are attached as references. When you do so, only the levels in the reference that are displayed in the view in which you enter a data point are merged into the active file.

To add design components from an existing design to the active file, do the following. First attach the existing design as a reference and turn on display of the levels containing the elements you want to merge. In the References dialog, select Tools > Merge into Master and enter a data point in the view containing the elements you want to merge.

If you attach a saved view as a reference and merge, only the viewable area in the saved view will be merged into the active file.

Refmerge

To merge the active file and all attached references, type MDL LOAD REFMERGE in the Key-in browser. The last view in which a data point was entered is the view that is processed, and only the levels displayed in that view are copied to the output file. The output file will be named after the active file, but the extension is .rcd, indicating that it is a record design.

Merging references during Save As

You can merge reference files when executing a File > Save As operation. Find the options on the Save Options References tab.

For each of the types of reference file attachments, the following options are available:

• Save: Save the attachment to the output file.

• Merge: Merge the attachment geometry to the output file as individual elements.

• Merge To Cell: Merge the attachment geometry to a single cell in the output file.

• Omit: Omit the attachment from the output file.

File Fence

You can copy or move the contents of a design into a new file using a fence. Only elements that are displayed in the file are affected by these operations.

Copy/Move Fence Contents to New File

Used this tool to copy or move the contents of the active fence to a new DGN or DWG file.


File Fence

Exercise: Create a new file containing the layout

1 Continuing in BSI700-A0101-YardLayout.dgn, select Place Fence with the following tool setting:

Fence Type: From File, Active

Fence Mode: Inside

2 Enter a data point to place the fence.

3 Select Copy/Move Fence Contents to File from the Main toolbox, with the following tool settings:

Processing Mode: Copy

Fence Mode: Inside

Switch to generated file: Enabled

4 Enter a data point to process.

Because Switch to generated file was enabled, the new file opens.

• To select a destination folder, and alternative file name if desired, click the Define Output file icon. If an existing file is selected its current contents will be deleted. An alert will warn you of this before you accept the operation.

• If you use the Move Processing Mode, fence contents will be deleted from the active model and moved to the new file.

Using a key-in

Use the FILE FENCE command to create a new design file from the fenced elements in an existing file.

Warning: File fence overwrites the contents of the destination file. If an alert appears indicating that the file you specify already exists, be sure you want to overwrite its contents before continuing.

Exercise: Create a new file using a key-in

1 Continuing in YardLayout_PumpHouse.dgn, Fit View.

2 Select Place Fence with the following tool setting:

Fence Type: From File, Active

Fence Mode: Inside

3 Enter a data point to place the fence.

4 In the Key-in browser, type the following, adjusting the path to the desired location on your system:


File Compression

ff=c:\temp\fence.dgn

5 Press Enter.

6 Enter a data point inside the fence to accept.

7 Navigate to, and open, the new file.


When using file fence, all Place Fence tool settings such as Inside, Clip or Void are respected.

File Compression

You can purge empty and unused data resources, as well as deleted elements from the open file using the Compress Options dialog.

Select File > Compress > Options and then select from these types of resources for deletion:

• Empty cell headers

• Empty text elements

• Text elements that contain only space characters

• Unused shared cells, line, dimension, multi-line and text styles, levels or fonts

Once you have made the selections by enabling the check boxes, click Apply. These options are saved in the user preference file and will be applied every time you select File > Compress > Design.


Module Review

Module Review


Questions

1 True or False: When checking for standards you can only check for one type of problem at a time.

2 True or False: When checking dimensions for problems you can only check for one type of problem at a time.

3 When using data cleanup, what is the best way to locate and fix gaps?

4 How can you compare master and reference file elements?

5 True or False: When you merge files, all elements in the file are merged.

6 Can you copy or move file contents to a DWG file?

7 True or False: Once you set compression options they are remembered and you do not have to set them again.

Answers

1 False. You can create a collection that checks for any or all check types by enabling the check boxes and selecting the desired settings. Also, When you check a file you can enable the check boxes for the types of checks you want to perform.

2 False. You can search using a single option or a combination of options.

3 Use the tool in Interactive mode, selected from the Action menu, and edit the gaps as you identify them one by one.

4 Use the controls in the Adjust Reference Colors dialog to change reference element color or transparency.

5 False. Only elements in the default model a processed.

6 Yes, using Copy/Move Fence Contents to New File.

7 True. When you set them inside MicroStation they are saved in the user preference file and will be applied every time you compress.


Module Review


Linking Project Data

Module Overview

This module presents tools and utilities that allow you to share resources.


• Knowledge about DGN libraries

• Some knowledge about HTML files

Module Objectives


• Generate HTML pages containing images and links

• Link elements to web pages and DGN files

• Use HTML statements to control MicroStation

• Use Project Explorer and Link Sets to manage collaborative project data



Questions

1 What is an HTML file?

2 What is a DGN library?

Nov-08 175 Linking Project Data


HTML Author

Answers

1 HTML stands for Hyper Text Markup Language. It is a text file containing markup tags that tell a Web browser how to display a page.

2 A DGN library is the method for centrally storing many commonly used definitions such as those for levels, cells, text, dimension and multi-line styles, standards checker settings and custom user interface components. A DGN library acts as a definition lookup service. MicroStation reads these files and retrieves definitions from them.

HTML Author

This utility creates HTML files that can be viewed using any Web browser. HTML files can be created from a cell library, saved view, MicroStation BASIC macro, or a design file snapshot. Thumbnail images are generated when creating HTML files from a cell library, design file saved view, or design file snapshot. The printing system is used to create thumbnail images, so you must have access to the necessary drivers and configuration files to create them.

Creating an HTML file from a cell library

First you enable the Cell Library radio button, and then select a cell library. You can select any, or all, cells in the library to be included in the HTML page in the HTML Cell Page dialog.

The Table section has options to format the table in which the selected cells will appear. View attributes are set at the bottom of the dialog and are similar to the View Attributes dialog.

Exercise: Create an HTML cell page


Project: Plant

2 Open \cells\PipeFittings.cel.

3 Select Utilities > HTML Author.

4 With the Cell Library radio button enabled, click OK.

5 Select PipeFittings.cel and click Open.

A working file opens.

6 Select the elbow detail cells in the HTML Cell Page dialog.

7 Set the following in the Table section:

Columns: 2

Linking Project Data 176 Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

HTML Author

Max Rows: 2

Other options: defaults

8 In the View Attributes section, un-check the Line Weights check box and click OK.

Create HTML File dialog

This is where you set the location, title, and relative URL paths for the HTML file you are creating.

The Library Directory field specifies the library’s location on the server.

The Image Directory field specifies the location in which saved images are stored. The location of the HTML file you are creating, as well as the library and image directories, is the folder in which the cell library resides. If you are processing a design file, the resulting files reside in the same folder as the original file.

URL options specify whether the URLs being used are absolute or relative. Relative URLs are recommended. Absolute URLs are subject to change.

Exercise: Create the HTML file

1 Continuing in the working file, set the following in the Create HTML File dialog:

File Name: Entered by default. You can change the name or location

Title: Pipe fittings

Heading: Elbow Details

The heading will be placed on the HTML page.

2 Click OK.

Nov-08 177 Linking Project DataCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

HTML Author

Processing commences and, if Display File In Browser is enabled, the page opens in your browser.

3 Close the browser.

In an Internet environment, the cell library will be automatically downloaded to a temporary folder prior to the activation of a cell.

Design file saved views

Select this option in the HTML Author dialog to create an HTML file from a saved view in a DGN file. The options in the Design File Walkthrough dialog are similar to those in the HTML Cell Page dialog. The View In the Attributes section you select whether to use the attributes that are saved in the saved view or to override them with these options.

Basic macros

Select this option in the HTML Author dialog to create an HTML file that references a folder of MicroStation BASIC macros. You can select an existing folder or create a new one. Then you select the specific macros you want to include. If Use Description is enabled the page will include it. If not, only the macro name is included.


Engineering Links

The MicroStation \System macros by name or by description

Click the link in the page to open the source code.

Design file snapshot

Select this option in the HTML Author dialog to create an HTML file with a read-only image of the selected DGN file. Several files are created during this process.

First, a JPEG image is created for each view on the screen that you select. The name is the first 6 characters of the DGN file name, followed by the view number. The image is generated at the same size as the view on the screen.

Next, each image and a link to the DGN file are included on the HTML page, which is named after the image file.

The final output is an HTML file, named after the DGN file, with the selected view HTML files in separate frames. The position and size of the frames approximate the position and size of the views on the screen when the snapshot was taken.

Exercise: Create a DGN file snapshot

1 Open \dgn\Sheets\BSI700-P1001-001-PipeDetail.dgn.

2 Select Utilities > HTML Author.

3 Enable the Design File Snapshot radio button and click OK.

4 Select BSI700-P1001-001-PipeDetail.dgn and click Open.

5 Set the following in the Create HTML File dialog:

Title: Unloading platform piping

6 Click OK.

7 Close the browser.

You can select either Screen 1 (left) or Screen 2 (right) to snap. The Arrange Views check box lets the Window > Arrange command arrange the views on the screen before the images and HTML files are generated. The page will include all open views.

Engineering Links

Engineering Links is a series of tools for linking to and managing remote data. You can attach a web address to an element and then follow it. This means you can attach the link http://www.roadbuilders.com to roadway segments in a plan and then follow the link on a segment back to roadbuilders.com.


Engineering Links

Exercise: Attach an engineering link

1 Open \Designs\BSI700-P1001-Piping.dgn.

2 Note that the E-Links toolbox is open.

It opened when MicroStation generated the first web page and connected to the browser.

3 Open the 3 Inch Boom Arm model.

4 Select Attach Engineering Link.

5 Set the URL to locate the cell library HTML page you created.

Syntax is:file:///C:/Documents%20and%20Settings/All%20Users/Application%20Data/bentley/MicroStation/WorkSpace/Projects/Examples/Plant/dgn/Sheets/bsi700-p1001-001-pipedetail.htm

6 Click on the piping.


Link types

These options set the type of link you are creating. An HTML link links to an existing HTML file that exists anywhere. You can point to a local file or to a web address.

If you are creating a simple XML link, you can specify a role that the object of the link will specify, for example, a reference or cell library. The Show options determines whether an existing page should be replaced or if a new browser should be opened when following the link.

Exercise: Follow the link

1 Continuing in BSI700-P1001-Piping.dgn, select Follow Engineering Link.

2 Enter a data point on the detail element to which you attached the HTML link.

The HTML page opens in your browser.

3 Enter a data point on the detail title.

You are redirected to the linked file.


Identifying linked elements

To highlight all the linked elements in a DGN file, use the Show Engineering Links tool. The line style and color of linked elements change.


Engineering Links

To use another color, type SHOW WEBTAGS COLOR <color number> in the Key-in browser. For example, if you want the color of these elements to be yellow, type SHOW WEBTAGS COLOR 4.

HTML statements to control MicroStation

Another component of Engineering Links is the ability to send MicroStation commands from an HTML document directly to a design session. This is achieved through the use of the HREF tag and the ustnkeyin and ustnform protocols.

Ustnkeyin

When you launch a browser using MicroStation, the browser communicates with MicroStation using a protocol called ustnkeyin. You can use this in a hyperlink the same way that you use http, except that instead of specifying a web page like http://www.Bentley.com, you specify a command. For example, ustnkeyin://place+line linked to text in a web page would instruct MicroStation to start the place line command each time the link is clicked.

You can use commands this way to start macros, place cells, or open and close views. Any command associated with a function key can also be used.

Single action links are accomplished using the following format:

<A HREF=”ustnkeyin://keyin+command+here”>

where keyin+command+here is the string of text you would normally type in the Key-in browser. Note the use of the plus sign as a substitute for spaces. This is a requirement of HTML documents. Spaces are not allowed in HTML statements except as option delimiters.

The ustnkeyin portion of the preceding HTML statement is referred to as the protocol. Other familiar protocols you will see in HTML documents and web browsers are http: for Hyper Text Transfer Protocol and ftp: for File Transfer Protocol, both of which are universal Internet standards. Ustnkeyin is a protocol unique to MicroStation.

Usage tips

Extend this concept by adding links to a web page for important design components. You could provide an index with links to spreadsheets, catalog web pages, specification documents, memos and decisions related to that component. Just make a list with brief descriptions of each link.

You can create a new document in Word as a web page, and then start typing in the information to which you want to create links. Select a phrase to link, right click and select Hyperlink. Enter the address of the link. Explicit file locations, like s:\projects\projectfile.dgn


Engineering Links

are good for referencing detail sheets. Clicking on these types of links opens the file automatically.

Ustnform

This specialized keyin allows web page developers to extend the functionality of the FORM HTML tag to drive MicroStation from a web page.

Following is an example of a form used to provide options to a user. Here, the user can select a view from the option list presented.

The <Form...> statement must be entered exactly as shown:

<FORM method="post" action="ustnform://default"><INPUT type=[type of form input] name="ustnkeyin://[valid MicroStation key-in]" value="[option to the key-in]">...</FORM>

The form data, which consists of a list of NAME/VALUE pairs, is then parsed to extract the key-ins, macros, and parameters that were encoded.

To fit view

<P><FORM method="post" action="ustnform://default"></P><H4><IMG SRC="FitView.gif" HEIGHT=42 WIDTH=42>Fit View: </H4><P><SELECT name="ustnkeyin://fit+view+extended+"><OPTION value="1">View 1</OPTION><OPTION value="2">View 2</OPTION><OPTION value="3">View 3</OPTION><OPTION value="4">View 4</OPTION><OPTION value="5">View 5</OPTION><OPTION value="6">View 6</OPTION><OPTION value="7">View 7</OPTION><OPTION value="8">View 8</OPTION></SELECT>


Project Explorer

<INPUT type="Submit" value="Submit View Command"></FORM></P>

The text highlighted in bold are protocol and command statements used to control MicroStation’s operation.

To place a circle

<P><FORM method="post" action="ustnform://default"></P><H4><IMG SRC="plccir.gif" HEIGHT=33 WIDTH=32>Place Circle:</H4><DD><INPUT type="radio" name="ustnkeyin://place+circle" value="diameter" CHECKED>by diameter<BR><INPUT type="radio" name="ustnkeyin://place+circle" value="edge" >by edge<BR><INPUT type="radio" name="ustnkeyin://place+circle" value="center" >by center<BR><INPUT type="Submit" value="Submit"></DD></FORM>

The text highlighted in bold are protocol and command statements used to control MicroStation’s operation. Note the similarities in the structure of the data contained within the form. Only the type of input is different to reflect the use of radio buttons instead of a menu list.

Project Explorer

While Engineering Links is an older Internet technology that is still supported, it is recommended that you use Project Explorer to manage collaborative project data.

Project Explorer supports links to office documents, PDFs, URLs, e-mail addresses and MicroStation key-ins, as well as design and sheet models, references and named views that have been saved. Project Explorer is a digital table of contents for project data, allowing you to browse easily.


Project Explorer

Document links

You can link to DOC, PDF, XLS and other file formats. Links can be created to individual Excel worksheets, PDF bookmarks and to individual Heading styles in Word documents.

Linking project files to elements

When you right click on a link in Project Explorer, you have the option to link it to an element. The link can then be used to redirect to additional data.

To create the element link, first create the data link in Project Explorer. Then, right click on it, select Add Link to Element from the pop-up menu and enter a data point on the element you want to link.

Exercise: Add a link to an element


Project: Civil

2 Open \Drawings\BSI400-Details.dgn.

3 Select File > Project Explorer.

4 In the Project Explorer dialog, expand the Details folder, scroll down to W Beam Rail Element and right click on it.

5 Select Add Link to Element.

6 Click on the text below the detail.

7 Reset.

Now when you move the pointer over the text, a link icon appears.

8 Right click, continue to press the right mouse button, and select Follow Link > BSI400-Details.dgn.

The model that contains the detail opens.


Link properties

Select Properties from the right click menu to open the Specifications dialog so you can view the properties of the folder or link.

The Full Path is the location of the file that is the target of the selected link. If the file cannot be located, the link is broken and this is blank.


Project Explorer

Validating links

The right click menu for links and models also includes a Validate option. Select this to verify that the file or URL to which the link points still exists. If the data does not exist in that location, the link name and folder name turn red. Details are provided in the Message Center.

To validate a single link or all links within a folder, right click on the link or the folder and select Validate from the pop-up menu.

Note: Always check with an administrator to determine which files are most up to date or to determine the appropriate file location.


Module Review

Module Review


Questions

1 What are the four sources of data from which you can create web pages using HTML Author?

2 Why must you have access to the printing system when using HTML Author?

3 What is Engineering Links?

4 What HTML tag makes it possible to send MicroStation commands from an HTML document directly to a design session?

5 True or False: You have to be in the file in which a link set was created to access it.

Answers

1 HTML files can be created from a cell library, saved view, MicroStation BASIC macro, or a design file snapshot.

2 The printing system is used to create thumbnail images, so you must have access to the necessary drivers and printer driver configuration files to create them.

3 Engineering Links is a series of tools for linking to, and managing, remote data.

4 This is achieved through the use of the HREF tag. (Using the ustnkeyin and ustnform protocols.)

5 False. You do not have to be in the file in which a link set was created to access it. You can use the option menu to view link sets from library files, in the active file or in a selected file.


Composing Sheets

Module Overview

This module presents workflows and methods to methods you can use to organize project data and create dynamic plot sheets that contain multi-scaled details.



• Understanding of design and sheet models

• Understanding of saved views

• Understanding of References

• Basic knowledge about detailing symbols

• Knowledge of clip volumes

• Understanding of Project Explorer

• Knowledge about display styles

Module Objectives


• Organize project data

• Complete design composition

• Create dynamic saved views for use in sheets

• Complete sheet composition

• Create multi-scale detail sheets using different methods

Nov-08 187 Composing Sheets





Questions

1 What is a saved view?

2 What is a sheet model?

3 What is the purpose of Project Explorer?

4 How do you attach a reference?

5 When creating plot sheets, which do you need more often? Sheets containing different sized geometry or different sized sheets containing that geometry?

Answers

1 A named view definition saved in a DGN file for later recall or for attaching to another model file as a reference.

2 A type of model that serves as an electronic drawing sheet. It typically consists of design model references that are scaled and positioned to create a printable drawing.

3 It is used to manage project data within MicroStation. Project data is stored in link sets in a DGN file or in a DGN library. A link set contains hierarchical information about links or grouped information in project data.

4 Open the References dialog, select Attach Reference and set additional settings in the Attachment settings dialog. The Attachment method should be Interactive to set additional settings.

5 In the first case, the first method presented may be best. In the second case, using re-scalable sheet models may be best.

Composing Sheets 188 Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Drawing Composition Workflow Task

Drawing Composition Workflow Task

The Drawing Composition workflow task, which appears in the Tasks dialog, is made up of tasks organized in a logical order for working with drawing composition and dynamic views. Open the Drawing Composition workflow task by clicking its tab or selecting it from the Tasks dialog.

• Organize contains tools for opening Project Explorer and link sets.

• Design Composition contains tools for creating models and working with references.

• Create Views (2D) contains tools for working with clip volumes, levels, view attributes, and saved views.

• Create Views (3D) contains tools for working with levels, view attributes, saved views, placing fitted sections, and changing views.

• Sheet Composition contains tools for creating sheet models, defining sheet boundaries, and working with references.

• Annotate contains tools for base geometry, measuring, patterning, dimensioning, detailing symbols, text, and project navigation.

Dynamic Views

The term dynamic views refers to a method of composing drawings that is a new approach to managing projects. Dynamic views can help you to:

• Automate drawing creation

• Keep MicroStation files up to date by:

• Creating responsive drawings

• Connecting Saved Views to models

• Eliminate errors in design and documentation

• Communicate design intent through models and drawings

Nov-08 189 Composing SheetsCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Dynamic Views

• Manage changes across MicroStation files

Glossary

Dynamic Views:

Dynamic views is a general name that encompasses several related technologies which share the goal of making model analysis and documentation interactive and intuitive. One of these technologies allows clipping of models and section graphics generation on the fly. Section views, detail views, and elevation views are types of dynamic views.

Through the use of detailing symbols with smart fields and links, you can create live, intelligent sections of a design composition that update automatically as the design evolves.

Annotation:

Complimentary information such as dimensions, text, notes, patterns, hatching, and detailing symbols. Annotation excludes design graphics. The size of annotations can be controlled by annotation scale.

Design:

A collection of elements in a design model that are drawn at full scale (1:1). A design is not intended to be a finished drawing for publication. A design encapsulates part of a project for active editing, and uses references for backgrounds only.

3D Design Composition:

A collection of referenced designs at full scale (1:1). The references are assembled using different level states and view attributes. Design composition is used to create saved views that will be used in sheets. In the 2D workflow, there is typically no design composition.

Drawing:

A collection of elements or references in a 2D design or sheet model, at full scale (1:1), that is used to create multiple sheets. This step includes static or common text that does not change. Annotation scale should be used here. This is an intermediate step between design composition and sheet composition.

2D Drawing Composition:

A collection of referenced drawings at full scale (1:1), without a border that is used to generate saved views.


Dynamic Views

Drawing Annotation:

Annotation placed in a drawing, which will be shown in multiple sheets, potentially at different scales.

Sheet:

The final output of the design process that can be delivered electronically or on paper.

Sheet Composition:

The process of collecting saved view references and placing items in a sheet model that defines a finished document, which is ready for publication. This step is where references, including borders, are scaled to fit a sheet. Print output scale is always considered.

Sheet Annotation:

These are annotations that are specific to one sheet.

Drawing Title:

The annotation for a drawing or detail when placed in a sheet composition.

Dynamic views overview

When a team of users work on a project, they typically work on separate files to allow multiple people to work at the same time. Members of the team work on different aspects of the project, and references are used to communicate graphic content across the team. One way to view a project is as a network of DGN nodes with references as the connections between them.

The dynamic view workflow creates a split editing environment. It lets you have evolving geometry that is reflected in each step of the process. Using this method, you separate annotations from geometry, creating reusable geometry. There will be flexibility regarding how much dynamic view functionality you use in a project. It may not be appropriate for all projects, or for all phases of a project.


Dynamic Views

The first processes are spatial design. When you are in a design model with a black background, it is spatial design.

The following processes are completed in a sheet model, which is a flat representation.

2D workflow where the design is created and then referenced to sheets

3D Design models compiled into one model, Drawing created by Saved View References, Sheets created by Saved View References

General workflows

An overview of the 2D workflow is as follows.


Dynamic Views

An overview of the 3D workflow is as follows.

Dynamic view workflow

Critical to understanding dynamic views at first is use the delivered Drawing Composition workflow. This Task workflow is specifically designed to take you through the process from beginning to end. Tasks are arranged in the Tasks dialog from top to bottom.

There are several activities included in this workflow.

• Organize the project data. At this stage, you use Project Explorer, which is a catalog of your project resources or a hyperlinked Table of Contents.

Drawing is in every workflow. It is there to help you with any other drawing task with which you might be faced.

• Design Composition. At this stage, you create a collection of references at full scale (1:1) to use in several designs, design compositions, or sheet compositions.


Dynamic Views

• Create Views (2D). At this stage, you compose all the section or plan views in the project. These views should have linked callouts and place holder fields so that, when the views are added to a sheet, they are automatically updated as work commences.

• Sheet Composition. At this stage, you create sheets that represent finished geometric work ready for publication. Typically, this is where print scale is taken into consideration.

• Annotate. Add final annotations such as any informational geometry, hatching, dimensions, callouts, and text to the sheet to produce a finished product.


Dynamic Views

Drawing Composition.dgn, in the delivered examples General project, shows the effects of dynamic views in a single file. All models are in this file, and all references are models in this file.

Exercise: Exploring dynamic views


Project: General

2 Open Drawing Composition.dgn.

3 Click View 1’s title bar to make it the active view.

4 Make the Drawing Composition workflow active in the Tasks dialog.

5 Select Element Selection (1) and select the horizontal section line.

6 Move the handles in View 1 to change the position of the section line and note that they update in the other views.

7 Select and move handles on the vertical section line and observe the results.

Two of thehandles on section line

Limits of clipvolume


Dynamic Views

8 Select the bolt handles of the clip volume and move them to see updated graphics.

Note: Bolt handles show the area up to the clip volume, but not beyond. Arrow handles will show beyond the clip volume.

9 Spend time examining references, models, saved views, clip volumes, and Project Explorer in this file.

2D typical workflow

The advantages of dynamic views in 2D are:

• Multi scale detail sheets

• Multiple reference presentations per sheet

• Drag and drop from Project Explorer

• Detail scale of each reference in a sheet

• Automatic Drawing Title creation

• File information harvesting

Step 1: Organize 2D design files and models.


Dynamic Views

Step 2: Create a 2D Design Composition file and create various drawing layouts as 2D sheet models at 1: 1 scale, with no borders.

Step 3: Attach design files as references to Design Composition sheets.


Dynamic Views

Step 4: Create a Drawing Composition sheet model.

Step 5: Attach the Design Composition sheet to the Drawing Composition sheet as a reference.


Dynamic Views

Step 6: Attach/turn on levels for text labels and annotations to Drawing Composition sheet.

<Optional> In the Drawing Composition, create a clip volume and name it.

<Optional> Create a saved view of the named clip volume.


Dynamic Views

Step 7: Create specific level and attachment configurations, and then capture this configuration by creating a saved view of the configuration.

<Optional> Adjust the levels in each saved view.


Dynamic Views

Step 8: Create a new Sheet Composition model and reference in the border.

<optional> Add sheet specific annotations.

Step 9: Add raster references and other sheet specific information.

Step 10: The final setup appears as shown.


Dynamic Views

Using Project Explorer with dynamic views

When project data is organized using Project Explorer, it does not matter to users where files, models, or supporting documents are actually located. It is a catalog of resources such as:

• Designs

• Sheets

• Plans

• Elevations

• Sections

• Details

• Drawing Titles

Exercise: Using Project Explorer

1 Continuing in Drawing Composition.dgn, select File > Project Explorer.

2 In the Link Sets dialog, select Configured Libraries (MS_DGNLIBLIST).

3 In the Project Explorer dialog, select the Default link set.

4 Note the various folders.

Design models reside in the Designs folder, sheets in the Sheets folder, and so on. All the items needed for the final drawing composition are available.

Note: These folders contain all files in the General project, which are not related to the Drawing Composition.dgn file.

All the folders are harvested folders. These are created by creating a configuration variable link, which reflects the resources in any files identified by configuration variables.

5 Expand the node (plus sign) next to Sections.

The files are harvested and you will note that there are three sections listed.

6 Click on the title bar of View 3 to make it the active view.

7 In Project Explorer, right click on Section 3 and select Open.

View 3 now shows this section.

8 Use the View Previous view control (4 + Q) to return to the previous section.



Dynamic Views

Configuration variable links

One way to define the link set folders is to first set up a configuration variable to identify each discipline-specific part of the project directory structure. Any configuration variable that identifies files or directories can be used to define a configuration variable link.

If the configuration variable identifies a directory, then all files in the directory and its subdirectories are searched. The configuration variable can also identify a single file or a regular expression. Create configuration variables to identify subsets of files that you want to harvest.

Then create a Configuration Variable Link in the link set to reflect the resources in the files identified by each configuration variable. Each Configuration Variable Link identifies a configuration variable and specifies the type of resource to harvest from the files.

How to create a configuration variable link:

1. In the Project Explorer dialog, click the Create Link icon and select Configuration Variable Link.

2. In the Create Configuration Variable Link dialog, select a predefined variable from the Variable option list, or select Custom (User Defined).

For a predefined variable, the definition of the selected variable appears in the Variable Name text box, and the default variable name appears in the Name text box.

• The filter expression identifies the type of resources to find within those files: {Model:Sheet} finds sheet models or {Model:Design} finds design models.

• The configuration variable identifies the set of files to be searched; $(MS_DEF) or $(MS_RFDIR).

For a custom variable, key-in the variable name and definition.

MicroStation generates the contents of the folder by searching for specified resources within a set of files. When resources are added, removed, or renamed, these folders can be refreshed to reflect the changes. A folder can only show one type of resource. To track more than one resource, you need to create a separate folder for each type of resource.

Note: In the Link Sets dialog, Configured Libraries is a realistic source for a project. Point MS_DGNLIBLIST to a DGN library for each project.

The task of creating variables for harvested folders is best left to an administrator.


Dynamic Views

Common uses of harvested files for users

Creating sheets and publishing them

You want to add a sheet to a project that other users can find and access. By working within the project file directory structure, as defined by the administrator, you put the new resources where existing Configuration Variable Links can find them. When other users expand a Configuration Variable Link in a link set, they discover any resources in the files named by the configuration variable.

Accessing existing sections while doing sheet layout

You want to access resources such as existing sections while doing sheet layout in a project. Your workspace should already point to the correct top-level link set(s). To access sections, select the appropriate link set, navigate to the appropriate folder, and find a Configuration Variable Link called “Sections,” which was previously defined by the administrator. Expand this link to see all the sections in the files identified by the configuration variable. You can then drag the links out of the expanded list to the sheets for creating section views.

How to attach a section to a sheet:

1. Click the Saved Views icon in the Primary Tools toolbox to open the Saved Views dialog.

2. Click the Active File icon at the upper left and select Active Link Tree to switch to the link set option.

3. Click the arrow next to the link set icon and from the drop-down list select the Sections Filter under Active Link Tree.

The Saved Views dialog displays a list of all section views contained in the link's target file list.

4. Drag and drop a section into the sheet.

You can review a sheet from the Models dialog.

How to review a sheet:

1. Click the Models icon in the Primary Tools toolbox to open the Models dialog.

2. Click the Active File icon to switch to the link set option.

3. Click the arrow next to the link set icon and from the drop-down list select the sheet filter under Active Link Tree.

The Models dialog displays a list of all sheets contained in the link's target file list.

4. Double click the sheet name to view the sheet.


Dynamic Views

Displaying new sections and sheets

In order to avoid performance lags, a Configuration Variable link displays a cached view of resources. When the content of the files changes, you have three options: ignore the new resources, close and reopen MicroStation, or right click the Configuration Variable link and choose Refresh from the pop-up menu.

Defining a subset of sections or sheets

To see and access a subset of sections or sheets in a project, create a folder and copy the links into it.

Design composition

After the project link sets have been created, it is time to create a design composition model. The purpose of this composition is to bring together the desired content by referencing it into this model.

The drawing composition workflow contains a Design Composition task with tools for creating a new file, a new design model, and for referencing.

How to create a design composition model:

1. In your project design file, for example, house.dgn, create a new design composition model.

2. In Project Explorer, click the arrow on the Create Link icon and select the project link set to which the model link will be published using the LinkSet link option.

3. Drag and drop any newly created design models, for example, Floor, Walls, Roof into a Drawing Composition folder under the project in Project Explorer.

This creates a link from the design composition model to the Design Composition folder in the project link set.

4. In the project link set, select the desired models and drag them into the design composition model as references.

2D workflow exercises

The following exercises demonstrate how to use dynamic views in 2D. We will start with a new Design Composition file and reference in several other files, then use the design composition file to create saved views and clip volumes. We will then reference those saved views into sheets.


Dynamic Views

Exercise: Set up the file


Project: Geospatial

2 From the \Drawings folder, open BSI200-D04-City Drawing Composition.dgn.

3 Explore the saved views, references, and models in this file.

4 Open the References dialog and turn the display of the following references off:

Slot numbers 1, 3, 4, 8, 9, 11, and 13

5 Make the Drawing Composition task the active task in the Tasks dialog.

View composition

In this phase of the workflow, you create the section and plan views for the project in the design composition. The Drawing Composition workflow's Create Views task contains tools for this.

Create views, such as a cross section, from the design composition model. This is where you use levels and clip volumes to define the portion of the master model you want to examine. This may be a portion of the design that is too large for a sheet, but must be seen overall for context. For example, a several kilometer section of highway.

Control display of dynamic volumes and sections

The display of dynamic volumes and dynamic sections can be controlled using display styles. Display styles for these clippings can be applied by selecting a display style from the Clip Volume Settings area of the View Attributes dialog.

Display styles can be selected from delivered styles or you can create new display styles in the Display Styles dialog.


Dynamic Views

Clip volumes

You can create a clip volume to focus on certain parts of your model and hide the rest. When a clip volume is applied to a view, only elements that are located within the clip volume will display.

A clip volume encloses a space. The material outside the volume is called “outside”. A clip volume also contains a section plane passing through it. Section graphics are produced wherever the section plane intersects material inside the volume. Material inside the volume that is behind the section plane is “backward”, while material that is in front of the section plane is “forward”.

Create dynamic views with clip volumes

You can create a dynamic view by creating a clip volume and saving it in a saved view.

• First, create a fitted section clip volume in a design model.

• Then create a saved view using the new clip volume.

Turn on the display of the saved view's boundary in the Saved Views dialog and select it to change the view’s contents.

Creating a clip volume

To create a floor plan in a house model you can create a fitted section clip volume using the Place Fitted Section tool.

In the active view's View Control bar, click the Clip Volume icon's downward arrow and select the Place Fitted Section tool.

The clip volume produces section graphics along the cut plane. The term section graphics refers to the lines, arcs, and curves displayed in a view after you create a clip volume that cuts through a solid, surface, or mesh. Curves are defined by the intersection between the clip volume faces and the original elements.

The most common clip is called a section clip. A section clip is often associated to a section callout.

You can modify the depths and clipping parameters of the clip volume by selecting the clip volume. The green arrow edit handle lets you move the clip plane laterally and flip the clip


Dynamic Views

direction. The side edit handles allow you to move the side clip distances and turn off the clipping of one or more sides.

You can control the display of each category of geometry separately by assigning different display styles to each category in the Clip Volume Settings section of the View Attributes dialog. Each category has its own viewing symbology, can be turned on or off, and can be made locatable or not. Display styles are created and managed in the Display Styles dialog.

Creating a saved view

After creating a clip volume, the next step is to capture it in a saved view so that you can place the saved view on a sheet. Saved Views are created in the Saved Views dialog.

How to create a saved view from a clip volume:

1. In the Utilities > Saved Views Saved Views dialog click Create Saved View.

2. Then, set the method for capturing the saved view, either from the active view’s range (From View) or by specifying two points (From 2-Points) and select a saved view type. To capture the previously created clip volume, select From View from the Clip Volume options. Follow the status bar prompts.


Dynamic Views

3. Enable the Associative Clip Volume check box to associate multiple saved views to the same clip volume.

How to visually manipulate the extent of a saved view and its clip volume:

1. The first step is to display the saved view boundary by right clicking a column heading in the Saved Views dialog and enabling Show if this column is not visible.

2. Then, click in the row for the saved view to create a check mark.

The saved view is now displayed in the form of a block.

3. When you select it, you see its edit handles and the clip volume’s edit handles. You can use these edit handles to manipulate the volume.

Exercise: Creating clip volumes and saved views

1 Continuing in BSI200-D04-City Drawing Composition.dgn, click the Create Views (2D) task.

2 Open the Level Display dialog.

3 Highlight the Hydro reference, turn off the level crk_stream-text, and close the dialog.

4 Open the View Attributes dialog, and click the Clip Volume icon to turn it on.

5 Select the Clip Volume view control with the following tool settings:

Type: Apply Clip Volume by 2 Points


Dynamic Views

6 Enter two data points to surround the city boundary.

7 Expand the tool settings and click the Save icon, saving the clip volume as Streets clip.

8 Select Save View (R) with the following tool settings:

Method: From View

View Type: Saved View

Name: Overall Plan

Clip Volume: Streets clip

Associate Clip Volume: Enabled

9 Enter a data point in the view.

Sheet composition

In this phase of the workflow, you place detail, elevation, plan, and section views on sheets. Use the Sheet Composition tools from the Drawing Composition workflow for this.

You can attach a saved view as a reference on a sheet. The display settings and level masks of the saved view are used in the reference. If you move a detailing symbol associated with the saved view, it will change the saved view in the design model. Because the saved view was


Dynamic Views

placed on a sheet, it will also change on the sheet. The power of dynamic views is that you can change a detailing symbol and have the reference update automatically.

How to create a sheet composition:

1. In the project design file (house.dgn), create and open a sheet composition model using a seed file set up for sheet composition.

2. In Project Explorer, click the arrow on the Create Link icon and select the project link set folder to which the model link will be published.

3. Drag a border from the project in Project Explorer and drop it on the sheet.

4. Drag a saved view on to the sheet from Project Explorer, the Saved Views dialog, or from its corresponding callout (for example, the section callout in the case of a section view.)

5. Set the Detail Scale in the Reference Attachment Settings dialog and the Scale (Master:Ref) will automatically update.

6. To synchronize the display of the reference on the sheet with the saved view, enable the Synchronize with Saved View check box.

7. Do this for any number of saved views you want to add.

Hint: To ensure that annotations in the reference will be sized by applying the active sheet's annotation scale, enable Use Active Annotation Scale in the Toggles section. This option does not modify the annotations, it affects their display.

Hint: To create a drawing title describing the view on the sheet, enable the Create check box in the Drawing Title section and type a name. When a drawing title is selected, the drawing boundary is indicated by a dashed rectangle with corner tabs around the reference attachment. This drawing boundary can be resized.

In the following exercise you will reference the saved view created previously to a sheet. You will attach two reference copies of the same saved view. One copy will be synchronized with the saved view and the other will not. This lets you have different reference presentations for each reference.

Exercise: Create a sheet composition

1 Continuing in BSI200-D04-City Drawing Composition.dgn, click the Sheet Composition task, and select New (Q).

2 Create a new Sheet file in the ...\Sheets folder, using BSI200-G02-Map Border.dgn, and name it BSI200-M07-Streets.dgn.


Dynamic Views

3 Select New Sheet Model (W):

Type: Sheet from Seed

Seed Model: BSI200-G02-Map Border.dgn

Name: Sheet Composition

Annotation Scale: 1:1000

Update Fields Automatically: Enabled

Sheet Name: Streets

Sheet Number: 2

4 Fit View.

5 Open the Saved Views dialog and click the arrow next to the Active File button at the upper left. Select Active Link Tree.

This will look for saved views in the attached link sets.

6 Drag the Overall Plan saved view in to View 1 and drop it.

7 Set the following in the Reference Attachment Settings dialog:

Orientation: Saved Views > Overall Plan

Detail Scale: 1:2.5

Level: street index

Nested Attachments: Live Nesting Depth: 5

Synchronize with Saved View: Enabled

8 Place it at the top of the sheet.

9 Drag the Overall Plan saved view in to View 1 and drop it.


Orientation: Saved Views > Overall Plan

Detail Scale: 1:2.5

Level: street index


Synchronize with Saved View: Disabled


Dynamic Views

11 Place this reference in the bottom of the sheet.

Exercise: Test dynamics

1 Click Previous Model twice to return to BSI200-D04-City Drawing Composition.dgn.

2 Open the View Attributes dialog and turn off the Fill view attribute.

3 Open the Saved View dialog and set the mode back to Active File.

4 Highlight Overall Plan and click Update Saved View Settings.

5 Click OK in the Alert.


Dynamic Views

6 Open BSI200-M07-Streets.dgn and note the difference in the presentations.

The saved view that was attached with Synchronize with Saved View enabled no longer shows fill. You can also change the size of a saved view or change the scale of each attachment using the Detail Scale options.


Detailing symbols

The next part of the workflow involves adding detailing symbols to the sheet.

Create dynamic views from detailing symbols

You can create dynamic views when creating detailing symbols on sheets. These callouts allow you to create section views in your design composition that are linked to section callouts placed on sheets. Any modifications to the detailing symbol on the sheet are reflected in its corresponding saved view in the design model. Conversely, modifications to the saved view in the design model are also reflected in its associated detailing symbol on the sheet.

Control dynamic sections with detailing symbols

You can control a dynamic view using its edit handles. Select the view in the Saved Views dialog, turn on the Show column, and select the saved view box to see the clip volume edit handles. Any modifications made to the edit handles are reflected on all detailing symbols that are associated to that view.


Dynamic Views

Detailing symbol styles

Detailing symbol styles allow an administrator to define standards for detailing symbols via symbology settings and placeholder fields. The benefit to using styles is that when you change a setting in a style, the change is propagated to all detailing symbols using that style. You can create new detailing symbol styles in the Element > Detailing Symbol Styles Detailing Symbol Styles dialog. A default style is delivered in ustation.dgnlib.

In addition to symbology settings, you can also control the cells used as bubbles in the callouts. For example, you can set the Title cell and Main Terminator cell to be used in drawing titles. These cells contain placeholder fields that are evaluated when the appropriate link is added to the detailing symbol.

The list of available cells is populated from the annotation models in ustation.dgnlib. You can override this list of cells by providing custom cells.

Section callouts

You can place callouts to identify section, detail, and elevation views on a sheet. When using the Place Section Callout tool, enabling the Create Section View check box creates a section view in the design model. You must identify a reference where the saved view will be created.

Note: The section callout is placed on the sheet, but the section view is part of the design composition model.

Because a section callout is a visual representation of a section view in a design model, it can be generated automatically from an existing section view. For example, you might have a plan view of a design model referenced on a sheet. If you have a section view in the design model, you can place its section callout so that it is visually represented on the sheet.

How to place a section callout from a section view:

1. Open the Saved Views dialog. If the section view is not in the active file, select Link Set mode in the Saved Views dialog to display all saved views in the project.

2. Then, right click the section view and select Generate Detailing Symbol from the pop-up menu.

3. Select the plan view reference on the sheet. A section callout is placed on the plan view to represent the section view. You can modify the section callout to propagate changes to the section view.

Hint: This feature is especially useful when you have to call out the same section or detail on multiple sheets. Use the steps to create section callouts on the desired sheets.


Dynamic Views

Note that all section callouts are connected to the section view the same way. If you change one of them, the change is propagated to the section view and then to all other section callouts when you open those sheets.

Section views

To open a section view to analyze a model, right click a section callout on the sheet, and then select Open View from the pop-up menu. To attach one as a reference, select Place View from the pop-up menu.

Placing on a sheet

You can place the generated section view on a sheet, just like any other reference.

In addition to creating the reference and drawing title, a link is established between the section callout and the drawing title. A link on the section callout points to the drawing title. The placeholder fields in the section callout are evaluated using this link.

Note that if a section view is placed multiple times, the section callout will use the first drawing title that was created to update its fields. You can still navigate to the other drawing titles by right clicking the section callout and selecting Follow Link from the pop-up menu.

The following exercise, has you create an Elevation callout, place the saved view of that callout in a sheet and then edit the callout, to see the effects of dynamic views.

Exercise: Add a detailing symbol


Project: General

2 Open Drawing Composition.dgn and click the Annotate task.

This is the last task in the Drawing Composition workflow.

3 Select Place Elevation Callout (T + 3), with the following tool settings:

Detailing Style: Default

Create Elevation View: Enabled

Annotation Scale lock: Enabled

Name: East Elevation


Dynamic Views

4 In View 1, the Plan model, select the outer wall on the left side.

5 Place the elevation callout to the left of the building, and then drag to the right, past the other side of the building, to set the direction and distance of the clip volume.

Exercise: Test dynamics

1 Continuing in Drawing Composition.dgn, create a new Sheet model:


Seed Model: general.dgnlib, SheetSeed

Name: East Elevation



Sheet Name: East Elevation

Sheet Number: 10

2 In the East Elevation model, open the Saved Views dialog.


Dynamic Views

3 Drag East Elevation into View 1 and drop it.


Detail Scale: 1:20

Level: Reference Object


Use Active Annotation Scale (Toggle): Enabled

Drawing Title: Create: Enabled

Drawing Title Name: East Elevation

5 Place it on the sheet.

6 Click the Previous Model.

7 In View 4, select open the View Attributes dialog.

8 In the View Setup section, set Models to East Elevation.

9 In the View 1, Plan, you can right press on the Elevation callout and Rotate it to see the effect on View 4.


Dynamic Views

Numbering sheets and drawings

Drawing title identifiers and sheet numbers are properties used in the drawing composition workflow.

Drawing title identifiers

When you compose a sheet, a unique drawing title identifier is automatically created for each drawing title as you place it on the sheet. The identifier is displayed as a field in a section, detail, or elevation callout. It is also displayed as a field in a drawing title so you can navigate between drawing titles on different sheets by specifying sheet names and callouts.

Sheet names

Assigning a Sheet Name property value is optional. You can set it when creating a sheet model and edit them in the Models dialog. A sheet name can be displayed in detailing symbols and text elements using a field. If the sheet name is changed, the field value updates. This makes it easy to change sheet names when inserting new sheets or reordering sheets in a set.

Renumbering sheets

As sheets are added during the course of a design project, it may become necessary to renumber sheets in a set.

How to renumber sheets manually:

Open the Models dialog. Click the arrow next to the Active File button at the upper right, expand Active Link Tree, and select the Sheets folder. Select the sheet to renumber and click Edit Model Properties. Type the new number in the Sheet Number field and click OK. Repeat for each sheet.


Dynamic Views

Annotating section views

A Section view contains section graphics. Section graphics are new geometry drawn as the result of cutting the design model with the section cut plane. These section graphics are not persistent elements.

When AccuSnap identifies section view graphics, they are identified in the pop-up information

Associate dimension to dynamic volumes and sections

Section graphics are graphics that are generated on the fly while displaying section views. The dimensioning tools are capable of creating dimensions associated to the section graphics.

Additionally, the hatch pattern of a solid´s section graphics can be controlled by applying the relevant element template to the solid in the design model.

The normal annotation tools can be associated to section graphics. For example, you can use the Dimension Element tool to create a linear dimension that is associated to a linear section graphic.

How to place associative dimensions:

1. First, from the Dimensions toolbox, select the Dimension Element tool.

2. Then, in the reference attachment, identify key points on section graphics.

3. Change the update sequence (Settings > Update Sequence) of the references so that the elements in the active model draw last and the annotations appear on top of the graphics.

Simple 3D workflow

Using a simple 3D example, you will create a small town and create dynamic views of it.


Dynamic Views

Exercise: Using dynamic views in simple 3D - build geometry

1 Select File > New and create a New file named Simple 3D Dynamic Views.dgn, using the seed file 3DMetricGeneral.dgn.

2 Open the file.

3 In the Tasks dialog, select the Build Town Task Example.

4 Starting at the top of the tasks, click Create New Town.

The tool opens the Models dialog.

5 Create a new model named My Town, using the default settings except for the following:


A road is already placed to help you get started, as well as an ACS named base.

6 With focus in the AccuDraw window (F11), and type <GA>.

7 Make sure the base ACS is selected with Rotation enabled, and click OK.

8 Select the Place Hotel tool (E), snap to a corner of the road and, with focus in the AccuDraw window, press <O> to set an origin.


Dynamic Views

9 Index away from the road by 5 meters and place the hotel.

10 Select the Place grocery store tool (S), snap to the other end of the road and, with focus in the AccuDraw window, press <O> to set the origin.

11 Index 5 meters away from the road and place the grocery store.

Exercise: Using dynamic views in simple 3D - save the view

1 Click the Take pictures task.

2 Select Rotate View (W) and rotate View 1 to the Top view.

3 Select Change View Attributes (E) turn off Constructions, Grid, and Tags.

4 Select Save View (R) with the following tool settings:

Method: From View

View Type: Saved View

Name: Plan

Description: Plan Composition

5 Enter a data point in the view.

Exercise: Using dynamic views in simple 3D - create the Plan drawing as a model

1 Continuing in Simple 3D Dynamic Views.dgn, click the Layout pictures task.

2 Select New Sheet Model (Q):


Dynamic Views

Type: Sheet, 2D

Name: Design Composition



Sheet Name: Composition

Display Sheet Boundary: Disabled

3 Select Drag and Drop from Saved Views into the Sheet (W).

4 Drag the saved view Plan into View 1 and drop it.


Orientation: Saved Views > Plan

Level: Default


Use Active Annotation Scale (Toggle): Enabled


6 Click OK and, in the tool settings, click Coincident.

Exercise: Using dynamic views in simple 3D - add detailing symbols

1 Make the Drawing Composition tasks active in the Tasks dialog.

2 Click the Annotate task.

3 Select Place Section Callout (T + 1), with the following tool settings:

Detailing Style: Default

Annotation Scale lock: Enabled

Create Section View: Enabled

Name: Movie AA

4 Select the Hotel


Dynamic Views

5 Draw the section line across the hotel, as shown.

6 Use Element Selection (1) to select the back blue bolt of the clip volume and move it forward.

Clip volume before and after

You have created a saved view with a clip volume of the section.

7 Click the Sheet Composition task and select New Sheet Model (W):

Name: Sections


Seed Model: general.dgnlib, SheetSeed


Dynamic Views



Sheet Name: Section

Sheet Number: 2

8 Open the Saved Views dialog.

9 Drag the saved view Hotel AA into View 1.


Orientation: Saved Views > Hotel AA

Level: Default

Drawing Title Create: Enabled

Drawing Title Name: Hotel AA

11 Click on OK and place it on the sheet.

12 Zoom In to see that the Drawing Title is completed.

13 Click Previous Model.


Dynamic Views

14 Note that the section bubble information is completed.

15 Return to the Design Composition model and add more sections.

Exercise: Using dynamic views

1 Continuing in the Design Composition Model, open View 2.

2 Open the View Attributes dialog for View 2.

3 In the View Setup section, set Models to Sections.

4 Tile the views and Fit View in both.

5 Use Element Selection to select the section line in the Design Composition model and drag it up.

Note the dynamic change to the sheet view.


Dynamic Views

6 Right press on the Section line and select Create Step.

7 Snap to the center of the section line and create a step.

Note the dynamic change to the sheet view.

8 Open the View Attributes dialog for In View 1.

9 In the View Setup section, set Saved View to Hotel AA.

10 In the Clip Volume Settings section, set Forward to Outside.


Multi-Scale Detail Sheets

11 In Saved View dialog, select Hotel AA and click the Update Saved View icon

12 Click Yes to the Alert.

Note: You can associate the clip volume with the saved view when it is created, or afterward in the Saved View dialog.

13 Continue by creating an Elevation sheet model and adding elevations.



The method you select to create sheets that contain multi-scaled details depends on the types of designs you create.

Typically, the geometry that makes up a detail sheet is drawn using the actual scale of the objects. Note that you should not draw a detail and then scale the actual geometry down to fit a border. Using this method, the design cannot be easily edited, or reused, later.

Scaling the details

One method of creating a detail sheet is to draw the details and then reference them into a border. With this method, the border is placed at full size and the design information is scaled up or down to fit inside the border, similar to the way drawings are created when manual drafting. All text and dimensioning is placed at full size.

References to the design are then placed at the appropriate scales as required, to fit inside the border.

Two details at full scale



Details scaled and referenced to a border

Detail scale options

The details scale options in the Reference Settings Attachment dialog represent the Master:Ref scale in terms of the sheet scale. If your sheet scale, which is the annotation scale, is 1/8” = 1´ and you want to place a detail reference of scale 1/4” = 1´, select the new scale from the Detail Scale drop-down list. It automatically computes the Master:Ref scale as 2:1.

Exercise: Attach multi-scaled details

Note: This exercise requires a file that is not one of the delivered MicroStation Example files. It must be provided by an instructor.


User: untitled

Project: Untitled

2 Open Multi-Scaled Detail-Refs.dgn from the class data set.

3 Make the Drawing Composition tasks the active tasks.

4 Open the References dialog and click Attach Reference.

5 Select Multi-Scaled Detail-Refs.dgn from the class data set and click Open.

6 In the Reference Attachment Settings dialog, set the following:

Model: Geometry

Orientation > Saved Views: Part C

Detail Scale: 1”=1’0”

Scale Master:Ref changes to 1 : 12. You are placing the saved view at 1”=1’.

7 Enter a data point to position the reference above the title text Detail Scale 1” = 1’.

8 Click Attach Reference and select Multi-Scaled Detail-Refs.dgn.


Orientation > Saved Views: Part B

Detail Scale: 1/2”=1’0”



Scale Master:Ref changes to 1 : 24. You are placing the saved view at 1/2”=1’.

10 Enter a data point to position the saved view above the title text Detail Scale 1/2” = 1’.

11 Click Attach Reference and attach Multi-Scaled Detail-Refs.dgn.


Orientation > Saved Views: Part A

Detail Scale: 3/4”=1’0”

Scale Master:Ref changes to 1 : 16

13 Enter a data point to position the saved view above the title text Detail Scale 3/4” = 1’.

Exercise: Dimension a detail

1 Continuing in Multi-Scaled Detail-Refs.dgn, Zoom In on the right side of the 3/4” = 1’ reference.

2 Change the active level to Dimensions.

3 Select Dimension Linear from the Drawing tasks, and then dimension the pipe.

The size is 1 foot, the actual size of the pipe.




Scaling the model

You can also reference details into a plot sheet model and then scale the model. This has benefits related to text size. You can place the text at the size at which you need it to plot and annotation scale lets you set the scale at which the design will be plotted.

It is a good idea to have separate design models and sheet models. This lets you keep information, such as text and dimensioning, separate from the design. It also reduces the likelihood of conflicts if others want to reference the same design model for use in a sheet of a different scale.

Exercise: Work with a sheet model containing multi-scale details


User: examples

Project: Plant

2 Open \Sheets\BSI700-C0301-001-CC Detail.dgn.

3 Open the References dialog.

You can see the sheet is made up of referenced models. Click on each model and note the scale at the bottom of the references dialog. The first three are attached at 1:1 and the last one, Right-1, is attached at 8:1.

4 Click the Annotate task in the Drawing Composition tasks.


Text Style: (none)

Height & Width: 0.05

Annotation Scale: Enabled

6 In the text editor, type Multi-scale sheet and place the text above the title block.

7 Select Measure Distance and measure the detail at the lower left.

It measures 41.6667 feet.

8 Open the Models dialog, right click on model C0302-001 and select Properties.

You see that the scale is 1/4”=1’0”.

9 Change the scale to 1/2”=1’0” and click OK.

10 Click Yes in the alert.

You can see the original sheet element in the lower left corner. The sheet and its details are now four times as large.



11 Select Measure Distance and measure the detail at the lower left.

It measures 41.6667 feet.

12 Note the text that you placed with annotation scale enabled.

It has scaled with the sheet model.

Exercise: Dynamic update

1 Open \Designs\BSI700-C0301-RRCarContainment.dgn.

2 Select all the elements in the design.

3 Change the active color to 3 and release the selection set.

4 Return to BSI700-C0301-001-CC Detail.dgn, model C0302.

When you alter the model that is referenced into the sheet, the sheet updates.


References and active model annotation scale

In the past, you may have added annotations to design models that are referenced into sheets. You also may have added annotations directly on the sheet. If the annotations were too small, you would have changed the model's annotation scale, but that would have affected only the annotations directly on the sheet. The annotations in the reference were not changed. Therefore, the only way you could change the annotations was to exchange into the reference and scale them.

Now the active model’s annotation scale applies to annotations in references too. If you change the scale of the annotations on the sheet, the scale of the annotations in the references changes also.

To make a reference’s annotations use the active model’s annotation scale, you must turn on the option. There is a column named Use Active Annotation Scale in the References dialog. If this column is not visible, right click a column heading and enable it. To turn on this option for a reference, click in the column creating a check mark.

Existing annotations in a DGN file created with earlier editions of MicroStation cannot be scaled automatically. To make them use their active model's annotation scale, key-in ANNOTATIONSCALE ELEMENT SETDYNAMICFLAG.


Module Review

Module Review


Questions

1 Name the steps in the drawing composition workflow.

2 Define a design.

3 Define design composition.

4 Define sheet composition.

5 Is there a limitation to the size of models that are referenced into a border or sheet model?

6 What is a benefit of using a sheet model?

Answers

1 Organize the project data, design composition, view composition, sheet composition.

2 A collection of elements in a design model that are drawn at full scale (1:1). A design is not intended to be a finished drawing for publication. A design encapsulates part of a project for active editing and uses references for backgrounds only.

3 A collection of references at full scale (1:1) intended for use in several designs, design compositions, or sheet compositions. A design composition differs from a design in that it is composed predominately of references.

4 A collection of references and elements in a sheet model that define a finished drawing sheet, ready for publication.

5 No. Scale the references to fit inside the border or in the sheet model.

6 If you use annotation scale when placing annotations, you do not have to consider scaled text sizes. Also, having separate design models and sheet models lets you keep information separate from the design. It reduces the likelihood of conflicts if others want to reference the same design model for use in a sheet of a different scale.


Module Review


Customizing the User Interface

Module Overview

In this module you will use MicroStation’s Customize utility to customize the user interface. You will also discover the processes needed to use legacy customizations.





Module Objectives

• Enforce standards with element templates

• Create tasks and menus and add tools

• Migrate stg resources and import an m01 file

• Report on and manage customizations

• Export and import customizations to XML

Nov-08 235 Customizing the User Interface





Questions

1 What is a design library, or DGN library?

2 What is your current method of applying standardized element attributes?

3 Do you have legacy customizations?

Answers

1 A DGN library contains standard definitions for things such as levels, text and dimension styles, cells, etc. that are shared throughout files and by members of a workgroup. When you use a definition from a DGN library, it is copied to the active file and is given the same name. You can compare the local resource to the DGN library to see if the DGN library has changed, or if the local resource is out of sync with the DGN library.

2 This is important because it helps define ways in which element templates, tools and tasks can be implemented to help standardize production.

3 Settings Manager settings files and existing .m01 resources can be imported for use in MicroStation V8i. You can then use the new tools to organize and enhance those customizations.

Customizing the User Interface 236 Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Personal DGN Libraries

You can customize any, or all, of the parts of a workspace’s user interface. Custom tools, toolboxes, tasks, work flows, main tasks, menu customizations, and context menu customizations are created and stored in DGN libraries. This allows administrators to customize them in one place and to distribute the customizations to many users.

Personal DGN Libraries

When you open or create a DGN file you can see and use all the custom tools, toolboxes, and tasks in the configured DGN libraries. If you create custom tools, toolboxes, or tasks and do not want to make them available to others, you should save them in a personal DGN library, which is created when you create an Interface.

When you create a new Interface in the File Open dialog, not only is a new ustn.r01 file created, a user specific DGN library is also created. The name of this DGN library is the same as the name of the user interface. Anyone can open this new DGN library and add custom tools, tasks and menus that are unique to them.

The Primary Search Path category, User Interface DGN Library List variable, MS_GUIDGNLIBLIST, includes the path to DGN libraries in the current user interface folder. $(_USTN_USERINTNAME)\*.dgnlib. It also points to the MS_DGNLIBLIST configuration variable, so you may see other customizations in addition to those defined in your personal DGN library.

How to create an Interface:

In the File Open dialog, select New from the Interface option list to open the Create User Interface dialog. Enter a name and description for the interface. MicroStation creates an interface directory under the ...\WorkSpace\Interfaces\MicroStation directory. It contains a DGN library (*.dgnlib) with the same name as the directory in which it is stored. This personal DGN library is for defining and storing user interface customizations to be used only by you.

To define your personal user interface customizations, navigate to the interface directory just created and open the DGN library there. Then you can use the features on the Tools tab in the Workspace > Customize dialog.

Warning: Anyone can copy other DGN libraries to their user interface folder, so that tools, tasks and menus from those files are also loaded. Tools, tasks and menus in the user interface folder will be the first ones loaded and will have precedence if duplicates exist in the DGN libraries referenced by MS_GUIDGNLIBLIST.

Nov-08 237 Customizing the User InterfaceCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Enforcing Standards With Element Templates


Element templates are named sets of element parameters that can be used to set active element placement parameters. A user selects an element template, which activates the settings stored in the template and can also activate a key-in command stored for that template. Element templates are similar to, but much more flexible than, Settings Manager components.

Element Selection can show all the element templates within the active file. You can use the list on the Templates tab to select and deselect elements based upon the template that was used for their placement.

Creating element templates

Templates are stored in groups so you must plan a structure that fits your workflow.

Exercise: Create a template group and a template


Project: Civil

2 Move up one level, change Files of type to *.dgnlib, and open \dgnlib\civil.dgnlib.

3 Select Element > Element Templates.

4 In the left frame of the Element Templates dialog, right click on civil.dgnlib and select New Template Group.

5 Name the group Existing.

The templates in this group will be used when creating existing features.

6 Select the group.

7 Click New Template, or right click on the template group name, and select New Template from the pop-up menu.

8 Name the new template Ground.



Assigning properties

When you add a template, it adopts the level, color, line style, and line weight properties from the active settings in the Attributes toolbox. You must assign the properties you want.

Exercise: Assign properties

1 Continuing in civil.dgnlib, click on the new template and set the following in the Properties frame by clicking in the field to the right of the property:

Level: Survey Exist Ground

Color: ByLevel

Line Style: ByLevel

Weight: ByLevel

2 Select the group and create another template named Flowline with the following properties:

Level: Survey Exist Flowline

Color, Weight, and Style: ByLevel

3 In the left frame of the Element Templates dialog, right click on civil.dgnlib and create a template group.named Text.

4 Create a template for this group:

Name: Descriptions

Level: Plan Text Description


5 Right click under the General Settings and select Add > Text > Text Style Overrides > Slant.

6 Expand the category and set the Slant to 5.

7 Create another template:

Name: Notes

Level: Plan Text Notes


8 Right click under the General Settings and select Add > General Settings > Transparency.



9 Set Transparency to 30.

10 Select File > Save Settings and close the file.

There are may other properties you can add. You can set area and fill for closed elements,

Working with element templates

Once you add templates to the open DGN file, which is represented by the blue V8 icon, you organize them by moving them up or down within a template group, or by move them into another template group. If you copy an existing template, you can add, modify, and delete properties.

Templates from the open DGN file cannot be copied or moved into a DGN library’s template groups. These are represented by gray V8 icons. However, the DGN library’s templates can be set to be the active template and can be copied into the open DGN file. Once they are part of the open DGN file, they can be modified and deleted.

Note: You cannot cut, rearrange, delete, or rename templates in a DGN library without opening that DGN library.

Setting and locking templates

Element templates are activated using the Active Template tool in the Attributes toolbox. It provides a list of available templates and also serves as a toggle to lock new elements to the active template during placement. While element templates are similar to Settings Manager components, elements that are placed with a template locked are automatically updated when parameters in the element template are modified.

There is an important difference between setting and locking the active element template. In both cases elements will have properties that are defined in the template. But they will ultimately behave differently.

Setting

If you set the template by selecting one from the hierarchy tree, the active attribute settings change to the properties defined in the template. When you place an element, the element will have the template’s properties but it is not locked to the template. If the template properties are changed and a library update is issued, these elements will not change.

Locking

When a template is locked, the active attribute settings change to the properties defined in the template and elements will have the template’s properties. Elements are also associated with,



or locked to, the template. To lock a template, set the template by selecting one from the hierarchy tree then click the Active Element Template icon so that it is depressed.

If the template is stored in the active file, these associated elements will update automatically when properties in their template are modified. If the template is from a DGN library you can use the DGNLIB UPDATE TEMPLATES key-in to synchronize properties. This is similar to text and dimension styles.

When you use a template from a DGN library to place an element, if the Active Element Template icon is locked, a copy of that template is placed in the open DGN file.

Exercise: Place a flowline locked to a template and update

1 Move up one level and open \dgn\Designs\BSI400-W01-Survey.dgn.

Remember to change the types filter back to CAD Files.

2 Click the Active Template tool in the Attributes toolbox so that it is locked.

3 Click the arrow next to the tool, expand the Existing group, and select the Flowline template.

The active attributes change to those stored in the template.

4 Select Place SmartLine (Q + 1) with the following tool setting:


5 Place a flowline in the file.

There are now flowlines in the file that were not locked to a template and one that is.

6 Click Previous Model to return to Civil.dgnlib.

7 In the Element > Element Templates dialog, select the Flowline template and change the color to 7.

8 Click Next Model to return to BSI400-W01-Survey.dgn.

9 Open the Key-in browser, type DGNLIB UPDATE TEMPLATES, and then press Enter.

The flowline locked to the template updates.

You can also select Update Templates from Library from the Element Templates dialog’s Utilities menu to update elements.

Updating elements using templates

If a template was used while placing elements and someone manually changes element symbology so that it doesn’t match the template, you can issue a command to update the symbology.


Customizing Tasks and Tools

Exercise: Change symbology

1 Continuing in BSI400-W01-Survey.dgn, select the locked flowline’s color to another color.

2 Select Utilities > Update Selected Elements in the Element Templates dialog.

3 Close the Element Templates dialog.

You can also update the symbology of all elements in a selection set that are associated with local templates. Expand the Element Selection tool’s tool settings, select the templates tab and identify the template to select the elements. Note that if an element that is not associated with a template is selected, its symbology will not change.


MicroStation lets you create custom tools and toolboxes. Custom tools can be copies of standard MicroStation tools or tools from DGN libraries, modified to fit your needs, or they can be created in the Customize dialog. Custom tools can be set up to help you draw elements, adjust settings, run other applications, link to Web sites, and more.

Custom tools are placed in custom toolboxes, which are used to organize tools. Custom toolboxes can be copies of standard MicroStation toolboxes or toolboxes from DGN libraries, modified to fit your needs, or they can be created by clicking the New Toolbox icon. You can place custom toolboxes within other toolboxes. Custom toolboxes can be opened and used in your workspace and grouped into tasks.

You create and manage custom tools, toolboxes, and tasks on the Tools tab in the Customize dialog.

Creating tasks

A task is a set of tools grouped to facilitate a particular workflow. By defining and grouping tasks, you can create a task-based user interface. The tools grouped into a task can be standard MicroStation tools, custom tools, or a combination of both types. A task's tools can be grouped into standard MicroStation toolboxes, custom toolboxes, or a combination of both types. Therefore the interface will contain all the tools and toolboxes you need to complete your work, grouped the way you want them.

Exercise: Note the tasks

1 Click Previous Model to return to civil.dgnlib.

2 Select Workspace > Customize.

3 On the Tasks tab, expand Application Tasks.



4 Expand ustation.dgnlib.

This is the MicroStation default DGN library. It contains the default tasks that are delivered. The V8 icon is grey, indicating that you cannot modify this delivered file.

Your project’s customizations can be performed only in files that are configured DGN libraries. If you are not working in a file that is identified in MS_DGNLIBLIST (Workspace > Configuration, Primary Search Paths category, DGN Library List), you can not customize.

If there are any other available DGN libraries, they are listed on the dialog’s File menu. If you attempt to access the customize tools and cannot use them, you can select a DGN library listed on the File menu.

The Building project’s available DGN libraries

Creating tasks and adding tools

Once a task is created you can add existing tools or tools that you define in the Customize dialog. You can use any MicroStation tool or any existing custom tools you have previously defined in an m01 file.

Exercise: Compose a task containing tools from different toolboxes

1 Continuing in civil.dgnlib, on the Tools tab of the Customize dialog, expand User Tasks on the Tasks tab.

2 Select civil.dgnlib, next to the blue V8 icon.

3 Click New Task.

The task list expands and a new task is added.

4 Name the new task Compose Drawing Set.

Note: A right click menu for each task offers a Rename option as well as options for reordering, creating and deleting tasks.

5 In the left frame, expand Application Tools, then MicroStation.

All MicroStation’s tools are available here.

6 Scroll to the Reference tools.

7 Drag the Reference tools to the Compose Drawing Set task on the Tasks tab and drop them.

8 Scroll to the Text tools.



9 Drag these tools to the Compose Drawing Set task.

Note: If you make a mistake, Undo works on these drag and drop operations.

You can add entire toolboxes or individual tools.

10 Scroll to the Cloud tools and expand them.

11 Drag the Cloud by Points tool to the Compose Drawing Set task.

12 Scroll to the Cells tools and drag the Place Active Cell tool to the Compose Drawing Set task.

Editing tasks

Once you add a toolbox to a task, you can edit the tools it contains.

Exercise: Refine the task

1 Continuing in civil.dgnlib, on the Tools tab of the Customize dialog, expand the Text tools in the Compose Drawing Set task.

You will keep only the tools that are relevant to your drawing sets.

2 Select all the tools except Place Text, Edit Text, and Change Case and click the Delete icon.

Hint: Press the Shift key and select all the tools, then press Esc to remove the 3 desired tools from the set.

Warning: Since tools are referenced into Tasks, changing a tool’s function can affect many tasks.



Exercise: Reorder the tasks

1 Continuing in civil.dgnlib, click the arrow next to Tasks.

The Compose Drawing Set task is added to the task list.

You can reorder tasks themselves and also reorder the tools within a task.

2 Use the move up and down arrows, or drag and drop, to arrange the tools and toolboxes in the following order:

Reference

Text

Place Active Cell

Cloud by Points

Click the Task List icon.

3 Click the arrow next to Tasks and make the Compose Drawing Set tasks the active tasks.

Use tasks to define a workflow

You can compose a series of tasks that help define a complete workflow. A workflow can consist of one or more tasks. In most cases a workflow consists of a collection of tasks organized in the order that you will use them to complete a project or job. Each task contains the tools you need to complete the task.

In order to create a workflow you must create and store it in a DGN library and make sure that the .dgnlib file is stored with the configured DGN library files, that is, in the location specified by the MS_GUIDGNLIBLIST configuration variable.

Workflows appear in the Tasks dialog and have a Workflow icon.

Exercise: Compose a workflow

1 Continuing in civil.dgnlib, in the Customize dialog, select civil.dgnlib on the Tasks tab, click New Task and name the task Site.

2 Drag the MicroStation Linear Elements, Measure, and Polygons tools to the task.

3 Make the Measure tools last.

4 Select civil.dgnlib on the Tasks tab, click New Task and name the task Drafting.

5 In the Properties frame of the dialog, set Treat Task as Workflow to True.



6 Drag the Compose Drawing Set task to the workflow, and then the Site task.

Including tasks within tasks

You can create one instance of a task and reference it in other tasks. If you need to change the task, you change it in one location.

• A copy of the task is updated automatically when you change the original task.

• The name of the copy of the task appears in italics, indicating that it is a copy of the original task.

• When you select a copy of the task, the Task Path in the Properties pane indicates the location of the original task.

How to include a task within a task:

First, select the task that you want to copy. Then, right click the task and choose Copy from the pop-up menu. Right click the task to which you are copying the task and select Paste Task Reference from the pop-up menu.

Main Tasks

The Main Tasks tab contains the default tasks that you see in the Task Navigation dialog. These are the tools in the Main toolbox and any other tasks defined in ustation.dgnlib.

Creating tools

When you are defining custom tools and toolboxes, you do not do this directly in tasks. You also should not create the same tool in multiple toolboxes. Instead, you should create one copy of a tool and place it in one toolbox.

Exercise: Create a custom tool that uses a key-in

1 Continuing in civil.dgnlib, in the Customize dialog, expand User Tools in the left frame.

2 Select civil.dgnlib.

3 Click New Tool Box.

4 Name the new toolbox Web.



5 Select the new toolbox and click New Tool.

6 Name the new tool Link.

7 Select the new tool.

8 In the Properties frame of the Customize dialog, in the Command Data section, remove the null value and type the following in the Key-in input field:

ATTACH WEBTAG

9 Change the Balloon Text to Add E-Link.

10 In the General Settings section, click in the Icon input field, and then click the browse button on the right.

In the Define Icon for Tool dialog, you’ll be choosing tools from the MicroStation application.

11 At the top, set Look for icons in to Applications.

12 Expand MicroStation, scroll to the E-Links tools, expand them, select Attach E-Link and click OK.

The icon displays in the icon field.

You can display a tool’s icon, or label, or both by setting the Tool Presentation.

13 Set Tool Presentation to Icon Only.

Tool icons

In the Define Icon for Tool dialog, the Look for icons in options let you select the source from which you want to select, import, or delete icons for custom tools.

• Applications contains the icons listed under Application Tools in the Customize dialog. It includes all MicroStation tools and MDL application tools.

• Current Design File is the only source from which you can delete icons.

• Import Selected Icons is the source to use to import icon (ICO) files.

• Import Selected Bitmaps is the source to use to import bitmap (BMP) files.

Import/export

Use the key-in CUSTOMIZE EXPORT ICONS <path\directory\> to export icons from the open DGN library to a directory. You may want to export icons in order to edit them.



Note: Only the icons shown in the Define Icon for Tool dialog when Look for icons in is set to Current Design File will be exported.

Use the key-in CUSTOMIZE IMPORT ICONS <path\directory\> to import icons from a directory to the open DGN library.

Warning: When importing icons, imported icons will replace existing icons of the same name.

Note: You can use MicroStation to create geometry then select Utilities > Image > Capture to capture an image. Then, use an image editing application to refine the image.

General settings for user tools

Additional general settings besides icon and presentation are as follows.

The Tool Type options specify the behavior of the tool.

• Standard makes the tool active until you select another tool.

• A Push Button will not start a new command and does not interrupt a current placement command. Use this to send immediate command key-ins. For example, the key-in CO=1;LV=Landscaping would set the active color and level.

Dimension options determine whether a tool will be available when working in 2D DGN files, 3D DGN files, or both.

Adding advanced tools

Since you can use any MicroStation key-in as the command string, you can predetermine tool settings or open documents. You can also link to a website.

You can use % to link to any document. For example, %C:\temp\CADstandards.doc.

or

%www.census.gov

Also,

! C:\temp\Lot_Design.txt opens the text document in the application associated with the .txt extension.



Exercise: Add a tool that links to code requirements

1 Continuing in the Customize dialog box, select civil.dgnlib under User Tools in the left frame and click New Tool.

2 Name the new tool Code Requirements.

3 Select the new tool.

4 In the Properties frame of the Customize dialog, in the Command Data section, remove the null value and type the following in the Key-in input field:

%%iexplore http://www.google.com/search?hl=en&q=civil+code+requirements

5 Change the Balloon Text to Find Code Req.

6 In the General Settings section, click in the Icon input field, and then click the browse button on the right.

7 Expand MicroStation, scroll to the Standard tools, expand them, select Bentley Library and click OK.

8 Set Tool Presentation to Icon Only.

Adding custom tools to tasks

Toolboxes are like the drawers in a tool chest. You have one drawer for screwdrivers, one drawer for pliers, one drawer for wrenches, and one drawer for hammers. Your first task is to fix a chair and your second task is to hang a picture.

For each task you have already defined which tools from which drawers are needed. You might need the hammer for both tasks. Imagine that when you are ready to perform one of the tasks, your automatically have with the proper tools from each drawer. You do not have to open every drawer to find the tools you need, nor do you have to bring the entire tool chest to perform your tasks. This is what you do when you add tools to MicroStation tasks.

Exercise: Add tools to a task workflow

1 Continuing in civil.dgnlib, in the Customize dialog, drag the Web toolbox to the Drafting workflow on the Tasks tab.

2 Make the Web tasks last in the workflow.

3 In the Task Navigation dialog, click the Drafting workflow, expand the Web tasks and click the Link tool.

Tool settings change to reflect the command string you entered, which activates the Attach Engineering Link command.

You can also create tools that open dialogs or perform repeated user actions. Just drag the tool that opens the dialog to a task or workflow. Or create a new tool whose key-in is the keyin that opens the dialog. For example DIALOG DIMSTYLE or DIALOG REFERENCE.



Tasks can use overlapping sets of tools. For example, you can create one custom drawing tool and include it in two tasks.

When you need to perform task number 1, you select the task and the tool appears automatically, along with the other tools that are needed for task 1.

When you need to perform task number 2, you select the task and the tool appears automatically, along with a different set of tools that are needed for task 2.

If you need to modify the tool you do so once, and both tasks are automatically updated to reflect the modifications.

Apply an element template to a tool

You can apply element templates to tools so that the attributes in the template are always invoked with the tool is used. You can import settings from existing Setting Manager resource files and to import and export element template definitions using XML files.

Optional Exercise: Define a template for a placement tool

1 Continuing in civil.dgnlib, create a toolbox named Drainage and add a tool named Flowline, using the following parameters:

Key-in: PLACE SMARTLINE JOIN ON

Balloon Text: Place Flowline

Icon: MicroStation -> Linear Elements -> Place SmartLine

Tool Presentation: Icon Only

2 Click “None” in the Template Path entry field in the Command Data section.

3 Click the arrow and navigate to the Existing > Flowline template and select it.

4 Drag the Drainage toolbox to the Drafting workflow, below the Site task.

It is automatically added to the Task Navigation dialog.

5 Click the Drainage task, and then the Flowline tool.

Note the change in the tool and active attributes settings.



Additional command data settings for tools

The Associate Template setting sets the status of the Active Element Template tool in the Attributes toolbox when a tool is used.

• When Always is selected, the icon is available.

• Never makes it unavailable.

• Use Current Setting does not change the status of the icon. If the icon is available and a template is defined, elements that users place with the tool will be placed with the template settings.

If you right click in the Associate Template field there is an Add Default Template option. If you set one, when the tool is used, the default template’s properties are applied to the element. If a template property is specified in both templates, the associated template takes precedence.

Managing tool settings

Another feature is the ability to control tool settings.

How to control tool settings:

First, right click on the custom tool and click Add. Then, select Dialog Item Settings from the pop-up menu.



A Dialog Item Settings field is added to the dialog. Use this area to set tool settings parameters.

Next, in the Item Settings frame of the Customize dialog, expand Dialog Item Settings. Then set the Dialog Item Name to the tool setting you want to affect. For example, If your tool calls the Place SmartLine command, the ToolSettings.Join enables the Join Elements check box in the Place SmartLine tool settings.

Additional dialog items can be added by right clicking on the Item Settings heading and selecting Dialog Item Settings.

Hint: To find out the available tool settings for a command you can use the key-in SET ITEM TOOLSETTINGS. To do so, invoke the tool in MicroStation and then issue the key-in. The options are listed in the right frame of the Key-in browser.

The Type option determines the type for the dialog item. It can be literal, as in the above exercise, a distance stored in meters, an area stored in square meters, or a volume stored in cubic meters. The Value is the value for the Type. If the tool places a line that is constrained, one of the dialog items would be the line’s length, which is Type distance. The Value would preset the length of the line.

Additional tool properties

You can access available tool properties if you right click on a new tool and select Add from the pop-up menu.

Expand the options on this menu to add design file settings such as the active snap mode or an active angle. Fence modes can be set. Use the Locks options so that the tool uses the graphic group lock or the annotation scale lock. You can also apply fence settings such as clip or overlap. The command data submenu lets you add a field so you can define a default template.


Migrating Resources

Migrating Resources

.Stg resources

Legacy .stg resources can be imported and be used as tools and templates. The settings file groups become individual toolboxes. Their components are tools that maintain all their specific settings. Each group also becomes a template, containing all attribute settings.

Exercise: Migrate existing customizations

1 Continuing in civil.dgnlib, in the Customize dialog, select File > Import > From Settings Manager.

2 In the Select Settings File to Import dialog, navigate to ...\Workspace\System\data\styles.stg and click Open.

A new toolbox with the name of the DGN file is added to the User Tools.

3 Right click on the civil.dgnlib toolbox and select Rename.

4 Rename the toolbox Civil Styles.

5 Expand the toolbox and note the child toolboxes listed.

There is one for each Settings Manager group.

6 Delete V40 Dimension Styles.

7 Expand V40 Multi-line Styles and select a tool.

You can see any key-in associated with the tool, along with any other properties that were set for the component. The Template Path specifies the element template from which the attributes such as color and weight will come. You can see the imported template definitions in the Element Templates dialog.

8 Drag the Civil Styles toolbox to the root level Civil.dgnlib task and drop it.

The new tools are ready for use.

Importing an m01 file

To import a legacy .m01 file, first create an Interface folder for the .m01 file. For example, ...\Workspace\Interfaces\OldInterface, in Windows Explorer. Place the .m01 file there. Then open MicroStation using that interface.

When you open the Customize dialog, the customizations from the .m01 file will appear under the MicroStation Application tools. Work with them now just as you would default MicroStation Application tools.


Reporting on Customizations

Reporting on Customizations

You can generate an HTML report on all the template, custom toolbox, custom tool, task, and custom menu data in the active file.

Exercise: Report on the customizations

1 Continuing in civil.dgnlib, in the Customize dialog, select Utilities > Generate HTML Report.

You can specify a name and location for the HTML file in the Generate HTML Report dialog. The default is to create a file named after the DGN file in the current folder

2 Select the types of data you want to include and click OK.

An HTML file opens. It contains information about all the template, custom toolbox, custom tool, task and custom menu data in Civil.dgnlib.

3 Review and then exit the HTML file.

Exporting and importing customizations to XML

You can import and export to XML files in order to edit toolboxes, tools and templates with an XML editing tool.

Once user tools and tasks have been created, select File > Export > XML in the Customize dialog. Then, select a location and name for the file.

Working with Menus

Custom menus are created and stored in DGN libraries. This allows administrators to customize menus in one place and to distribute the customizations to many users. With this type of customization only additions and deletions to the MicroStation menus are stored. MicroStation does not store a copy of the entire set of menus, as it did in previous editions.

If you used earlier editions of MicroStation to customize menus, you can import your customizations into the MicroStation V8i. Menu customizations also can be imported from and exported to XML files. You can generate HTML reports of all the menu customizations in the open DGN file.


Working with Menus

Creating menus

Select the MenuBar tab, and then use the tools provided to create new menus and menu items.

Exercise: Create a menu

1 Continuing in civil.dgnlib, in the Customize dialog, click the MenuBar tab.

2 Select Main Menu.

3 Click New Menu.

4 Rename the new menu Civil.

To insert a mnemonic, insert the tilde character before the character you want to be the accelerator.

5 Place the cursor at the beginning of the word Civil.

6 Press Shift + ~ before the C in Civil.

~Civil

If you look at the main menu bar you can see that the menu has been added to the interface.

7 Select the menu and click the up arrow, or drag and drop, to move it above the Help menu.

8 Right click on the Civil menu.

9 Select New Menu from the pop-up menu.

10 Name the new menu Tools.

Adding tools to a menu

Exercise: Add tools to the menu

1 Continuing in civil.dgnlib,expand User Tools in the left frame and expand civil.dgnlib.

2 Select the Web toolbox and drag it to the Tools submenu.

The tools are now accessible from the main menu bar.

You can also create a menu entry that opens a toolbox.

3 Right click on the Tools submenu and select New Menu Item.

4 Rename the new menu item Modification.

5 In the Properties frame of the dialog, Command Data section, type the key-in:

CUSTOMIZE OPEN TOOLBOX MODIFY


Working with Menus

6 Select Civil > Tools > Modification to open the toolbox.

Menu items

Exercise: Add additional menu items

1 Continuing in civil.dgnlib, in the right frame of the Customize dialog, right click on the Civil menu.

2 Select Add New Tool Separator.

3 Right click on the Civil menu and select New Menu Item from the pop-up menu.

4 Name the new item Dimensions.

5 In the Properties frame of the dialog, Command Data section, type the key-in:

MDL KEYIN DIMSTYLE DIALOG DIMSTYLE OPEN

You can open any dialog from the custom menu.

6 Right click on the Tools sub-menu and select New Menu Item.

7 Rename the menu item Drainage.

8 Type the key-in:

CUSTOMIZE OPEN TOOLBOX Drainage

This entry opens the Drainage toolbox.

Additional menu properties

As with tools, the Dimension options determine whether a menu will be available when working in 2D DGN files, 3D DGN files, or both.

Context menus

MicroStation allows you to customize its context menus. Context menus are the menus accessed by clicking the right mouse button, and custom context menus are added to the reset popup menu. You can create custom context menus by copying standard menus and menu items or by creating new menus and menu items.

When customizing right click context menus and menu items (Workspace > Customize > Context Menus tab), you can show or hide and enable or disable them based on tests created in the Named Expressions dialog. For example, you can create a right-click menu that will be available only when you are working on a sheet model by setting the menu's Show/Hide Test property to “IsSheetModel” and its Enable/Disable Test property to “IsSheetModel”.


Module Review

Custom context menus are created and stored in DGN libraries. This allows administrators to customize context menus in one place and to distribute the customizations to many users. With this type of customization only additions and deletions to the MicroStation context menus are stored.

Context menus

Exercise: Add tools to the view pop-up menu

1 Continuing in civil.dgnlib, in the right frame of the Customize dialog, expand the Context Menus tab.

2 Right click on civil.dgnlib and select New Context.

3 Name the menu Linear.

4 Right click on the new menu and select New Menu Item.

5 Name the item Line and, in the Command Data section, remove the word null and type the key-in PLACE LINE.

6 Create two more menu items using the following names and key-ins:

Construction Line PLACE LINE ANGLE

Multiline PLACE MLINE

7 Right click in the view to see the additions to the context menu.


Module Review


Questions

1 Explain the role of the MS_DGNLIBLIST configuration variable.

2 Why is it advisable not to change a tool’s function once added or created?

3 What does the MS_GUIDGNLIBLIST configuration variable specify?

4 What do the Dimension options for tools and menus determine?


Module Review

Answers

1 Tool, task and menu customization can be performed only in files that are configured DGN libraries. If you are not working in a file that is identified in MS_DGNLIBLIST you will see a warning message when you try to access the Tools tab.

2 Since tools are referenced into Tasks, changing a tool’s function can affect many tasks.

3 The path to DGN libraries in the current user interface folder.

4 They determine whether a menu will be available when working in 2D DGN files, 3D DGN files, or both.


Protecting Your Intellectual Property

Module Overview

This module explains file protection, which was designed so that digital rights can be implemented. Digital rights are intended to support the controlled distribution of files to a wide audience.


• Some knowledge about configuration variables

• Understanding about MicroStation file functions (Open, Save As, Read-Only)

Module Objectives


• Implement file protection

• Distinguish between digital rights and signing files

• Create a signature hierarchy

• Run applications securely

Nov-08 259 Protecting Your Intellectual Property





Questions

1 How can you review a file’s properties?

2 What is encryption?

Answers

1 Right click on it in Windows Explorer and select Properties from the pop-up menu.

2 Encryption scrambles data, making it impossible to use the data until it is unscrambled.

File Protection

This is not the same as a document management system, but is applied to files that are used outside of that type of system. File protection is designed to put access control inside a file. This allows the author, or protector, of a file to maintain a degree of control over a DGN file, even after it leaves the environment where the original is stored.

As an author you can grant or deny designated users the rights to publish or modify a file’s content, as well as controlling access to it. An author can define degrees of accessibility.

The foundation of all file protection is encryption. Encryption scrambles all of the data in a DGN file so it is impossible to use the data unless you unscramble it. You cannot unscramble the data without supplying the required password or key.

Distinguish between digital rights and signing files

Digital rights protect files by granting or denying the right to do something. Digitally signing, or stamping, file content makes note of its exact state. Always remember to protect copies and sign originals.

Copies of files which will leave your organization can be protected with digital rights to ensure that work is not tampered with or copied. Originals are handled internally. They can be signed using a digital signature to indicate approval or take a snapshot at project milestones.

Protecting Your Intellectual Property 260 Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Enabling File Protection

Digital rights

The term digital rights refers to protecting a file on a system with a digital lock. A protected file is inaccessible to unauthorized people.

Before opening a protected file, MicroStation authenticates the user and applies the rights that were assigned, allowing only specified tools and applications to operate on the file. You can do this using a password or by requiring the user to present a digital certificate electronically.

Warning: Digital rights should be applied to copies of files that will leave your control. It is not recommended that you protect original files.

Rights as defined in MicroStation

The author controls who can access a file’s contents, as well as grants or denies rights to publish or modify data. All commands related to a right that is not granted are disabled. For example, if a user does not have the Edit right, files will be read only. MicroStation defines the following rights.

• View: See contents displayed on the screen. Since the View right is the default right, it is not explicitly granted by the author. Any user authorized to access the file has the right to view it.

The remaining rights control the user’s interaction with the contents.

• Print: Print file contents to hard copy.

• Edit: Modify file contents.

• Export: Select Edit > Copy or Cut to copy or cut elements to the clipboard, select File > Export/Save As to save the contents to a different file or format, select File > Save As to save the contents to a different name without encryption or restrictions, fence file, or generate an e-plot.

• Unlimited: This right grants all basic rights, plus the ability to grant rights and authorize users. Anyone with unlimited rights fills the role of the author, who can then assign rights to other users.


File protection is disabled by default. The ability to protect files in MicroStation is controlled by the configuration variable MS_PROTECTION_ENABLE. There are other configuration variables associated with file protection.

Nov-08 261 Protecting Your Intellectual PropertyCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


Set MS_PROTECTION_NOENCRYPT_THUMBNAIL to 1 so the thumbnail is unencrypted. Set it to 0 so the thumbnail is encrypted (unavailable).

Set MS_PROTECTION_NOENCRYPT_PROPERTIES to 1 so file properties are unencrypted. Set it to 0 so file properties are encrypted (unavailable).

Complete the following exercise to enable file protection for your local MicroStation installation.

Exercise: Enable MicroStation file protection


Project: Building


3 Select Workspace > Configuration.

4 In the Configuration dialog, select the Protection category.

5 Select the Enable file protection variable.

6 Click Edit.

7 Type 2 in the New Value field and click OK.

By default, file protection will encrypt a file’s thumbnail image and file properties, as well as the file itself. As these items are shown by Windows Explorer, File Open dialog, and the MicroStation File Properties dialog, you may wish to have them unencrypted. Or, if data contained in files is extremely sensitive you may want to encrypt one or both.

Note: Leaving the thumbnail and file properties unencrypted means that anyone can see an image of the DGN file or its file properties, even if that person has no right to open the file.

Exercise: Enable property display when a file is encrypted

1 Continuing in BSI300AE101-Plan.dgn, in the Configuration dialog, edit the Do NOT encrypt file properties variable to 1 to leave the file properties unencrypted.

2 Exit the dialogs, accepting the changes.

Levels of file protection

Protection can be executed by excluding unauthorized users and also by restricting usage rights for authorized users.

When excluding users, the author protects a file and then authorizes only users holding specific passwords or digital certificates to access it.

When restricting usage rights to authorized individuals, the author uses a certificate or password to restrict the user’s right to print, export, or modify a file. Or, the author may place



a time limit on the user’s right to access the file. The author can also specify an Authentication URL as a dynamic check.

File protection using a password

When password protection is used, a user must supply the correct password to gain access to the file. Password protecting a file is convenient because recipients do not need certificates and because passwords do not have to expire.

Note: Recipient is the term for an individual who will be receiving a protected file.

Warning: Make sure to save passwords. If they are forgotten the file will be inaccessible. A technical support analyst can not detect the password on a file. It cannot be done.

You will first protect this file by restricting access with one password license and then you will create another license granting certain rights.

Exercise: Protect a file with a password

1 Continuing in BSI300AE101-Plan.dgn, select File > Save As.

2 In the Save As dialog, move up one level to the Building project folder.

3 Create a new folder named Review.

4 Save the file in the folder, keeping the same file name.

Remember that you want to apply file protection to copies of files, not originals.

5 Select File > Protection > Protect.

6 In the Password field of the password Protect dialog, type the password of your choice.

The minimum number of characters is five, by default.

Warning: Remember the password you select.

7 In the Confirm field, reenter the password and click OK.

The file is now protected by the password and the Digital Rights dialog appears, listing the default author’s license.

This is the simplest method of controlling access to a file. When anyone attempts to open the file, they will be prompted for the password.




Exercise: Test the protection

1 In the File Open dialog, click Open.

2 When the Password dialog appears, suppose that you do not know the password and click OK.

An alert informs you that MicroStation cannot open the file because it is protected.

3 Click OK.

You return to the File Open dialog.

4 Click Open.

5 Type the password you assigned and click OK.

The password allowed you to access the file.

6 Select File > Protection > Digital Rights to reopen the Digital Rights dialog.

You can now create additional licenses to specify different rights for different users.

When protection is applied to a file the Digital Rights dialog, containing one license, appears. By default, MicroStation creates this author’s license to protect the file. This license grants unlimited rights. No one, including the author, is able to delete or modify this author’s license. This prevents the author from accidentally being locked out of the file, or being denied the ability to administer rights.

The Digital Rights dialog

Digital rights are something that is granted to recipients by the author. The Digital Rights dialog is where the author adds, deletes, or changes recipients access to the protected file.

Digital Rights dialog showing an author’s license

Right defined for the recipient * denotes unlimited, V view,E edit, X export, P print

User receiving the rights the license grants Purpose of the license

if one was specified

Expiration date if one was added

Authentication URL if one was added

Date license was created

Indicates if a certificate has a private key



License types

An author can identify recipients and authorize them using any combination of the following license types.

Everyone license:This is used to create a license usable by everyone, without credentials. It makes sense to create an Everyone license that only grants limited rights. For example, creating an Everyone license with view only rights. Use the Add access for everyone tool to open the License Properties dialog. The Recipient field is already set to Everyone. This Everyone license grants the right to View (only) automatically.

Note: The Everyone license is not bound to a password or a certificate. It can be used by literally everyone.

Password license:Anyone who knows the password can use a password license. Usually, the author creates multiple passwords conveying different rights to the same file. Then, the author sends passwords to the users. Use the Add a password tool to open the Add Password dialog.

Certificate license:A certificate based license can only be used by a recipient who has a certain digital certificate. The author uses a certificate or certificate file to create a license that can only be opened by a user who has the corresponding certificate on the system. Use the Add a recipient certificate tool to open the Add Recipient Certificate dialog.

Using a Smart Card:A smart card is a variation of a certificate based license. A user arranges for a private key corresponding to their digital certificate to be stored on a token, or “smart card.” When MicroStation accesses the private key, the user is required to supply the smart card to be authenticated.

When adding any type of license, the License Properties, Add Recipient Certificate and Add Password dialogs share similar features.

• The Recipient field identifies the users who will be able to use the license.

• The Purpose can help you identify the licenses.

• The Rights check boxes are used to define the rights that the license will grant the recipients.

• The Expires field can be used to specify a date on which the license will expire. This date can be used to add an additional level of security to the license.

• The URL field is where the Authentication URL is specified if one is to be used.

Additional checks can be set up using a server, through an Authentication URL. One use for an authentication URL is to modify access to a file by forcing users to check a server every



time they access a file. If the user can access a specific location, they are authorized. The Authentication URL can also act as a notification when someone is attempting to access a file.

The authentication URL can modify any of the license types listed, as there is a URL field in each of the license dialogs. However, it is not a good practice to use this option as a primary means of authenticating users.

Adding additional licenses

By adding licenses to the current file, you can allow users who do not know the master password at least some rights. You can use password and certificate licenses in the same file.

Exercise: Add an Everyone license

1 Continuing in \Review\BSI300AE101-Plan.dgn, click Add access for everyone in the Digital Rights dialog.

2 In the License Properties dialog, type the purpose Review plan.

3 Enable the Print check box and click OK.

The Everyone license is added to the file. V and P (View and Print) are listed in the Rights column.


5 Click Open.

6 When the Password dialog appears, suppose that you do not know the password and click OK.

This time the file opens read only.

7 Click on the File menu to open it and note that the Print option is available.

You can see that export options such as Save As and Export are disabled. None of the File > Protect options are available. However, you can Print the file because the Everyone license you created allows that.

8 Click on the File is Protected icon in the status bar and select About Digital Rights from the pop-up menu.

The dialog shows information about the Everyone license used to gain access to the file.

9 Click OK.

10 Take a moment to review the levels of file protection for this file.

You restricted access to a file with a password and then added an additional Everyone license granting the view and print rights.



The Everyone license gives access to those who do not know the password. However, access is restricted to what is granted in the Everyone license. The red “read only” icon in the status bar shows that you can’t modify the file.

Protecting with a certificate is the preferred method because it is the most secure. When the certificate is applied, an author’s license with unlimited rights is created. The author uses a certificate for which they have the private key to protect a file. They then supply the corresponding public key to the recipients.

How certificates work

Before using digital certificates, individuals who are authorized to protect your digital property must obtain certificates from a certificate authority. A certificate authority is a trusted third party that issues digital certificates. Digital certificates, or digital IDs, make use of a technology called public key cryptography. During the initial enrollment process your system creates two keys; one public, which can be distributed and is posted to the certificate authority’s repository, and one private which is stored on your system. The certificate authority does not have access to your private key. It is generated locally on your system and is never transmitted to them.

Once a certificate is obtained, you can use it over and over to designate recipients. Certificates you obtain yourself are installed on the specific system used to obtain them, and you hold both the public and private keys to these certificates.

Warning: The integrity of your digital certificate depends on your private key being controlled exclusively by you.

The key pair and encryption

The digital certificate consists of a public key and a private key, or, a key pair. While the public key is published, or given, to other individuals, the corresponding private key is kept secret. Data that is encrypted with your public key can only be decrypted with your private key. It might be helpful to think of a public key as a lock which can only be opened by the corresponding private key.

Once a digital certificate is installed on your system, you can export the public key to a file to give to others so that they can use it to encrypt information for your use. Any information protected in this manner can only be decrypted by you.



You can then export only the public key to a file and import it onto any system. You can also export both the public and private keys to a file and import them onto any system. Though this can be done, remember that the integrity of the certificate depends upon careful control of the private key.

Open Internet Explorer and select Tools > Internet Options. Click the Certificates button on the Content tab. The Personal tab lists certificates to which you have the private key. The Other People tab lists certificates to which you have only the public key.

Protecting a file with a digital certificate

When certificate protection is enabled in MicroStation, the certificate Protect dialog lets you select a digital certificate with which you wish to protect the file.

Exercise: Enable password and certificate protection

1 Continuing in \Review\BSI300AE101-Plan.dgn, open the Configuration dialog.

2 Select the Protection category.

3 Edit the Enable file protection variable value to 1.

4 Exit the dialogs, accepting the changes.


6 Return to the project \Dgn folder.

To select a certificate that will ensure that you always have unlimited access, use the Choose Certificate icon. This opens the Certificates dialog which lists all certificates installed on your system. The Key column indicates whether a certificate has a private key in cases where the key is optional.

An example workflow might be an Enterprise level certificate with its public key given to an entire organization. The private key is only be held by project managers. Holders of the public key have permission to edit files so they can work on the project. However, only the senior staff can print or export the files to present to a client.

Exercise: Protecting files with certificates

1 Open \Sheets\BSI300AE501-Details.dgn.

2 Select File > Save As and save the file to the \Review folder.

3 Select File > Protection > Protect.

4 In the certificate Protect dialog, click Choose certificate.

This dialog lists all lists certificates installed on the system. The Key column indicates whether a certificate includes the private key.


Application Compliance

5 Click Cancel.

Use the Choose certificate file icon to open the Certificate files dialog and browse for exported certificate files. These are other individual’s exported certificates, which they have shared with you. You may use these certificates to encrypt files that only the holders of the corresponding private keys will then be able to access.

Only an individual who holds the private key that corresponds to the public key used to protect a file will be able to access it. This may be the case with a file that will be passed on for edit so it is protected with an editor’s certificate.

6 Click Cancel.

Warning: If you try to protect a file with a certificate sent to you buy someone else, or with one for which you do not have the private key, it could prevent you future access to your own file.

Unencrypting files

You can remove file protection from files by selecting File > Protection > Un-protect. You can also issue the key-in PROTECT ENCRYPT REMOVE to unencrypt without being asked to confirm the action.

Application Compliance

A compliant application checks for digital rights and does not perform any unauthorized functions such as printing, exporting, or modifying when restricted by the digital rights that have been granted. Many applications, including pre-existing applications, will be compliant automatically simply because they do not perform restricted functions. Other applications may have to be changed to become compliant.

MicroStation refuses to load any unauthorized applications when a user has less than unlimited rights. These are applications that are unsigned, digital rights incompliant and not signed by the file’s author. A user can safely use authorized applications and has no access to unauthorized ones.

Exercise: Author loads an unauthorized application

1 Continuing in \Review\BSI300AE501-Details.dgn, protect the file with a password.

2 Click Add access for everyone in the Digital Rights dialog.

3 In the License Properties dialog, enter the following:


Digital Signatures

Purpose: Review

4 Click OK.

5 Select Utilities > Macro > Project Manager.

You will load an unsigned application in the VBA Project Manager dialog.

6 If the application default.mvba is loaded, click Unload Project to unload it at this time.

7 Click Load Project.

8 Load the application \examples\ElementPlacementExample.mvba.

9 Click in the Auto-Load column so it will load every time MicroStation launches.

As the author you have added an unsigned VBA application which will be loaded every time a user enters MicroStation.



Exercise: As a restricted user, try to access the file

1 Open \Review\BSI300AE501-Details.dgn, bypassing the password.

An Information dialog appears. It informs you that only digitally signed, digital rights compliant, applications that have been authorized can be loaded.

2 Click OK to return to the File Open dialog.

As a user with less than unlimited rights, you are unable to access the file due to the presence of the unsigned application.

Note: A signed application can be used in earlier MicroStation versions and in non-protected files.

Note: Keep in mind that the digital rights granted for a file in MicroStation affect every type of application that attempts to load and run in the MicroStation environment.

Digital Signatures

Digital certificates, or digital IDs, bind an identity to a pair of electronic keys that can be used to encrypt digital information. You can use them to back a digital signature. In MicroStation, a file that is signed can have the state of all its models and file-level information captured. If any changes are made to the file’s models or to the file-level information, the signature is invalidated. It is then obvious that the file has been altered.


Digital Signatures

A company creating plans for a new government facility might request the required land base files. Before sending the files, the government would digitally sign those files to authenticate their identity. The company can then trust that this data came from the official source. Another scenario is that once construction plans are approved, no changes should be made. A digital signature can ensure that files remain unchanged.

What is in a digital signature?

While digital rights are something granted by me to you; digital signatures prove that you obtained something from me.

A digital signature is represented as a signature cell, a model signature, or a file signature.

A Signature Cell is a cell element displayed in a file. The cell contains only a coded version of the model or file that was signed and its references if the option to include them was selected. Also included are the signer’s certificate, the time of signing and any optional information specified by the signer, such as an expiration date, a purpose or a list of the dependent signatures if the signature is part of a hierarchy.A cell signature can apply to some models in a DGN file, but doesn’t have to apply to all of them.

A Model Signature captures the state of the data in the model it is signing. It captures the contents of all graphic and non-graphic elements, as well as model properties such as name, number, type and units. Contents of file wide, non-graphic data, such as shared cell definitions and font tables are included. The signature also includes reference attachment information if the option to include it was enabled by the signer.

A model signature can apply to some models in a DGN file, but doesn’t have to apply to all of them. This corresponds to the concept of signing each plot sheet in a set.

A File Signature captures the state of all models within a DGN file, plus file level information. Also included are contents of file wide non-graphic data such as fonts, shared cell definitions, etc. Summary properties that can be edited such as title, subject, category, keywords, comments, author, company, manager, and application are also included.

The shared status of the file that is set for the design history file sharing feature and the file format (V8, V7, etc.) are also included. Reference attachment information is included if the option to include it was enabled. Design history is excluded from the signature so that history can be used to manage signatures.

A signature includes all elements in the file or model, regardless of how much of the design can be seen. Using view controls, changing view attributes, or turning off levels will not


Digital Signatures

restrict the scope of a signature. All elements will be signed, regardless of whether they are displayed. All elements will be signed, even if no views are open and all levels are off.

Warning: Digital signatures created with MicroStation V8 2004 Edition or later are not backward compatible with V8.1. If you create digital signatures with 2004 Edition, make sure users with whom you exchange these digital signatures are also using it. MicroStation now uses an algorithm for key generation that is stronger than the one used in the 2004 Edition. Although both algorithms are industry standard, a file protected using the default new key generation algorithm cannot be opened in the 2004 Edition. If you require compatibility with the previous edition, you can set the configuration variable MS_PROTECTION_V8_COMPATIBILITY to force MicroStation to use the weaker algorithm.

While working with digital signatures, even something as simple as executing the Save Settings command can invalidate a file signature once it is signed, because it creates a file level change. If users are in the habit of Saving Settings when exiting, they should not do so when using digital certificates, or at least not when using File signatures. This means that you do not want the User Preference “Save Settings on Exit” enabled for any users who may be working this way. Compress on Exit does not affect the digital signature.

Note: The status of the signatures in the Digital Signatures dialog is updated when the file is written to. After making a change, wait for the disk icon to appear at the right of the status bar indicating that the file is being updated.

Changes that will not invalidate a digital signature

The following are excluded from a model signature, which is applied on a model by model basis, so changes to these areas will not invalidate the signature.

• The last modified time of each element

• Any archive flag on each element

• The m and n (modified and new) properties flags on graphic elements

• A signature will exclude and ignore other signatures

• Reference attachment data, if the signature does not include references

Additionally, the following are not included in a File signature, which applies to an entire file, so changes in these areas will not invalidate the signature:

• File path and name

• File size

• The application association (Open With)

• Attributes, such as read only or hidden

• Changeable summary properties, including revision number, date last saved, last saved by, edit time, security, modified time, and accessed time


Digital Signatures

• Security properties

• Custom properties

• MicroStation session data, including last user and computer to access the file

• Licenses defined by file protection

• Design history

• All custom properties and all nested property sets

Creating a signature cell to sign files

Digitally signing a model or file can be used to indicate approval of the design. Another user sees the signature and uses it to verify that the design has not been changed since it was signed.

To create a signature cell, do the following.

1. Create a cell library.

2. Place the element to be used as the signature. A text element is an obvious choice for a signature cell, but other elements are allowed.

3. Use the element to create a Point cell in the cell library. The cell type must be Point.

4. Open the cell library you created as a DGN file.

5. Open the Models dialog and open the model representing the signature cell you created.

6. In the (Tools > Digital Signatures, Digital Signatures icon) Digital Signatures dialog, click the Add Hidden Model Signature tool. You must use a hidden model signature to sign a signature cell.

7. In the Add Hidden Model Signature dialog, click the magnifying glass to the right of the Certificate field.

8. Select the certificate you want to use from the Certificates dialog and click OK. Then enter the rest of the information in the dialog and click OK. The signature is added to the Digital Signatures dialog. A check mark in the Verified column indicates that the signature cell is valid.

Note: You can not place a signature cell if its signature is not verified.

9. Select File > Close without making any further changes. Now you can use the Place Signature Cell tool from the Digital Signatures toolbox to place the cell.


Digital Signatures

The Digital Signatures dialog

Signatures that have been created are listed in the body of the dialog, along with information about them.

Exercise: Look at the Digital Signatures dialog

1 Open \Review\BSI300AE501-Details.dgn, supplying the password.

2 Select Tools > Tool Boxes > Digital Signatures.

3 Digital Signatures toolbox, click Digital Signatures.

• The Verified column has a check mark if the signature is verified. Verified means that the signed data and prerequisite signatures have not changed. There is an X if the signature is not verified.

• The Trusted column indicates whether the signature is based on a certificate that is trusted. A certificate is trusted if it was issued by a trusted CA and is not expired. If the certificate is trusted, there is a check mark. Otherwise, you see an exclamation point.

• The Scope column shows the signature scope.

• The Certificate column displays the name and E-mail address associated with the certificate used for the signature.

• The Signer is the person signing the file. This defaults to the current user’s login name which is useful if the certificate name is different from the signer’s real name.

• Location defaults to the system where the certificate is. This could be a location code, building name, or other identifier.


Signature hierarchies

A signature can be made to depend on other signatures by creating a hierarchy. The new signature certifies both the file content and the other signatures. This signature hierarchy not only captures signing order, but also records which signatures were required by the new signature.

The dependent signature will be invalidated if any prerequisite signature is deleted or invalidated. When this happens the dependent signature remains invalid even if the prerequisite signature is revalidated so that the signing order is preserved.

Nested hierarchies can also be created. A nested hierarchy is created when a new signature becomes dependent on a pre-existing signature that has prerequisites of its own. There is no limit on the depth of a signature hierarchy. The same signature can be a prerequisite of several dependent signatures, so that hierarchies can overlap.


Digital Signatures

Signature hierarchies and signed references

Suppose that, in the project you are working with, the file containing the entire project was signed off by the original draftsman. Then the work on the model that represents Phase I was marked as accepted by the senior drafter. This phase of the project was then accepted and approved by the project engineer. Contingent upon the validity of the signatures of both the senior drafter and project engineer, this phase was finally approved by the project manager.

What will happen if the design is changed?

The project engineer’s model signature included references.

If a reference is moved, this model signature would be invalidated because it included references.

The project manager’s signature did not include references.

But, since it is based on a hierarchy that includes the project engineer’s signature, it would also be invalid due to the reference move.

Only the senior drafter’s cell signature, which did not include references, is valid.

If you add a file signature to the file, it includes the entire file including models, file properties, etc. You can see it when you are in any model.

If you delete any element in the file, the file scope signature is invalidated. But if you open another model that is signed with a model scope signature, that signature will not be invalidated.

Referencescolumn


Module Review

Signatures and design history

A digital signature does not include the contents of design history. A signature looks at the current state of a model or file, while design history holds previous or alternate states. A signature is not invalidated when changes are committed to design history because a commit does not modify the state of the design.

Design history can be used to restore broken signatures. When a model is changed, any signature attached to it becomes invalid. Design history can be used to restore the original signed state of the design. This causes the signature to be valid again because the contents were restored.

Design history can also be used to restore deleted signatures. If a signature is deleted, it counts as a change to the DGN file that can be committed to design history. Design history can then be used to undo that change, restoring the signature. The restored signature will be in a valid state only if the rest of the design is in the exact state that was originally signed.

Module Review


Questions

1 True or False: File Protection makes the contents of a protected DGN file inaccessible to unauthorized persons, even if they hold a copy of the file.

2 Why would you digitally sign a model or file?

3 True or False: A signature can cover the content of a model or file and all of its references.

4 What is the scope of a file signature?

5 True or False: A cell signature can apply to some models in a DGN file, but doesn’t have to apply to all of them.

6 True or False: A signature cell must be a graphic cell.


Module Review

Answers

1 True.

2 Digitally signing a model or file can be used to indicate approval of the design.

3 True. A signature can cover the content of a model or file and all of its references including DGNs and DWGs.

4 A File Signature captures the state of all models within a DGN file, plus file level information. Also included are contents of file wide non-graphic data. It includes the entire file including models, file properties, etc. You can see it when you are in any model.

5 True.

6 False. It must be a point cell.


Module Review


Single and Multi-Sheet Printing

Module Overview

This module discusses how to use the MicroStation printing system to manage and create printed output. Print Organizer is a utility for creating, managing, and publishing project deliverables and is a replacement for the Batch Print utility.


• Fundamental knowledge about MicroStation’s printing system

• Knowledge about view controls

Module Objectives


• Specify the print area

• Set print attributes

• Send data to the printer

• Save a print configuration

• Use pen tables

• Create and populate print sets

Nov-08 279 Single and Multi-Sheet Printing





Questions

1 What is a printer driver?

2 In the Print dialog, how is the initial print area determined?

3 What is the difference between using the Windows printer and a Bentley printer driver?

Answers

1 Software that converts the data to be printed to the form specific to a printer.

2 When the Print dialog is opened, if the active model is a sheet model, the print area is obtained from it. If no sheet definition exists, but there is a fence, the fence defines the print area. If no sheet definition or fence exists, the print area is the first open view window.

3 Selecting Windows driver automatically loads the Windows printer driver configuration file. Bentley drivers are text files that supply all the necessary information to create a print or plot, in a particular plotter language format.

Printing Single Sheets

Printing can be as simple as setting up a view or placing a fence around the area of interest and clicking the Print icon. Typically, the result will be printed output of what you see on the screen.

Single and Multi-Sheet Printing 280 Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

The Print Dialog

The Print Dialog

The Print dialog is the interface where you select and edit printer driver files, create pen tables to re-symbolize printed output, create print configuration files and view a resizable preview of the print.

General settings

Specifying the Print Area

The initial print area is determined as follows.

• If the active model contains a sheet, the print area is obtained from the sheet. The print scale is set so that all sheet contents are maximized within the page.

• If there is no sheet and a fence exists, the fence defines the print area. The print scale is set so that all fence contents are maximized within the page.

• If there is no sheet or fence, the print area is set to the first open view. The print scale is set so that all view contents are maximized within the page.

When the Area option in the General Settings area of the Print dialog is changed, new view, fence, or sheet parameters are obtained from the MicroStation environment. The print area mode control behaves like the Update View view control.

View options

First select the type of area to print and then select the view containing the area from the View option menu.

Color

These options let you select the output format from Monochrome, Grayscale, or True Color. Available options depend on the capability of the printer you’re using. When the Plot to 3D check box is enabled, the color is set to True Color and cannot be changed.

Nov-08 281 Single and Multi-Sheet PrintingCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

The Print Dialog

The Rasterized option

To use this option, the printer driver must support raster, so you can not create rasterized prints using the Bentley HP-GL/2 printer driver.

Rasterized printing recognizes transparencyThe Print previews show an element without transparency behind and element with transparency

The image on the left is a preview with the Rasterized setting off, on the right the Rasterized setting is on

You can output a print as a single raster image or as a mix of vector and raster data. Rasterized printing works by generating a display list from a model, then rendering that display list into raster tiles or bands before writing them to the plot file. The printer driver file determines whether tiles or bands are used.

The size of the tiles or bands is important to performance. The larger the tile, the faster the plot, but more memory is used. Tile sizes are also limited by the capabilities and available memory of the video card. A system’s display settings must also be set to use 24-bit color, true color.

Use the Rasterized check box in the General Settings section of the Print dialog to toggle the option.

• If all views that will be printed are not rendered, you can toggle the Rasterized option.

• If the active view is rendered, or if any reference presentation is anything other than wireframe or wiremesh, the mode is set to Rendered and the Rasterized setting is not available.

This setting can also be set with the key-in PRINT RASTERIZED <OFF | ON>.

Setting print attributes

Features in the Print dialog allow you to select the sheet size, set the scale for the print, and position the print on the selected sheet.


The Print Dialog

Printer and paper size

Use controls in this area to select the driver, set the paper size and select the output device.

Windows drivers

When using the Windows printer driver you can select a pre-defined paper size and define orientation.

While form size definitions are not available in the default printer driver file, printer.pltcfg, custom paper sizes can be defined using the standard Windows print manager dialog.

The Full option

When you are using the Windows printer you can enable the Full check box to maximize the portion of the sheet that is used. When you are printing to an 8.5 x 11 sheet, the maximum print size may be only 8 x 10.5. If full sheet is enabled, the maximum print size will be 8.5 x 11. Some geometry may be clipped by the printer if it falls into the area around the edge of the paper that can’t be printed by the printer.

Bentley drivers

Page size

When you are using the Bentley driver you can edit the dimensions of the selected paper size when the Allow paper size editing user preference is enabled. Or you can use the paper size options in the Bentley print driver file. These paper sizes can be changed within the Bentley print driver file.

For Bentley printer drivers, the X & Y values in the plot file page size are important how the output is oriented on the paper. In the case of hpgl2.pltcfg, the X size indicates the amount of paper that will be spooled out of the printer. So, for a form whose long side should lie along the width of the roll, it is important that the page size be defined in portrait mode. If the X & Y size values are reversed, the long side of the output will be aligned with the length of the roll. The orientation control lets you reverse the X & Y values.

Preview

If you are printing a landscape view, but your driver requires a portrait orientation, then the print preview will display on its side. To change this you can set the configuration variable MS_PLTDLG_FORCE_PREVIEW_ORIENTATION to AUTO to force the preview window to draw itself with the same orientation as the design, regardless of the orientation of the paper size definition. Other values for this variable are landscape and portrait, for those who work with a single drawing orientation.

Note: Note that this variable does not apply to printer.pltcfg.


The Print Dialog

Total area vs. usable area

With Bentley printer drivers and printer.pltcfg, the paper size represents the usable area. Everything within this area will be printed with the exception of lines residing precisely on the paper boundary. Typically, the usable area is smaller than the physical paper dimensions. The usable area is shown in the preview window by a rectangle. Data outside this rectangle will not be printed.

Destination options

A print’s destination can be set in the Print dialog instead of the Windows print dialog. Select from Send to printer, Create plot file, or Create metafile.

• When printing with a Bentley printer driver, Create plot file is the only available choice. If the plot file is configured to write directly to an LPT port, this is the same as Create plot file.

• Send to printer is available only when using a Windows printer driver. The print is sent to the selected printer, using the selected printer driver.

• Create metafile is available only when using a Windows printer driver. This option creates a Windows enhanced metafile (.emf).

This setting can be adjusted with the key-in PRINT DESTINATION <DEVICE | METAFILE | PLOTFILE>.

Print scale and position

When you set the scale for a print you are defining the number of design units, in working units, that equal each paper unit in printer units. You can key this value into the Scale field or you can click the magnifying glass and use the Scale Assistant dialog to define criteria.

Note: Changing the Scale, Size or Origin automatically results in changes to the corresponding parameter to maintain the aspect ratio of the print. If you specify an origin, the Auto-center check box is automatically disabled.

Rotation

Select Rotate 90 cw for a rotation of 90° in the clockwise direction to be applied to the printed output. Rotate 90 ccw applies a rotation of 90° in the counterclockwise direction. 180 applies a rotation of 180°.


The Print Dialog

To enable non-orthogonal rotation, turn off Hide advanced layout controls in the Print dialog’s Settings > Preferences Print Preferences dialog.

Use the Rotation field in the Print dialog to specify any rotation from 0 to 360 degrees for prints that are not rendered and do not contain a camera definition.

Note: For rendered or camera prints, the rotation edit field is automatically replaced by the option list.

Mirror

Another advanced option is the Mirror option menu. You can mirror printed output about the x- and y-axis. If the Hide advanced layout controls print preference is enabled, this option is not displayed.

Exercise: Set up printing configuration


Project: Geospatial

2 Open \Designs\BSI200-R01-Environmental.dgn.

3 Select File > Print.

4 Note in the General Settings section that Area is set to sheet since you are in a sheet model.

5 Select Settings > Units.

6 Select cm.

7 Set the printer driver to Bentley Driver and click Select Printer Driver.

8 In the Select Printer Driver File dialog, select the hpgl2.pltcfg driver and click Open.

The printer name is in the Print dialog title bar.

9 Set the paper size to ISO A1 in the Printer and Paper Size portion of the dialog.

10 In the Print Scale and Position area, set Scale to 200.

Print position

When the size of the print is smaller than the paper size you can enable the Auto-center check box to center the print on the paper.

You can also position the by entering a size and origin. The long edge of the print area is automatically aligned with the long edge of the paper.


The Print Dialog

Note: Once print attributes have been set, the default behavior is that, if a fence is placed after the Print dialog opens, the attributes revert to their default settings.

Working with borders

A default MicroStation installation includes sample border files in the ANSI, Architectural and ISO sub-folders of the ...\Workspace\System\Borders folder. These are files that you can use as references to the designs you want to print or place as cells inside the files you want to print.

To find out how much of a design will fit on paper at the required scale, place a border that represents the printable area of the paper at the required scale in the DGN file. Do this by using a border specifically created for the scale of the design.

Or, use a border created at 1:1 scale and then scaled up to the scale of the design. Then to create the print, place a fence along the border, specify the desired scale as the print scale and create the print.

In each sample border file there is the Default model in which the title block is drawn at full scale. This model then is referenced to other models for various scales. The description for each model includes an example of the size required for any text to produce standard size text in the printed output.

Levels

Level states are automatically updated whenever a print or preview operation is performed. This eliminates the need to use Settings > Update from View if the only change has been to modify the level display.

An exception to this is if a configuration file (.ini) was loaded. In that case, the level display states were obtained from the .ini file and are not overridden unless you use the Update from view tool.

User preference settings

Many print settings that previously were only available using configuration variables are now stored in the user preference file and can be changed Settings > Preferences dialog.

One preference, Thumbnail preview time-out, controls the period of time that the thumbnail preview paints. When the Print dialog first opens, the thumbnail preview paints for 10 seconds before stopping to allow the rest of the dialog to refresh. If the print preview is not complete within that time period, a message appears in the status bar. Change the amount of time using this setting. The preference Show print status dialog determines whether users see the Print status dialog at print time.


The Print Dialog

Raster support

To access raster printing settings such as quality, brightness, and contrast, select Settings > Raster Options to open the Raster Options dialog.

Changing these settings does not affect the selected printer driver. Changes are valid only for the current session.

Sending data to the printer

• If Send to printer is selected in the Printer and Paper Size section of the Print dialog, printed output is sent to the system print manager. The Print in Progress dialog displays the print's status and you can cancel the print job.

• If Create plot file is selected and its File Name property is not set to a port or other printer, then the Save Print As dialog opens and continue to next step.

This property appears in the Default Print File Name category on the Base Properties tab in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog.

If this property is defined for the Windows printer driver, the Print dialog destination is set to Create plot file whenever this printer driver configuration file is loaded.

If the default print file name is set to a UNC share or LPR port, such as “\\printserver\hp1055” or “10.8.0.1”, the Print dialog sends the print directly to the printer rather than creating a plot file.

To name, create, and save the print file, use the Save Print As dialog just as you would the Save As dialog.

The default print file extension is .000 unless otherwise specified by the Extension property in the printer driver configuration file. If a numeric default extension is used, such as “.000,” the extension proposed in the dialog automatically increases with the creation of each additional print file having the same file name. For example, bracket.000, bracket.001, bracket.002….


The Print Dialog

The Extension property specifies the default print file extension.

In the .pltcfg file, Property or Record Name is the Extension. The Syntax is to use a dot operator (.). Values can be cal, hpgl, hprtl, jpg, pdf, png, ps, tif. The default is to set to the extension that is appropriate for the selected printer driver.

• If Create metafile is selected, printed output is saved as an enhanced metafile (.emf).

Exercise: Creating a print file

1 Continuing in BSI200-R01-Environmental.dgn, click Print in the Print dialog.

The print file name combines the file name with the driver designation. You can change the print file name, extension or location.

2 Click Save.

Through a parallel port

To send a print file to a printer through a parallel port, first open a DOS window (session). At the system command line, type:

copy /b <print_file> <port>

where:

• print_file is the print file to be sent.

• port is the parallel port on your system to which the printer is connected. For example, lpt1: or lpt2: (Wintel systems) or prn (DEC Alpha).

• /b it the switch specifying that the file is binary

Through a parallel port without creating a print file

In the dialog, adjust the controls as desired and click the Print icon. In the Save Print As dialog’s Name field, type the name of the parallel port, for example, lpt1: or lpt2: (Wintel systems) or prn (DEC Alpha).

Directly to a printer from the Key-in window

This is without creating a print file. In the Key-in browser, type:

PRINT <configuration | VIEW view_number | FENCE <output_device>

where:


The Print Dialog

• configuration identifies the print configuration (.ini) file upon which to base the printed output.

• view_number is the view number where VIEW is specified.

• output_device specifies the destination printer. For example, lpt2: or \\printman\laserjet1. Output_device may be omitted when "printer.pltcfg" is the printer driver configuration file.

PDF support

Generate a single page PDF of the DGN file using the printer driver pdf.pltcfg. You can use Batch Print to generate a multiple page PDF file with one page per file. A bookmark is generated for each page by default. To view and print PDF files, use the free application Adobe Reader.

Exercise: Generate PDF output

1 Continuing in BSI200-R01-Environmental.dgn, in the Print dialog, click Select Printer Driver.

2 Select pdf.pltcfg.

3 Click Open.

Options for output

You can edit the PDF printer driver to include many options when PDFs are generated. Some are as follows.

• Bookmarks

• Individual levels and references

• Engineering links

• Version of the PDF file format

• Password

• Searchable text

• Page size, extents or paper size

Special syntax applies to these options but the plot file already contains the on/off qualifier strings. Remove the semi-colon from the beginning of the undesired line and inset a semi-colon in the beginning of the desired line. Save the changes.

If you select the FileOptionalContent option in the PDF printer driver before generating a PDF file, the levels and references will be individually viewable in the Layers tab of Adobe Reader. To toggle level and reference display, use the controls in the Layers tab’s hierarchy listing.


The Print Dialog

Note that the outFile qualifiers let you control how files are numbered. File size can be smaller because the color table can be reduced when using fewer colors. There are enhancements for level output.

Exercise: Determine PDF output

1 Continuing in BSI200-R01-Environmental.dgn, in the Print dialog, select File > Edit Printer Driver Configuration.

2 On the Base Properties tab, expand the Driver Properties section and click in the field to the right of the Print Optional Content property.

3 Select As Created.

4 Click in the field next to Level Label and select Level Name.

5 Click in the field next to Author and type your name.

6 Expand the Default Print File Name section.

7 Set Auto Increment Extension to True.

8 Close the dialog, saving changes.

9 In the Print dialog, select File > Reload Printer Driver Configuration.

10 Click Print.

11 Save the print with the default name.

Exercise: Explore features

1 In Windows Explorer, navigate to the PDF in the Geospatial project’s \Out folder and open the file.

2 Use the view controls at the top to navigate the image.

You can fit the page and the width, zoom in and out, and rotate the image.

3 In Acrobat, select Tools > Analysis > Measuring Tool.

The Distance Tool is similar to measuring the distance between points and the angle is also reported. The Perimeter Tool reports the last distance and angle and the total perimeter. The Area Tool is similar to measuring an area by points.

You can select View > Navigation Panels > Layers to add that tab. Select the Layers tab and a master file will be listed by itself in the top tier of the hierarchy. Each directly attached model is listed on the second tier, along with each level name in the master file, and each raster image attached to the master file if any. The third tier lists nested references and the level names and raster images for each directly attached reference. Saved views will also be saved and listed in the hierarchy.

4 Close the PDF and select File > Close in MicroStation.


The Print Dialog

Driver formats

The .plt printer driver configuration file format has been superseded by the XML-based .pltcfg format. When you open a .pltcfg file for editing, it opens in the Printer Driver Configuration editor.

Note: Existing .plt files are still supported, but they are no longer delivered.

Windows printer drivers

Selecting Windows Printer automatically loads the windows printer driver file printer.plt. You select another printer by clicking the Configure Windows Printer icon. You can access and change the system printer properties from here, rather than going to the Control Panel.

You can create multiple Windows printers to the same physical device, each one with different settings. Copy printer.plt with different file names, each one referencing a different Windows printer by name. This can reduce steps in the printing workflow, while taking advantage of all the settings offered. For example, printer_fold.plt and printer_nofold.plt can point to one Windows printer, differing only in the fold media setting.

Bentley printer drivers

A set of printer drivers for various types of printers and plotters is delivered. Bentley drivers are drivers that create print information in industry recognized formats.

When you select the Bentley Driver, the Bentley printer driver file that was last used is loaded by default. You can select another file using the Select Printer Driver icon to access the available files. Bentley printer driver files are text files that supply all the necessary information to create a print, in a particular printer language format.

Modifying printer drivers

Hint: If you want a default paper size to appear in the print dialog, edit the printer driver configuration file and, on the Paper Sizes tab, enable the Is default paper size check box.


The Print Dialog

Printer Driver Configuration editor

The Printer Driver Configuration editor lets you add and edit .pltcfg printer driver configuration files, which are stored in XML format. Select File > Edit Printer Driver Configuration in the Print dialog to open.

When defining symbology, you can edit more than one option at a time by selecting while pressing the Ctrl key. After names are selected, click Edit to open a dialog where you set desired values.

The Edit Paper Size(s) dialog opens when you select paper sizes on the Paper Sizes tab and click Edit

On some tabs you can click Add to add an individual paper sizes, fonts or programs to the file or you can click Remove to remove individual entries.

General tab

This tab shows the selected printer driver configuration file’s name and location and the printer driver for which the file is intended.


The Print Dialog

Base Properties tab

This tab has settings that are used to edit properties defined for the selected printer driver. The categories that are included, as well as the properties within the categories, depend on the printer driver. Click the downward arrows to expand categories.

• General properties, such as automatic centering, line cap and join, number of copies and the default output mode are set in the General category.

• Depending upon the type of driver that is selected, you will see a Windows Printer or Driver Properties category. Set properties related to the type of driver, such as the default printer and orientation for Windows drivers or properties related to specific non-Windows drivers.

• There are also categories for border print properties (on or off, content of border text, height, fence outline) and raster printing (on or off, quality, brightness, contrast, grayscale).

• The Printer Communication category includes the printer communication properties.

These properties are available only for the PostScript printer driver. They are the communication properties used to generate the print file and send it to the printer. Generally the default properties are sufficient. However, if the printer is used with other software that requires different communication properties, you can use the Printer Communication properties to meet those requirements.

Note: If you find zingers, incomplete, or no printed output at all, make sure the communication properties of the printer driver configuration file match the printer setup.

• Advanced section contents let you set the advanced properties that are in printer driver configuration files. Contents depend on which printer driver was selected.

Paper Sizes tab

This tab has settings that are used to edit, add, remove and reorder the paper sizes defined for the selected printer driver.

Color Maps tab

This tab has settings that are used to edit the color maps defined for the selected printer driver. You also can remove all existing color maps.

Enable the Define maps from design color to print symbology check box to define design color to print symbology. If this is disabled, all existing color maps will be removed.

To edit, select a design color and click Edit.


The Print Dialog

Note: This functionality, as well as symbology mapping for weights, is also available using pen tables. One advantage to defining print symbology in a pen table is that one pen table can be shared by multiple printer driver configuration files.

Color mapping, left from the Printer Driver Configuration editor, and in a pen table

Weight Maps tab

This tab has settings that are used to edit the weight maps defined for the selected printer driver configuration file. Select a design weight and click Edit. You also can remove all existing weight maps.

Enable the Define maps from design weight to print width check box to define design weight to print width assignments. If this is disabled, all existing weight maps will be removed.

Line Styles tab

This tab has settings that are used to edit the print line style on/off patterns defined for the selected printer driver.

Enable the Define print line style patterns check box to assign on/off patterns in paper units for each MicroStation line style index. If this is disabled, all existing line style patterns will be removed.


The Print Dialog

You can indicate how each pattern should be applied, either by the printer or by software inside MicroStation, using the Process style in software option. To find this, select the style number and click Edit.

Process style by software inside MicroStation enabled

Font Maps tab

This tab has settings that are used to edit, add, remove, and reorder the design font to print font maps defined for the selected printer driver.

Enable the Define maps from design fonts to hardware, or Windows or TrueType, fonts check box to map MicroStation resource fonts, AutoCAD SHX font, and Windows TrueType fonts to printer fonts. If this is disabled, all existing font maps will be removed.

This functionality is available only for the Windows and PostScript printer drivers.

Note: Note that defining font maps may result in text having a different appearance on the print than it does in on the screen.

Programs tab

This tab has settings that are used to edit, add, remove and reorder operating system commands defined for the selected printer driver.

Enable the Define pre-print and post-print program commands check box to define operating system commands to be run either before or after a print.


The Print Dialog

If this is disabled, all existing program commands will be removed.

Print Definition files

It is not necessary to go through the complete set up each time that you require printed output. You can create a print definition (.pset) file and save it. These files contain the design file-specific information required to recreate prints, streamlining repetitive printing tasks.

Print definition files have replaced print setup or print configuration text (.ini) files. Print definition files created with the Print dialog contain a single print definition.

Print definition files let you save the printing parameters for a design file. These parameters include the area to be printed, the design file specification, page size, margins, and scale. Where a pen table is attached, this too is saved as part of the print definition file. Once saved, you can recall the print definition file at any time to create printed output of the same area of your design file.

Open Print Definition File on the Print dialog’s File menu lets you select a print definition file whose extension may be either ".pset" or ".ini". An .ini file is a legacy print configuration file format. A .pset file is the Print Organizer print set file format. The Print dialog can read both .ini and .pset files, but can write only .pset files.

When the Print dialog reads a .pset file, it only opens the first print definition in the set. When the Print dialog saves to an existing .pset file, only the Print dialog's print definition is saved. Any other print definitions in the file will be lost.

The initial directory for the Open Print Definition File dialog is determined by the first directory in the MS_PRINTDEF_PATH configuration variable, if defined. If the variable is not defined, it defaults to the most recently used directory.

The .pset file format stores the design file specification, and that design file is automatically opened when the print dialog opens the .pset file. If the design file cannot be opened, the .pset open attempt is aborted.

The .ini file format does not contain the design file specification; therefore, you should open the proper design file, and then open the .ini file. If the .ini file does not match the currently loaded design file, an error is produced if the dimensions are different. Otherwise, as much of the .ini file is read as possible, which may or may not result in the desired print definition.

Note: When using print definition files on DGN files other than the one used to create them, the DGN file must have the same working units and fenced location as the one that created the print configuration file.


Printing Sets of Files

Creating a print definition file

Use the controls in the Print dialog to identify what to print and adjust the printing setup as desired. Then select Save Print Definition File from the Print dialog's File menu.

In t he Save Print Definition File dialog’s File name field, type the new print definition file name. By default, the extension “.pset” is added to the file name.

Modifying a file

Select Open Print Definition File and open the file. Use the controls in the Print dialog to modify the entity to print or adjust other print settings as needed. Save the file, overwriting the old file.


When you need to produce printed output from sets of design files and models, use Print Organizer. Print Organizer creates print sets, which are used to identify, save, recall, and print a particular set of files and models.

Print Organizer

Print Organizer is a batch printing utility for printing and reprinting sets of files and models stored in a print set file. The individual files and models within a print set file are referred to as print definitions and can be hierarchically grouped in folders and sub-folders.

Print definitions are created when you add files to a print set. Each print definition consists of a reference to a design file to be published, like a sheet model in a design file, along with properties such as size, scale, and form name that determine how the design file will be published within the print set.

Assigning the proper values to print definition properties is an essential part of creating a print set; therefore, Print Organizer provides several methods to specify print definition properties and each method is used in a different context.

Print Organizer and the Print dialog are similar in several ways.

• They both use the same printer driver configuration files and the same utility to edit them.

• They both use the same method for locating printer driver configuration files.

• They both use the same method for selecting a default printer driver configuration file.

• They both use the same procedure for determining how the default printer is selected.



Viewing a print set

Print Organize’s right frame displays print definitions in a table, where each row is a print definition and each column is a print definition property. Using Print Organize’s in-place editing, you can edit individual properties for one or more print definitions. Select the print definitions and double click on the property in a specific column such as scale, rotation, or units to specify the new property value. Some properties require you to type in the property value, while others have option lists.

Print Organizer provides several viewing tools to let you display as much or as little information as necessary. Find these options on the View menu.

• Toolbar: Toggles display of the toolbar.

• Status Bar: Toggles display of the status bar. The status bar displays the printer driver configuration file, the number of print definitions in the print set, and the number of print definitions selected.

• Show/Hide Columns: Opens a dialog where you can toggle display and arrange columns.

• List: Displays all print definitions as a list without showing their properties. Similar to Windows Explorer.

• Details: Displays all print definitions in tabular form, where each row is a print definition and each column is a print definition property.

• View all Print Definitions: Displays all print definitions below a selected folder in the right frame, even if they are in sub-folders.

• Show in Groups: Lets you display all print definitions, showing their corresponding folders or sub-folders, in the right frame.

Selecting a printer

The first step in printing a set of files or models is to select a printer driver configuration file. If you use the Print dialog to select and configure printer driver configuration files, you will find it just as easy to perform the same tasks with Print Organizer.



Print Organizer stores the active printer driver configuration file in the user preferences file. When Print Organizer is opened, the most recently used printer driver is selected by default.

Just as with the Print dialog, when Print Organizer is first opened, the Bentley Windows printer driver, printer.pltcfg, is selected as the default printer driver configuration file, assuming that this setting has not already been overridden using configuration variables.

To select a printer driver, in the Print Organizer dialog, select File > Printer Setup. In the Printer Setup dialog, click the Browse icon, the magnifying glass. In the Select Printer Driver dialog, select the printer driver configuration file, and then click Open.

Note: Always check with an administrator. The default printer driver may be pre-set using a configuration variable.

Hierarchical print sets

Print Organizer lets you define hierarchical organized print sets that best reflect the ordering of their published output. Print sets consist of a collection of print definitions and folders. Print definitions can be organized inside folders, with sub-folders and print definitions inside each folder. Print Organizer preserves the hierarchy defined in the print set when publishing PDF documents.

Creating Print Sets

Print Organizer authors print set (.pset) files as a container for print definitions, folders that group print definitions, and global information pertaining to the print set. Each print definition consists of a reference to a design file to be published, like a sheet model in a design file, along with properties, such as size, scale, and form name that determine how the design file will be published within the print set.

Print Organizer lets you define hierarchical organized print sets that best reflect the ordering of their published output. To define this type of print set, you first create folders and sub-folders below the root folder. Print definitions, which are created when files are added, are then organized in the folders and sub-folders.

Hierarchical organized print set



By default, the root folder gets its name from the print set name. When you save the print set with a different name, the root folder name changes accordingly.

Selecting design files and models

You drag and drop files from Windows Explorer, Project Explorer, or the Models dialog to add files to Print Organizer. You can also use the Add Files to Set menu item or the Add Files to Set icon.

Print definitions are created when you add files or models to a print set file. Each print definition consists of a reference to a DGN file to be published, like a sheet model in a DGN file, along with properties, such as size, scale, and form name that determine how the DGN file will be published within the print set.

Print Organizer and Project Explorer

You can drag and drop DGN file, model, or saved view links from Project Explorer into Print Organizer. You can also right click these type items and select Print Organizer to create a new print set.

Composing Print Sets

You can compose a print set file using Project Explorer and Print Organizer. File, model, or saved view links in Project Explorer can be added to a new or existing print set file.

To compose a new print set file, right click a file, model, or saved view link and select Print Organizer from the pop-up menu. If Print Organizer already has a print set file open, you will be asked to save the changes for the existing print set file; otherwise, the Create Print Definitions dialog opens with the selected links displayed in the Input files list box. The Input files list box displays various objects using the following format: DGN file name, model name, saved view name.

The Create Print Definitions dialog lets you specify print definition creation options to the objects in the Input files list box. You can specify a print style to apply a collection of print definition creation options, or you can click Manually Specified Options to open the Print Definition Creation Options dialog to specify print definition creation options.

Note: If the object in the Input files list box is a model name, the model selection method in a print style or in the Manually Specified Options is ignored. Also, if the object in the Input files list box is a saved view name, the model selection method and the view name in a print style or in the Manually Specified Options is ignored.

You can also drag and drop file, model, and saved view links into an existing print set file. You can create a link to a print set, or individual print definitions.



How to compose a new print set file using Project Explorer and Print Organizer:

First, select File > Project Explorer to open Project Explorer. The active link set’s name is at the top. Locate and right click the file, model, or saved view link that you want to add, and select Print Organizer from the pop-up menu.

Print Organizer's Create Print Definitions dialog opens with the selected links listed. The names are presented in ‘DGN file name, model name, saved view name’ format.

You can select a print style or select Manually Specified Options to open the Create Print Definitions dialog. When the print definition has been created, click OK, and then select File > Save As to save the print set file.

Exercise: Create a print set with a folder hierarchy


Project: Civil

2 Open \Sheets\BSI400-C01-Cover.dgn.

3 Select File > Project Explorer.

4 Click the Manage Link Sets icon (magnifying glass) and, in the Link Sets dialog, set the option to Selected File.

5 Move up one level and select \dgnlib\civil.dgnlib.

6 Close the Link Sets dialog.

7 Expand the Civil Print Set.

8 Right click any file link and select Print Organizer.

Print Organizer opens with the Civil Print Set .pset file open and the selected sheet highlights.

9 Select File > Printer Setup in Print Organizer.

10 Click Browse (magnifying glass), select pdf.pltcfg, and then click Open.

11 Click OK.



12 Click Add Folder to Set and name the folder Detail Sheets.

13 Select the Civil folder in the left frame, so that the contents show in the right frame.

14 In the right frame, select the last two files and move them into the Detail Sheets folder.

You can specify your own options when adding the files or models. do this by clicking Manually Specified Options to open the Modify Properties dialog.

• The Main tab is used to specify area, layout, paper, and resymbolization parameters for the selected print definitions.

• The Advanced tab is where you specify workspace, color and raster options, update from design file, and update print definition name for the selected print definition.

• On the Fence tab, the model selection and fence creation methods determine how many print definitions are created from each source object in the Input files list box.

If a DGN file that contains three sheet models and one design model. If the model selection method is Prefer sheet models, three print definitions will be created; one for each sheet model. If the model selection method is All models, four print definitions will be created; one for each model.

• The display tab is used to specify various display attributes for the selected print definition.

Exercise: Add files to the set

1 Continuing in BSI400-C01-Cover.dgn, in the Print Organizer dialog, create a sub-folder named Profiles under the Civil folder.

2 Select the folder, and then click the Add Files to Set icon.

3 In the Create Print Definitions dialog, click Add.

4 Select BSI400-Plan.Profile.dgn from the \Drawings folder, and then click Done.

5 Click Manually Specified Options.

6 On the Fence tab, set Create Print Definition from Models to All models.

7 On the Main tab, Layout section, set the size and scale to Maximize.

8 On the Advanced tab, set the User workspace to examples and the Project workspace to Civil.

9 On the Display tab, disable the Points and Text nodes check boxes and click OK.

10 Click OK.

Six print definitions are added.

11 In the Print Organizer, select File > Save As.



12 Save with the name BSI400.pset.

You can navigate the folders and sub-folders of a print set file in Project Explorer to see the individual print definitions. You can also view and print a print set file link using Print Organizer. To view a print set file link, double click it or right click the link and select Print Organizer from the pop-up menu.

PDFs with hierarchical bookmarks

Print Organizer lets you create PDF output that preserves the hierarchy defined in the print set. This is applicable to only to Print Organizer, and only relevant for print sets containing folders. The folder names display in the PDF output as Bookmarks.

Exercise: Export to PDF

1 Continuing in BSI400-C01-Cover.dgn, in Print Organizer, right click the BSI400 folder and select Print.

2 In the Print dialog, click Printer Setup.

3 In the Printer Setup dialog, click the Edit (pencil) icon.

4 On the Base Properties tab, expand the Driver Properties section.

If Enable Bookmark Hierarchy is on, the bookmarks inside the PDF file reflect the print set hierarchy visible in Print Organizer. If the PDF bookmark property is disabled, only the base print definition names appear in the PDF bookmarks section.

5 Since the default is On, close the dialog without making any changes.

6 Close the Printer Setup dialog.

7 In the Print dialog, enable the Open print file after creation check box and click OK.

If you have Adobe Reader or Acrobat available, the file will open.

Note: The output is placed in the \WorkSpace\Projects\Examples\Civil\out directory.



8 Close the Adobe application.

9 In MicroStation, select File > Close.

Print preview

Print Organizer lets you preview prints of individual print definitions. Selecting File > Print Preview or clicking the Preview icon opens a resizable Preview window, which lets you preview the designs prior to printing. You can select an individual print definition to preview, or preview an entire folder and then use the arrows at the top of the dialog to page through the folder’s contents.

Print Styles

Print Styles let administrators define and reuse named collections of print definition properties. Print Styles are created using Print Organizer's Define Print Styles option on the Tools menu, and are stored in the open DGN file or in the configured DGN libraries. Print Styles are applied using Print Organizer or the Print dialog.

Print Styles are useful if you frequently use the same print definition properties every time you print. For example, if you always print at a particular size with a specific pen table, you can define those print definition properties in a Print Style and have them automatically applied to a print set. This is accomplished by identifying a print style as a default print style or by assigning a print style to a printer driver configuration file.

Administrators can store groups of commonly used print definition properties in a Print Style and then you can reference them on demand. This method of referencing print styles is helpful when you use a group of print definition properties for a specific project or on an occasional basis.

Working with Print Styles

While you are working in Print Organizer you can apply a print style to one or more print definitions. After you have selected the print definitions, you can select Tools > Apply Print Style to open the Apply Print Style dialog. This dialog displays the print styles in the open


Pen Tables

DGN file and in the configured DGN libraries. Print styles that display with bold text reside in the active design file. To apply a print style, select the print style and click OK.

Editing definitions using a print style

To edit one or more print definitions using a print style, in the Print Organizer dialog, select one or more print definitions. Select Tools > Apply Print Style. Select the Print Style and click OK.

Opening JOB files

Print Organizer provides a seamless upgrade for Batch Print users. Legacy data created for the Batch Print utility such as pen tables and job set files are supported in Print Organizer.

Select File > Open to open a print set (.pset) file or a job set (.job) file. When Print Organizer opens a job set file, each corresponding model in the job set is converted to a print definition. The print definition properties come from the print specifications stored in a batchplt.spc file. Therefore, it is necessary to have access to the batchplt.spc file when initially opening a job set file in Print Organizer.

Note: Print Organizer cannot save to a job set file.

Pen Tables

Pen tables allow you to resymbolize your design. In other words, you can produce printed output that looks different from the on-screen view of the design. Thus, from a single design file, by using different pen tables, you can produce printed output having different element symbology to that of the original design. Pen tables are created using the Print dialog's pen table editor and are stored in a file on disk. They are supported in both Print Organizer and the Print dialog.

A pen table contains instructions for resymbolizing printed output. The instructions are contained in sections within the pen table. For each section there are element evaluation criteria used to select the elements you want to modify. There is also a set of output actions that specify what you want to do the elements. During processing, the pen table tests for the presence of specific types of elements and their related characteristics. If these elements are found, the pen table will operate on them as directed.


Pen Tables

You can open a V7 pen table in MicroStation V8 and you will have access to all the new functionality if you choose to edit the pen table. However, any changes that you save to an older pen table will automatically update it and make it unusable in previous MicroStation versions. MicroStation BASIC macros are no longer supported.

Creating pen tables

Create pen tables in the Modify Pen Table dialog, opened by selecting PenTable > New.

You can create pen tables to apply the parameters you want to any DGN file. Some pen table features depend upon the active print driver as some have additional options because of the language they use to communicate with the printer.

Exercise: Create a pen table


Project: Geospatial

2 Open \Designs\BSI200-R02-Land Acquisition.dgn.

3 Open the Print dialog.

4 In the Print dialog select PenTable > New.

5 In the Create New Pen Table file dialog, name the new pen table General.tbl and click Save.

When a pen table is opened, any sections present are listed in the Element Selection Processing Order list. These sections can be moved up or down using the buttons.

Global actions are completed without regard to section definitions. They are applied across the entire DGN file and across all levels within the file. Global actions cannot be focused on any specific section.

You can apply more than one section to an element. If Multiple element sections is enabled in the Pen Table Options dialog, the sections are selected and applied in descending order, starting at the top of the list and working downwards. By default, this is disabled, and once a section has been selected by its input criteria and its output actions applied, pen table processing on that element stops.

Text substitutions

This feature lets you replace text in a design during printing. This can be done with standard text string variables for text items such as the date, time, or file name. Once a pen table is created, access the Text Substitutions dialog by clicking the button.

The Actual and Replacement fields must be populated for the text substitution to work.


Pen Tables

• The actual field is the text string in the DGN file that will be replaced. Type the text string that will be used for the substitution process. The text that is entered in this field is what exists in the DGN file.

• Text entered in the replacement field is what is used to perform the text substitution. For example, it will replace $DATE$ with 12/20/08 or Street with St.

Use Edit menu items to insert a new item and then fill in the fields. You can also use items here to insert values such as the file, sheet or model name, date, time and others.

Pen maps

Instead of relying on element based output actions, you can create design-color-to-output-color, output-width, output-grayscale, and output-screening mappings.

This method is implemented like pen records in the printer driver file, so you can have color and width resymbolization on a per-stroke basis. The order of resymbolization is that first, any pen records defined in the .pltcfg file are applied. Next, any pen maps in the pen table are applied. If desired, you can disable individual pen table pen maps in order to keep the .pltcfg definitions. Finally, any RGB-color, grayscale, screening, and/or millimeter-width actions in the pen table's element based output section are applied.

Note: Pen table pen maps are only supported for printer drivers using change_pen=color, or both.

You can assign screening to pen definitions as an alternative to using pen tables to achieve print screening. It permits screening on a per stroke basis instead of per element. The PEN record syntax is as follows.

pen(pen_number)=(colors, weights, or levels) /GRAYSCALE

It is possible to define grayscale pen definitions without explicitly specifying the RGB color components. The PEN record syntax is as follows:

pen(pen_number)=(colors, weights, or levels) /SCREEN=<value between 0.0 and 100.0>

As with pen table screening, 100.0 indicates no screening and 0.0 results in pure white.

Redefining pen color

You can apply multiple output color and width symbology to different parts of the same element, based on the component colors. For example, an element with a multi-colored custom line style or an associative hatch linkage definition with a different color can be


Pen Tables

assigned unique widths for the specific colors using pen color maps. Pen color maps correspond to printer driver pen records, and can be overridden using element based output actions.

Redefining pen weights

You can also specify print output widths for each of the MicroStation weight values. These correspond to the weight_strokes record in the printer driver file. Weight maps have lower priority than both pen color maps and element based output actions.

Pen Table Options dialog

This dialog is used to control pen table options. Click the Pen Table Options button at the bottom of the Element Selection Criteria tab to open it.

Level symbology

The Element symbology comparison mode setting affects only the way in which the input criteria treats level symbology. There are two modes.

• As stored in element header means that the element header symbology is matched against the input criteria.

• As displayed in view means the view symbology is matched against the input criteria.

The pen table output actions are always applied, regardless of whether level symbology is enabled.

Applying multiple sections to elements

You can set a pen table to apply more than one section to an element.

If Match multiple element sections is enabled, the sections will be selected and applied in descending order, starting at the top of the list and working down.

• If the pen table turns blue elements cyan, then a later section makes cyan elements dashed, the elements will be dashed.

If this setting is disabled, once a section has been selected by its input criteria and its output actions are applied, pen table processing on that element stops.


Pen Tables

• If the pen table turns blue elements cyan, then a later section makes cyan elements dashed, the originally blue elements will not be dashed.

Complex and compound elements

Use options to control whether pen table processing will treat cells, shared cells, dimensions, multi-lines or tags as single units or as individual elements.

When treating as a single unit:

• Only the complex/compound header is processed by the pen table. All of its children inherit any output actions applied to the header.

When treating as individual elements, or exploding:

• The complex/compound header is ignored by the pen table.

• Complex chains and complex shapes are always treated as single units.

• Individual elements cannot be processed by the pen table more than once.

Note: When reading a pen table created in earlier editions of MicroStation, the Explode tags check box is enabled by default. This ensures compatibility between the two editions as previously, tag elements were always exploded.

The Element Selection Criteria tab

Settings on this tab determine which elements in the DGN file are selected for processing. You do not have to define all the settings. Where a setting is not defined, all options for that setting are included. For example, if you do not set a color or range of colors, elements of all colors are selected.

Note: Once an element is selected by a certain criteria, it can not be selected again. If a blue dashed line is identified by the blue criteria and selected for processing, it can not be identified again by the dashed criteria and selected for further processing.

Disable section

The Disable Section option lets you remove a section from the process without deleting the section or changing its position in the processing order. This is helpful when debugging pen


Pen Tables

tables, as you can disable individual sections and then test to see if a problem can be reproduced.

Model Format

This option lets you to test whether an element is from a DGN or DWG/DXF model. The default selection is Any.

Files

Select this to open the Identify Files dialog, which is used to identify references for a pen table section based on their slot numbers or logical names.

Type

This list box contains a list of element types. A type is selected (against which an element is evaluated) by highlighting it. The Edit menu has the following relevant menu items: Clear Types and Set All Types.

Attributes options

Use these options to enter criteria into the corresponding fields.

Level regular expression

You can use regular expressions to select levels. For example, if you type a.* in the Level regular expression text box, the pen table section will match every level beginning with a.

The comparisons are not case sensitive. If a pen table contains a list of levels and a regular expression, all must match the element level name for the pen table section's output actions to be applied.

Element Output Actions tab

Do not plot

All elements matching the current section will not be printed. When selected, this option causes all other items on the Output Actions tab to be disabled.

Priority

Pen table priority is only supported for 2D files. Priority applied to 3D files is ignored. Priority is implemented through Z depth, using hardware acceleration when possible, so the pen table is no longer required to make multiple passes through the element list. This permits actions such as assigning different priorities to individual components of a shared cell.


Pen Tables

Color and Fill

• By Index uses the MicroStation color table as a palette to select from

• By RGB lets the user define red, green and blue values to mix any required color that falls outside of the existing color palette

• Grayscale calculates the equivalent grayscale value to the color being plotted. If the color is dark blue, the plotted grayscale value ends up a dark gray. If the color is yellow, the plotted grayscale value is a light gray

You can redefine fill color using the same options. Note that fill color output actions in the pen table no longer affect pattern color, since an element's fill and pattern colors are unrelated in MicroStation.

Screening

Screening causes an element to become lighter in color. If an element is screened 95% you will see little change. However, if an element is screened 5%, then the element is left with only 5% of its original content and it will display as mostly white. Screening shows in a print preview.

When you screen an element, the element remains opaque and continues to overlap or cover the elements below it. It blocks out anything that resides below it or that was drawn before it.

Transparency

Specific transparency can be specified. By default, the transparency print attribute (Settings > Print Attributes) is enabled whenever a pen table that contains transparency output actions is attached.

Fill Pattern

Fill Pattern lets you change the pattern in filled shapes. You can see elements through the pattern and you can print on top of them.

Width

You can assign a predefined weight, called By Index, or you can define By MM or By Inches. This lets you assign line weights that are not predefined in the print driver.

Line Cap

If the centerline of the example objects is the drawn line, and the outside border is the pen thickness, you see how the shape of the cap affects the output. If you place a line that meets another line at a vertex and neither of these lines are joined, the lines will cap themselves independently.


Pen Tables

Here, Cap 1 is Flat, which does not add anything to the end of the line. Cap 2 is Square, which adds half the thickness of the line to each end. Cap 3 is Round, which adds a round cap with a radius of equals half the line thickness.

Line Join

This condition occurs at the vertex where two lines meet and are drawn in succession, as in line strings, shapes, complex strings and complex shapes. You can define how these elements behave at the vertex in a pen table.

You can define line join by element.

The thin line is the actual line and the outline is an exaggerated pen widthWhen plotted these would appear solid

Exercise: Modify the fill

1 Continuing in BSI200-R02-Land Acquisition.dgn, in the Print dialog, the print preview displays a map that consists of a filled area.

2 From the Modify Pen Table dialog, select Edit > Rename Section.

Bevel Miter Round


Pen Tables

3 In the Rename Section dialog, replace NEW with change fill color and click OK.

4 On the Element Selection Criteria tab, make the following changes:

Type: Complex Shape

Click Fill Color, set to 222, and click OK

Output actions are associated with each pen table section. Output actions specify what is to be done once an element meets the section’s element criteria, similar to Select By Attributes.

5 On the Element Output Actions tab, make the following changes:

Fill: Enabled and set to On

Fill Pattern: Enabled and set to Cross Hatch

6 In the Modify Pen Table dialog, select File > Save.

7 Close the Modify Pen Table dialog.

8 Click Print.

9 Click Save.

10 Open the PDF.

The fill is crosshatched.

11 Close the Adobe application.

12 In MicroStation, select File > Close.

AutoCAD CTB and STB files

The print system automatically detects any AutoCAD plot style tables (.ctb or .stb) specified in the active layout of a DWG. If one is present and enabled, the plot style table is


Module Review

automatically converted into a memory resident MicroStation pen table and attached to the plot.

This behavior is controlled by Honor sheet plot style table in the Print dialog’s Preferences dialog. Plot style tables are searched for in the AutoCAD plot styles directory first, and if not found, the MS_PENTABLE search path.

CTB Color 255

When converting a CTB file into a MicroStation pen table, AutoCAD color numbers 1 through 254 are mapped to MicroStation color indices 1 through 254.

The CTB file has an additional assignment for AutoCAD color number 255. MicroStation does not permit pen map resymbolization of color index 255 (the background color), so in V8.5 this assignment was mapped to MicroStation color index 0. CTB files do not contain assignments for AutoCAD color number 0, as AutoCAD does not let you draw in that color.

Since MicroStation users expect colors 0 and 7 to be pure white when working with DWG files, the MicroStation pen table ignores the CTB color 255 mapping and makes pen map colors 0 and 7 the same, with output assignments taken from color 7.

Module Review


Questions

1 What are the first steps in specifying what is to be printed?

2 What does the full option do?

3 True or False: Level states are automatically updated whenever a print or preview operation is performed.

4 Name two ways to add files to a print set in Print Organizer.

5 What is a pen table?


Module Review

Answers

1 You first choose the type of area to print and then choose the view containing the area from the View option menu.

2 Maximizes the portion of the sheet that is used.

3 False. If a configuration file (.ini) was loaded the level display states were obtained from it and are not overridden unless you use the Update from view tool.

4 You drag and drop files from Windows Explorer, Project Explorer, or the Models dialog to add files to Print Organizer. You can also use the Add Files to Set menu item or the Add Files to Set icon.

5 It contains instructions for resymbolizing printed output.


Module Review


Google Earth Tools

Module Overview

This module discusses the Google Earth environment and the connection to MicroStation that lets you publish DGN and DWG models.


• Knowledge about working units

• Knowledge about cells

Module Objectives


• Define a geographic location

• Define a placemark monument

• Remove a placemark monument

• Export Files

• Use the 3D warehouse

• Set Google Earth settings

• Use Google Earth tools

Nov-08 317 Google Earth Tools





Questions

1 How do you set working units?

2 How do you enter text in an enter_data field?

Answers

1 Set them in the Working Units category of the DGN File Settings dialog or in the Drawing Scale dialog. Save settings after selecting the units.

2 Use a fill in enter data field tool from the Text tools or use Edit Text and click on the field in the text editor.

The Google Earth Environment

The Google Earth environment provides you with an interface to planet Earth. Through this connection, you can publish DGN and DWG models which can be viewed and navigated overlayed on the geographic imagery. Google provides a free viewer download from http://earth.google.com/.

MicroStation files placed in the Google Earth environment can contain links to more detailed data that can be reviewed locally, turning the Google Earth environment into a system for project information in formats including Excel spreadsheets, Word and PDF documents, additional DGN and DWG files, and URLs. All kinds of project information can be shared through the Google Earth interface.

How it works

You export geometric data so that it can be viewed in the context of satellite data, aerial photography, maps and other geographical data. You then get an aerial view of your geometry and the geography. However, the Google Earth environment is not intended to be a detailed CAD viewer. It is not intended for visualizing geometric detail. It is important to select and export only the geometry that is valuable.

MicroStation provides data to the Google Earth application as KML (Keyhole Markup Language) documents, which are an XML based data structure. MicroStation geometry exported to KML retains the reference and level structure that is defined in a model. This lets you control display of individual levels, references, raster references, saved views.

Google Earth Tools 318 Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Defining Geographic Location

Defining Geographic Location

In order to accurately define the geographic location of a model, when exporting to Google Earth, you must provide both the model's location and its orientation. There are three methods by which you can do this.

• Use the Bentley Map application and their associated projection capabilities to handle geographic projections.

• Use a single Placemark Monument to define the location of a known point in the model, and then use the DEFINE NORTH key-in to indicate the orientation. In order to use this method, the geometry must be drawn accurately and the working units must be set correctly so that the geometry size is known.

• Place two or more Placemark Monuments to provide the complete projection transform (location, orientation, and scale). This method is useful when accurate scale and orientation information is not known and an approximate projection is sufficient. When this method is used a “best fit” transformation is calculated to provide the best match to the monument points.

• If you are not using the Bentley Map application, and there is no Placemark Monument in the model, the location of the model´s origin is derived from the latitude and longitude settings for Solar lighting, in the Global Lighting dialog.

Note: You can define North interactively from the Solar Lighting section of the Global Lighting dialog. Select Settings > Rendering > Global Lighting to open it.

Defining a Placemark Monument

A placemark monument is used to associate a geographical location from a Google Earth Placemark file to a Monument point in a model. Before you can do this, you must have created a Placemark file in Google Earth and then saved it as a KML type file.

Exercise: Create a placemark

If you have Internet access and the Google Earth application is installed you can create a placemark and complete the upcoming exercises.

1 Launch the Google Earth application.

2 Enter 19341 in the Fly to field and press Enter.

The application zooms to the location.

Nov-08 319 Google Earth ToolsCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


3 Use the view controls to zoom in on the area where routes 76 and 100 cross each other.

As you zoom in you will see Lionville. Go north and west to see Byers. The location you are looking for is a little South of this. This is the location of Bentley headquarters.

The intersection and the campus

4 Select Add > Placemark.

5 In the New placemark dialog, name the placemark Bentley Systems and enter the following:

Latitude: 40° 3'54.74"N

Longitude: 75°41'14.29"W

6 Click OK.

7 Right click on the new placemark name in the Places pane and select Save As.

8 Select a folder you will remember and click Save.



Placemark monuments in MicroStation are cells named KmlPlacemark. They have enter-data fields to hold the name, longitude, latitude and altitude of the monument.

The placemark cell is located in the cell library KmlPlacemark.cel in the \System\cell folder. It is placed automatically when you use the Define Google Earth Placemark Monument tool.

The origin of the cell represents the location of the placemark in the model and corresponds to the placemark in the Google Earth environment. Placemark cell geometry is placed on the level KML Placemark. You can turn this level off to avoid displaying or exporting the monument geometry. Scale is set by the active DGN file scale.

The file location can be modified by moving the cells. The longitude, latitude, and altitude values can be modified by editing the appropriate text elements.

Exercise: Define north


Project: General

2 Open Import-Export.dgn.

3 Open the Google Earth model.

4 Open View 2.



5 Open the Level Display dialog and turn off all levels for View 2 except Site Features.

6 Turn off display of all levels in the two references and close the dialog.

There are two existing Placemark cells in this design and you will place another.

7 Zoom In on the upper portion of the view until you can see the arrow feature.



8 Open the Key-in browser and type DEFINE NORTH BYPOINTS.

9 Press Enter.

10 In View 2, enter a data point at the center of the arrow feature and a second in the direction of the marker.

This defines north.

11 Close View 2.

If you defined a placemark and created a .kml file you can complete the following exercise.

Exercise: Define a placemark monument

1 Continuing in Import-Export.dgn, select Tools > Geographic > Open as ToolBox.

2 Select Define Placemark Monument.

3 In the Define Placemark Monument dialog, click the Browse for Placemark icon, navigate to and select the .kmz file you created.


Display in the Google Earth Environment

4 Click Done.

5 Enter a data point to place the placemark cell in the same location in which you saved the placemark in Google Earth.

The KML file information is now added to the DGN through the cell.

You can also use the Define Placemark Monument dialog to create a new placemark. Click the icon and enter the name, latitude, longitude and elevation. If you have an active GPS device you can create a placemark from a GPS location.

Exercise: Export to KMZ

1 Continuing in Import-Export.dgn, return to the Google Earth Environment.

You see the vector data superimposed on the geographic background.

2 Select the Export Google Earth (KML) File tool.

3 Save it as Import-Export.kmz.

The Google Earth and MicroStation data are now merged in a KMZ file.

By default, the file is saved in the same folder as the DGN.

Note: If you are working with MicroStation GeoExtension you do not need to define a monument point in a model.

Display in the Google Earth Environment

Options let you control the features that are displayed.

Exercise: Controlling display

1 In the Google Earth environment, examine the left frame.

In the navigation frame, expand Places > My Places > Temporary Places > Import-Export. Check boxes let you control display of Levels, Raster References, Reference Files, Links, and Saved Views.

2 Use the controls to change the Google Earth display.

3 Spend some time in the Google Earth environment exploring tools.

Exercise: Adding links

1 Continuing in Import-Export.dgn, select Tools > Engineering Links > Attach Engineering Link.

2 Click on an element that represents a building.


Removing Placemark Monuments

3 Enter the following in the Attach Engineering Link tool settings:

Link Type: HTML

URL: http://www.bentley.com/

Title: Bentley Systems


5 Add a link to another element.

6 In the Google Earth toolbox, select Export Google Earth (KML) File.

7 Follow the links in Google Earth.

Removing Placemark Monuments

To remove all placemark monument cells in a model use the key-in:

GOOGLEEARTH PLACEMARK DELETE

Exporting Files

Once you have created a placemark file and defined a placemark monument in a model, you can export the design geometry. You can export to SketchUp SKP, Google Earth KML and KMZ, and Collada DAE formats.

Select File > Export > SketchUp to convert MicroStation vector data to the SketchUp SKP format. Select File > Export > Google Earth to select the file type.

The KMZ file type is a compressed version of KML. Both file types are recognized and extracted automatically. Typically, KML documents are large, so the compressed form is preferable.

Collada files include support for textures, and can be used in other applications that support them. Export geometry to Collada (version 1.4) *.DAE files, by selecting File > Export > Collada.

3D Warehouse

MicroStation’s 3D Warehouse interface lets you open and place SketchUp models in designs. Through this interface you can directly access the 3D models available from the Google 3D


Configuration

Warehouse, or you can upload your models to 3D Warehouse in SketchUp format. Select Utilities > 3D Warehouse to access features.

• Select Open to open a SketchUp model, in read-only mode, from 3D Warehouse.

• Select Place As Cell or Place As Model to place a SketchUp model from 3D Warehouse.

• Select Share Model to upload your models as SketchUp files to 3D Warehouse.

Exercise: Place a SketchUp model

1 Continuing in Import-Export.dgn, select Utilities > 3D Warehouse > Place as Cell.

2 Select an image and click on Download Model.

3 Place the SketchUp model in the view.


Configuration

Control the default directory for the output KML files by setting the configuration variable MS_KMLOUT. If this variable is not set, the output directory defaults to the current DGN file location.

Working Off-line

The Google Earth cache is stored in the folder: \Documents and Settings\<user>\Local Settings\Application Data\Google\Google Desktop Search\.

Google Earth Settings

When geometry is exported, the view attributes and level settings come from the active view. It is important to set up a view exactly as you want it to display in the Google Earth application. Include only necessary data by turning off unnecessary levels and disabling text and dimension view attributes if they are to be excluded. This minimizes output.

The Google Earth Export Settings dialog has settings that control how geometry is exported. Open it by clicking the Google Earth Settings tool.



General settings

Google Earth Version options let you select the Google Earth version. Google Earth version 4 introduced support for textures. Select this version if you want to export geometry with textures intact.

Stroke Tolerance (Meters) controls the accuracy of the mesh approximating curves or curved surfaces. A smaller value produces a more accurate representation, but file size is larger and display is slower. Minimum Element Size (meters) is similar.

Transparency Override controls the level of transparency for the geometry. Including a level of transparency allows the geometry to be seen without obscuring the aerial photography below it.

Convert Custom Line Styles converts custom line styles to KML by dropping them to their individual components. This produces correct display of the line style but can increase file size and degrade performance.

Convert Raster References To Ground Overlays converts raster references in the X-Y plane to ground overlays. The raster references overlays are placed in a separate Raster References folder. Their display can be controlled as a group by selecting the folder, or individually by selecting the individual references.

Include Raster References in KMZ File includes raster references if you are creating a compressed KMZ output file.

Open File After Export will open the KMZ file in Google Earth after the export is completed.

Export Schedule Simulation controls whether schedule simulation information is exported to Google Earth. This schedule information, which includes tasks that simulate the construction or deconstruction of infrastructure is translated to Google Earth by placing time stamps on the associated geometry along with placemarks containing description, type, start time and end time of the tasks.

Note: Because Google Earth does not support disconnected time stamps, it uses the earliest and latest task times if there are multiple tasks assigned to it. Google Earth 4 is required to view time stamps.



3D settings

Render Mode sets the mode of shading. If a view is rendered and this is set to From View, then the display mode is taken from the active view.

Altitude Mode Controls the interpretation of altitude values in Google Earth, which has two ways of rendering the Earth´s surface. If the Google Earth Terrain setting is disabled then variations in altitude, such as mountains and valleys, are ignored. In this case, the Earth is depicted a perfect sphere (ellipsoid). If the Terrain setting is enabled then the variations in altitude in are depicted in the Google Earth display. The second setting applies only to 3D models. For 2D models, the Flatten To Ground option is always used. The options are:

• Relative To Ground: Altitude value is interpreted as a distance from the ground plane. Not desirable when there significant elevation changes on the ground plane, for example, around mountains.

• Absolute: All altitude values are interpreted relative to sea level.

• Flatten To Ground: All altitude values are interpreted as being at ground level. This setting is useful for any data that is truly 2D. For 3D geometry this has the effect of flattening the geometry and is usually not desirable.

The Altitude Bias setting specifies a value that is added to each coordinate in a KML file. A positive value will move geometry up from ground level, while a negative value will move geometry toward the ground. Since Google Earth is based on the physical representation of the Earth with coordinates specified by longitude, latitude, and altitude, geometry with negative altitude values typically are not displayed (obscured by the Earth´s surface).

Convert Wireframe Geometry in Rendered Views exports wireframe geometry, such as text, lines, curves, and dimensions along with shaded objects in a rendered view.

Captured geometry settings

Capture As means that Google Earth terrain is captured as either a mesh, where terrain is captured as a triangulated mesh, or a B-spline surface.

Capture Detail can be set from Low to Very High.

If Use Google Earth View to Determine Rotation is on, the Google Earth view perspective is maintained on capture. Where there is no information about the location of your model, it is


Google Earth Tools

assumed that your model's origin coincides with the center of the Google Earth view and that the y-axis is to be aligned with North.

If View Terrain is on, imagery is laid over the terrain surface. If off, imagery is laid over a flat surface.

Google Earth Tools

Capturing Google Earth images

Use this tool to capture the terrain and imagery of the current Google Earth view.

Terrain imagery is captured as a mesh or a B-spline surface, with the image attached to it as a material. The captured image will be at screen resolution and in monochrome (a Google Earth restriction). You can maintain your Google Earth view perspective on capture by checking the Use Google Earth View to Determine Rotation setting in the Google Earth tool settings.

Tips for capturing

• For best results, the Google Earth view should have the camera pointing straight down.

• In order to capture terrain, the Terrain layer must be enabled in Google Earth.

• Prior to capturing an image, it may be necessary to configure Google Earth. In the View frame of the Google Earth Options window, set Detail Area to “Large 1024x1024” and Graphics Mode to “DirectX”. Resize the Google Earth application window to the size of the graphics image desired.

How to capture a Google Earth image:

First, set up a Google Earth view displaying the required area. In MicroStation, click the Capture Google Earth Image tool. Enter a data point to capture the current Google Earth view.

Note: The use of the Google Earth images is restricted by the Google Earth License Agreement. Please consult this document to insure that your use of these images does not violate the restrictions.


Google Earth Tools

Synchronizing Google Earth views

You can move to the same view location and orientation in either MicroStation or the Google Earth application. Use this tool to navigate the Google Earth application to the location and orientation of the active view in MicroStation.

As the Google Earth application supports a camera model with a fixed lens length and restricts the camera to pointing downward only, the views will not always match exactly, but should provide a relatively good approximation for most views.

How to synchronize views:

First, set up the view as desired and select the Synchronize Google Earth View tool. If the Google Earth Application is not open, it opens automatically. Click on the desired element in MicroStation to zoom right to the area.

Follow a Google Earth view

Use this tool to navigate the active view in MicroStation to the location and orientation of the current view in the Google Earth application.

This tool will work only if the model’s view location is geographically close to the current location in the Google Earth application.

How to follow a view:

To match the active view to the Google Earth application’s view, set the view up as desired and select the Follow Google Earth View tool.

Play camera animations in Google Earth

Use this tool to play a MicroStation camera animation in Google Earth. Only camera animation are supported.

After you have created a camera animation in MicroStation, you need only to geo-locate a model in some way, such as by defining a Placemark. There is no need to export geometry to Google Earth.


Module Review

How to play a camera animation:

First, open Google Earth. In MicroStation, open the model containing the placemark information and the camera animation. Select the Play Animation Camera in Google Earth tool.

Note: Certain views, such as those that have the camera too close to the ground or not pointed downward enough, can cause problems in Google Earth, such as the animation being jumpy.

Module Review

Review questions

1 What is a placemark monument?

2 How do you set the scale of the KmlPlacemark cell?

3 Is it better to use the KMZ or KML file type when exporting?

4 Why is it important to set up a view exactly as you want it to display in the Google Earth application?

Review answers

1 These are used to associate a geographical location from a Google Earth environment placemark file to a monument point in a model.

2 Scale is set by the active DGN file scale.

3 KML documents are large, so the compressed KMZ form is preferable.

4 When geometry is exported, the view attributes and level settings come from the active view. You also want to include only necessary data by turning off unnecessary levels and disabling text and dimension view attributes if they are to be excluded.


Module Review


Appendix: Using the Settings Manager

Appendix Overview

This appendix describes how to use the Settings Manager to create groups and components and how to migrate existing components so they can be used as tools and templates.

Appendix Objectives

Upon completion of this module you will be able to:

• Create settings groups

• Create components

• Migrate components to styles

• Import .stg files using the Customize utility

Using Select Settings

Use the Settings Manager to create groups which contain individual components that have pre-defined attributes. Selecting a component makes the specified attributes active so that any elements that are placed will have the correct symbology. Dimensions, Multi-line styles, Patterns, Linear elements, Cells and Text can all be defined and preserved using the Settings Manager.

When using Settings Manager settings files, all of the saved components are stored in one separate .stg file, which is not associated with a DGN file format. While this file stores many attribute settings, including key-ins for element placement, pattern settings, and cells, it does not store all the associated parameters which are included in a DGN library. There are many benefits to using a DGN library to manage data, since attributes such as units or shared cell data can be captured. The Settings Manager is most useful for creating and storing hatch or pattern settings.

Nov-08 333 Appendix: Using the Settings Manager


Using Select Settings

Note: The dimension, multi-line and text definitions that are stored by the Settings Manager are different than the dimension, multi-line and text styles stored in a DGN library.

After you attach a .stg file, select a group and then select a component from the group

Exercise: Attach a settings file and select a component


Project: General

2 Open Standards.dgn.

3 Select Settings > Manage.

4 In the Select Settings dialog, select File > Open.

5 Select ...\Workspace\System\Data\styles.stg and click Open.

6 Select Element > Dimension Styles and select Style: (none) in the Dimension Styles dialog.

7 Select the Text tab.

8 In the Select Settings dialog, select the dimension style component Project Architect.

This makes the component’s settings active in the file and the settings in the Dimension Styles dialog change to match those stored in the component.

9 Close the Dimension Styles dialog.

New setting files, as well as groups and components, are created using the Edit Settings dialog.

Exercise: Create a new settings file

1 Continuing in Standards.dgn, in the Select Settings dialog, select File > Edit.

2 Select File > New in the Edit Settings dialog.

3 In the Create New Settings File dialog, type the name test and click Save.

The next step is to create descriptive groups which will hold the individual components.

Appendix: Using the Settings Manager 334 Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating Settings Groups

Creating Settings Groups

Settings groups provide the organizational structure for retrieving and using components. You can create groups which will sort components based on element type. Another option is to create groups according to discipline, such as proposed structural, existing structural, proposed civil, existing civil, etc. Under each discipline (group), you will have the actual standards pertaining to that discipline (components).

Note: Efficient use of settings groups requires that you first determine the working unit and scale settings to be used with the groups and the components you will develop.

Exercise: Create groups

1 Continuing in Standards.dgn, create a group by selecting Edit > Create > Group in the Edit Settings dialog.

An Unnamed group appears.

2 Select Unnamed in the edit field and type the name Multi-lines.

3 Press Enter.

4 Create a Text group.

Creating Components

The next step is to create the components which belong to the groups. Before creating a new component, select the appropriate group in the upper portion of the Edit Settings dialog. When a component is created, it is automatically put into the selected group.

There is a dialog for modifying each type of component. Many of the settings in the dialogs are similar. You may define as many, or as few, attributes as you want by toggling the check boxes. If a check box is disabled, MicroStation uses the active DGN file setting when this component is selected. However, if a box is checked, MicroStation changes the active setting to the value defined when this component is selected.

You can create components that execute key-ins when selected. Just type the desired key-in in the Key-in field in the Modify dialog.

Nov-08 335 Appendix: Using the Settings ManagerCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Creating Components

True Scale for cells

True Scale reconciles measurement units according to an appropriate conversion factor. When you work with a cell component that was created using one set of working units, such as feet and inches, and then have to work in a different environment, Metric for instance, mismatched sizes are automatically reconciled.

This is done by establishing a 1:1 scale between the active file and the component. Once reconciled, each time you use the component to place this cell in a design, its size will be correct for the current project.

Scale option

Once a component is reconciled, you can perform further scaling on the basis of the final print scale you will use. When you enable a component’s Scale option, it is processed according to the values specified each time you use the component. Use this with Active Point, Cell, and Area Pattern components.

Apply Drawing Scale option

Enable Apply Drawing Scale so that print units are set relative to design file master units. You can use this with Active Point and Area Pattern components.

Multi-line components

Creating multi-line and dimension components is different than creating other types. This Modify component dialog contains a Select button which gives you access to available multi-line and dimension styles which you apply to the component.

Exercise: Create a multi-line component

1 Continuing in Standards.dgn, in the Edit Settings dialog, select the Multi-lines group.

2 Select Edit > Create > Multi-line.

A new Unnamed Multi-line component appears.

3 Select Unnamed in the edit field and type the name break wall.

If the multi-line style that you want to apply to this component does not exist you must create it in the Multi-line Styles dialog and make it the active multi-line style. Then you can apply the multi-line style to the component.

4 Select Element > Multi-line Styles from MicroStation’s main menu bar.

5 Make Multi-line 5 the active style.

6 Close the Multi-line Styles dialog.


Creating Components

7 In the Edit Settings dialog select Style > Multi-Line.

The Edit Multi-line Styles dialog is where you assign a name to the Multi-line definition.

8 Click Get Active.

This captures the active settings and links them with the name you type, making the definition available for the Settings Manager to use.

9 Set the following:

Name: break wall

Description: Multi-line 5

10 Press Tab and then close the dialog.

11 In the Edit Settings dialog, double click on the break wall component.

The Modify component dialog appears.

12 In the Modify component dialog, enable the Key-in check box and type the following in the text field:

PLACE MLINE CONSTRAINED

13 In the Multi-line Definition section, click Select.

14 In the Select Multi-line Definition dialog, highlight the break wall definition and click OK.

This attaches the selected definition to this component. You do not need to set any of the other settings. If you checked the check boxes for Level, Color, Style and Weight the active settings in the file would be set to those of the component when it is selected. The line will be placed using these values. If you don’t check them, the Multi-line will be placed with the assigned attributes and the settings in the file will not change.

15 Click Save to save the modifications.

Dimension components

Dimension components are created the same way. Make the desired style active, or match the attributes of the desired dimension, select Style > Dimensions and associate the active style to a name to be used when the component is created.

Note: The Match button is not useful for matching all Multi-line and dimension settings because of the need to apply definitions to these components. The basic level, color style and weight attributes will be matched, but the definitions that really make up these components are not read.


Creating Components

Text components

The Modify dialog for Text components also contains unique controls. The options allow you to create precise text components. Almost all of the options from the General tab of the Text Styles dialog are available. When creating a text component using the Settings Manager, you can also specify a level on which the text will be placed. However, many of the more advanced text style options are not available using this tool.

There are other available settings, which are the same as those on the Advanced tab of the Text Styles dialog. Line Length sets the maximum number of characters that can be on one line. This option is useful for making sure that unneeded characters are not entered, such as with part numbers. The Fraction, Vertical, and Underline settings ensure that text components are, or are not, placed with these attributes.

Exercise: Create a text component

1 Continuing in Standards.dgn, in the Edit Settings dialog, select the Text group.

2 Select Edit > Create > Text.

3 Select Unnamed in the edit field and type the name Local notes.

4 Double click the component to open the Modify dialog, and review the options.

5 Click Close when you are done.

Text size and spacing

Use Paper Size lets you specify text heights and widths based on your output scale, not an actual size in the design. Before using this option, an active Paper Scale must be defined. To set the active Paper Scale, select the Scale option from the Category menu in the Select Settings dialog. Then, select a scale from the Select Scale dialog.

If the Use Paper Size setting is toggled on, it changes the effect of the Units and the text Height and Width settings. These values now refer to paper (hardcopy) sizes, not MicroStation unit sizes. The Paper Scale establishes the relationship between paper size and the master unit.

For example, assume the working unit definition is in feet and inches and text height and width are defined as 2”. If the Use Paper Size option is Off, the Settings Manager converts the 2” text size to Master Units. The result is text created that is 0.020833 feet high. If, however, the User Paper Size option is On and the current scale is defined as 1”:1’, the 2” text height is calculated as the printed height. The result is text created that is 0.25 feet high. By changing the current Scale to 1/4”:1’, the text would now be created as 1.0 feet high.


Migrating Components to Styles

This matrix shows examples of Paper Unit scaling to be used when you print with MicroStation and the Settings Manager.

Note: You must set up the paper units before placing components.

The Interchar spacing setting sets the distance, in working units, between characters in text when it is placed.

Line Spacing sets the vertical spacing, in working units, between lines in a multi line text element (text node) when it is placed.

Migrating Components to Styles

Exercise: Create a dimension style from a settings resource

1 Continuing in Standards.dgn, in the Select Settings dialog select File > Open.

2 Select ...\Workspace\System\data\styles.stg and click Open.

3 Select Element > Dimension Styles.

4 Select the Text tab.

5 In the Select Settings dialog, select the Dimensions Styles group.

6 Select the JIS Mechanical Template component.

The settings in the Dimension Settings dialog change to reflect the component’s settings.

If you want to change any attributes, change them now in the Dimension Settings dialog. The dimension style attributes can be further refined in the style settings if desired.

7 Click Create Style.

8 Name the new dimension style IS Mechanical Template.

9 Click Save Style.

That is all that’s required to migrate an existing dimension component.

Scale Master Units per Paper Units

Metric 1:100 100 to 1

English 1"=20' 1"=240" 240 to 1

English 1"=100' 1"=1200" 1200 to 1

English 1"=1000' 1"=12000" 12000 to 1

English 1/8"=1'-0" 1"=96" 96 to 1

English 1/4"=1'-0" 1"=48" 48 to 1

English 1 1/2"=1'-0" 1"=8" 8 to 1


Importing Using Customize


Note: If you wish to continue using the Select Settings format for selecting text and dimensions settings, you can still take advantage of styles. Simply modify the key-in line of the appropriate text and dimension components to be TEXTSTYLE ACTIVE <stylename> or DIMSTYLE ACTIVE <stylename>, where stylename is the name of the style that has been created from component.

Importing Using Customize

You can import data from one or more Settings Manager files into element templates and toolboxes. The contents of the .stg file are added to the active file’s list of template groups and templates, toolboxes and tools.

To import components and all their settings from the Settings Manager, select File > Import > From Settings Manager in the Customize dialog

If a Settings Manager file entry uses a key-in or a lock, then a corresponding toolbox and tool are generated when you import the template data.

If a Settings Manager file contains a template or tool that has the same name as a template or tool already in the active file, the template or tool will be imported and will have a number appended to its name in order to make it unique. This lets you compare the items and to decide which ones you want to keep.


Appendix Review

Appendix Review

Review questions

1 True or False: A .stg file stores parameters which are associated with the DGN file format.

2 What must you do before creating Settings Manager components?

3 How are component attributes applied?

4 What does true scale do?

5 What is different about creating dimension and multi-line components?

6 What does the paper size option do?

7 True or False: When you import Settings Manager data using Customize, existing templates or tools with the same names are overwritten.

Review answers

1 False. A .stg file stores many attribute settings, it does not store all the associated parameters which are included in a DGN library.

2 Create at least one group.

3 If an attribute’s check box is disabled, MicroStation uses the active DGN file setting when a component is selected. If enabled, MicroStation changes the active DGN file setting to the value defined.

4 It reconciles measurement units by establishing a 1:1 scale between the active file and the component.

5 Their settings must be active in the file to capture them.

6 It lets you specify text heights and widths based on your output scale, not an actual size in the design.

7 False. The template or tool will have a number appended to its name in order to make it unique. This lets you compare the items and to decide which ones you want to keep.


Appendix Review


Appendix: Digitizing

Appendix Overview

This appendix discusses the process of electronically transcribing the features of existing hard copy into electronic format.

Appendix Objectives


• Install and use the digitizer tablet interface

• Define a screen partition

• Match hard copy to a design

• Use MicroStation tools to digitize

The Digitizer Tablet Interface

MicroStation requires that you use a digitizing tablet or table. Note that the version for your system may not support the use of a digitizing tablet. For information about supported input devices, see the online Help topic MicroStation and Graphical Input.

Digitizing is the process of electronically reproducing the features of an existing hard copy drawing or map into a MicroStation design. A large tablet or table is recommended.

Accurate digitizing requires careful planning and setup of the relationship between the hard copy, mounted on the tablet or table, and the design plane, represented on the screen.

Requirements

In order to install and run the interface, you must have the following:

• MicroStation

Nov-08 343 Appendix: Digitizing


The Digitizer Tablet Interface

• A supported digitizer tablet

• A serial port

• Approximately 300 KB of available disk space

Installation

Enable the Bentley DTI WINTAB option, in the Utilities component, during product installation. This will create the following files in the same folder as the MicroStation executable:

• wintab.exe

• Installation program and wintab32.dll

• Windows drivers

Configuration

Configuration and setup to access the configured tablet consists of selecting four fields in the Bentley Tablet Driver dialog.

How to configure for access:

1. Double click wintab.exe in Windows Explorer, or start wintab from a Command Prompt window.

2. Select the specific tablet.

3. Select the tablet dimensions.

4. Select the number of buttons on your tablet's puck.

5. Select the COM port that the tablet is attached and click OK.

Testing the tablet and configuration

Double click wintab.exe. Move the puck around the tablet. The screen pointer should track the motion of the puck. If the screen pointer does not track the puck motion, see the online Help topic Configuring the Driver > Testing the tablet and configuration > Trouble Shooting.

Compatibility with other WINTAB Drivers

Only one WINTAB driver can control a serial port at a time. If you wish to use this driver in conjunction with any other Windows pointing device, plug your digitizer into another serial port. You will be able to use either driver by plugging your digitizer into the appropriate serial

Appendix: Digitizing 344 Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Digitizing

port. Some drivers attempt to probe both serial ports. If your current driver does this, it must be completely disabled or removed from your system.

Button assignments

Most digitizing pucks have at least four buttons. The command button is used to select commands on a digitizing tablet menu.

Typical tablet cursor button layout: (D)ata, (R)eset, (T)entative, and (C)ommand buttons

The default digitizing tablet button assignments are as follows.

Data = 1

Tentative = 3

Reset = 4

Command = 2

Cursor 1 /3 D Data = 5

Cursor 2 /3 D Tentative = 6

Cursor 3-12 = 7-16

Digitizing

Digitizing is the process of electronically reproducing the features of an existing hard copy drawing or map into a MicroStation design.

Nov-08 345 Appendix: DigitizingCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

Digitizing

Set up to digitize

First create a DGN file and model, setting up appropriate working units and views. It is recommended that you set up one of the views to encompass the entire drawing. Then partition the digitizing tablet surface.

Mount the hard copy to be digitized on the surface of the tablet. Locate the features you will be mapping to the DGN file over the digitizing partition, not over the screen partition.Next place monument points that associate known points on the hard copy with points in the design plane.

Select File > Save Settings to save the working units, view configuration, and the relationships specified by monument points, digitizer partitioning and setup. Then use any MicroStation drawing tool to trace the hard copy image.

Define the screen partition

Partitioning divides the surface of the digitizing tablet into two areas or partitions. One area, the screen partition, continues to provide standard tablet-to-screen mapping. Within the screen partition, moving the tablet cursor results in a corresponding movement of the screen pointer, regardless of what is displayed on the screen. The other area is the digitizing partition. Within the digitizing partition, movement of the tablet cursor results in a corresponding movement of the screen pointer only within the part of the design plane to which you are mapping features of the hard copy.

After you partition the tablet surface, you will notice a change in the behavior of the screen pointer, depending on whether it is in the screen or digitizing partition. When in the screen partition, the pointer moves on the screen in direct proportion to the movement of the tablet cursor. If you have two screens, the screen partition corresponds to the rectangular area encompassing both screens.

When the tablet cursor is in the digitizing partition, the tablet cursor position determines the position of the pointer in the design plane. MicroStation places the pointer in the first open view where the design plane position is visible. The open views are checked in sequence starting with the lowest numbered view. If the design plane position is not visible in any views, the pointer is not displayed. Nevertheless, even when you cannot see the pointer, you can continue to enter data points and place elements into the design.

The screen partition takes priority over the digitizing partition. If data points are entered in the screen partition, their position in the design plane reflects their position on the screen. Therefore, make sure not to stray into the screen partition while digitizing.


Tools for Digitizing

Match the hard copy to the design

Monument points are used to define the mapping of coordinates on the digitizing tablet to coordinates in the design plane. Thus, monument points are defined on both the digitizing tablet surface and in the design plane.

At least two monument points must be defined; more are recommended for increased accuracy. When only two monument points are defined, MicroStation assumes the hard copy is perfectly aligned on the tablet surface. If more than two monument points are defined, MicroStation can compensate for misalignment.

A monument point can be any point at which the coordinates on the hard copy being digitized are known. It is best to define several widely spaced monument points.

It is easier to place monument points in the design plane before setting up for digitizing, and then snap tentative points to them during setup and digitizing. To make monument points visible, place them with a line weight of at least 3.


The Place Stream Line String tool and the Place Point or Stream Curve tool in the Linear toolbox are particularly useful. With these tools, it is not necessary to press the data button to enter individual data points since MicroStation samples the movement of the tablet cursor and automatically records data points.

Stream line strings

Place Stream Line String is used for tracing images when digitizing. Many vertices can be defined without entering many individual data points. As you move the pointer, a line string is placed according to the Stream settings.

• Delta sets the minimum distance, in working units, between sampled points.

• Tolerance sets the maximum distance, in working units, between recorded data points.

Pay close attention to the tolerance. Very small values can lead to very large (in bytes) elements.

• Angle sets the angle, in degrees, that when exceeded, causes the last sampled point to be recorded as a data point.

• Area sets the area that, when exceeded, causes a sampled point to be recorded as a data point.



Smoothing a jagged line string

How smooth a jagged line string:

Smooth it out by converting it into a B-spline.

1. Select Tools > B-Spline Curves > Modify Curves.

2. In the Modify Curves toolbox, select Convert Element To B-spline.

3. Enter a data point on the line string.

4. Select Change To Active Curve Settings with appropriate tool settings and enter a data point on the line string.

Point and stream curves

Place Stream Curve is primarily used for tracing images when digitizing. As the pointer moves, a curve is placed according to the Stream settings.

• The Method option sets how the curve is defined.

Points creates a traditional MicroStation curve that is flat between the first and second and next-to-last and last data points entered. In many cases, B-splines are more accurate and easier to manipulate.

Stream is primarily for tracing images when digitizing. Many vertices can be defined without having to enter many data points. The movement of the tablet cursor is sampled and data points are recorded based on the Active Stream Delta, Tolerance, Angle, and Area.

• The Non-planar option is available if the Method is set to Points, and a space curve can be placed. The design must be 3D.

• The Delta option is available if the Method is set to Stream. It sets the minimum distance, in working units, between sampled points.

• The Tolerance option is available if the Method is set to Stream. It sets the maximum distance, in working units, between recorded data points.

• The Angle option is available if the Method is set to Stream. It sets the angle, in degrees, that when exceeded, causes the last sampled point to be recorded as a data point.

• The Area option is available if the Method is set to Stream. It sets the area that, when exceeded, causes a sampled point to be recorded as a data point.


Appendix Review

Appendix Review

Review questions

8 When mounting the hard copy you are going to digitize, do you place the features you will be mapping over the digitizing partition or the screen partition?

9 How do you associate known points on the hard copy with points in the design plane?

10 Which partition has priority?

11 How can you smooth a line string that appears to be jagged?

Review answers

1 The digitizing partition.

2 By entering monument points.

3 The screen partition takes priority over the digitizing partition.

4 You can smooth it out by converting it into a B-spline.


Appendix Review


Appendix: Imaging for Publishing

Appendix Overview

This appendix discusses utilities and methods for publishing content.

Appendix Objectives


• Interpret and modify the PostScript printer drivers

• Interpret and modify the HPGL2 printer driver

• Export to and import from CGM

• Work with raster data

PostScript Output

PostScript was designed and developed by Adobe Systems. It is a general purpose programming language that is optimized for printing graphics and text.

It describes images in a device independent manner. This means that the image is described without reference to any specific device features, such as printer resolution, so that the same description could be used on any PostScript printer without modification.

The PostScript drivers let you generate PostScript for use in documents (EPS), to be processed to PDF, or sent to a PostScript printer.

PSCRIPT

In pscript.pltcfg the properties appear in the Driver Properties category on the Base Properties tab of the (File > Edit Printer Driver Configuration) Printer Driver Configuration

Nov-08 351 Appendix: Imaging for Publishing


PostScript Output

dialog. In pscript.plt the records specific to this printer driver appear in a section at the end of the .plt file.

Properties

Language Level, CmdName /appname=“pscript” /command=“LanguageLevel” /qualifier=“<value>” in the plt file, sets the maximum PostScript language level to be used.

Title, CmdName /appname=“pscript” /command=“PostScriptTitle” /qualifier=“<value>” in the .plt file, is used to specify the title string embedded in the PostScript file.

Color Scheme, CmdName /appname=“pscript” /parsed=“colorScheme” /unparsed=“<value>” in the .plt file, is used to specify CMYK (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow/Black) output rather than the default RGB (Red/Green/Blue) output. It is undefined by default.

Encoding Vector, CmdName /appname=“pscript” /command=“EncodingVector” /qualifier=“<value>” in the .plt file, is used to set the font encoding vector. If this property is not defined, the printing system uses standard encoding. It is undefined by default.

Note: In a .plt file, before uncommenting either of these lines ensure that the associated .pro file contains a procedure called reencodefont.

Thumbnail Format, CmdName /appname=“pscript” /parsed=“thumbnail” /unparsed=“<value>” in the .plt file, is used to add a TIFF preview image to the output file. If this property is not defined, the printing system uses no thumbnail. It is undefined by default.

Thumbnail Pixel Size, CmdName /appname=“pscript” /parsed=“thumbnailResolution” /unparsed=“<value>” in the .plt file, is used to set the size, in pixels, of the thumbnail image.

Setup File Name, CmdName /appname=“pscript” /parsed=“importPsSetup” /unparsed=“<file_name>” in the .plt file, is used to include the contents of a file in the Setup section of the PostScript output file. You must specify the appropriate file name. It is undefined by default.

PDF

Use pdf.pltcfg to directly create PDF documents. Edit the pltcfg file in the Printer Driver Configuration dialog.

Properties

PDF Version is used to select the version of PDF that is created.

Appendix: Imaging for Publishing 352 Nov-08Copyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

HPGL2/RTL Print Driver

Enable Bookmarks and Enable Engineering Links are used to include or omit these features.

Enable Optional Content is used to enable or disable optional content in files, such as references and levels.

Print Optional Content controls how optional content in levels and files is printed. Changing the property to As Created lets you turn on or off levels and references for display purposes, but forces all printouts to use the original display states.

Enable Searchable Text is used to enable or disable searchable text.

Level Label is used to specify what is used for the level labels in optional content.

RGB Raster Compression is used to specify the RGB (Red/Green/Blue) raster compression. It affects only true color raster data, not palette color or monochrome raster. By default, true color raster is converted to palette color or monochrome when the conversion won’t harm color depth. When using JPEG RGB compression, this can actually result in larger PDF files. Therefore, if you change the RGB compression mode to JPEG, you also may want to set the Optimize Raster Color Depth property to False. However, doing so may result in poor output of any raster data consisting of thin lines.

Enable Plot to 3D is used to enable or disable printing to 3D. The property does not toggle the Plot to 3D check box in the Print dialog. It specifies whether the check box is available.

Set Page from Plot Size is used to specify that the size of the print, rather than the paper size, should be used to set the PDF page size. Enabling this property is useful when printing a small print size to a very large paper size.

Document Title and Author are used to specify the document title or author string embedded in the PDF file.

The Owner and User Password properties are used to add a password if you want to protect the PDF. If the owner password is set, you not be able to change the PDF’s permissions without supplying it. If the User Password property is defined but the owner password is not, the user password also is used as the owner password. If the User password is set, you may not be able to open or view the file without supplying it.

Allow Printing is used to control printing permissions. Either the Owner or User Password property must be set for this to take effect.

HPGL2/RTL Print Driver

HPGL2 includes many raster controls and commands since most plotters are actually raster devices. This includes embedded pen definitions, fill patterns, screened vectors, clipping

Nov-08 353 Appendix: Imaging for PublishingCopyright © 2008 Bentley Systems, Incorporated

CGM Output

windows, data transformation, etc. It produces HPGL-2 vectors from vector data sources and RTL rasters from raster data sources.

Properties

Merge provides control over the color of pixels where graphics intersect on the page.

RGB Pen Number specifies a pen number. MicroStation produces only true color output geometry. For compatibility with the pen-based HPGLRTL printer language, the printing system looks up output colors in the print color table and writes the corresponding pen numbers into the print file. If the color cannot be found in the color table, a pen is defined at that time. This property specifies the pen number that is used in those cases.

As this is an advanced setting, it should normally be left undefined. If it is undefined, 255 is used.

CGM Output

A CGM file is a computer graphics metafile, which is an ANSI standard for the exchange of picture data that is device and environment independent between different graphics software. They are useful for showing technical designs and maps, where detail can be lost in a raster image and where it is useful to zoom in on details.

Exporting

Export DGNs to CGM by selecting File > Export > CGM. The Export CGM File dialog lets you set options for converting a DGN file to a CGM file. Use items on the dialog’s Settings menu to set attributes.

General settings

Select Settings > General in the Export CGM File dialog to set export settings that control what and how data is exported.

VDC (virtual device coordinates)

VDC is a device-independent coordinate system that specifies view boundaries from device coordinates.

• The coordinates can be integer or real. Set this using the VDC Type options

• The Metric Scale sets the number of millimeters in a VDC unit

• If VDC Type is set to Integer, VDC Integer Precision sets the size of integers in the virtual device coordinates in bits


CGM Output

• If VDC Type is set to Real, VDC Real Format Sets the type of the VDC real numbers to float or fixed

Integer Precision & Real Format

Integer Precision sets the size of integers for the CGM file. Real Format sets the type of real coordinates, float or fixed.

Spline Segments

These settings control how B-splines are converted. SurfU controls the number of faces used to approximate a surface in the U-direction. SurfV controls the number of faces used to approximate a surface in the V-direction.

Stroke Text

If enabled and text cannot be interpreted correctly, the text is drawn as a line string.

Scaled Line, Edge width

If on, the line and edge width can be specified as a measure in VDC units, a scale factor to be applied to a device-dependent nominal line width at interpretation time, a fraction of the device view surface or a measure in millimeters.

User Scale defines the scale factor for this.

Make Lower Left Origin

Sets the lower left corner as the origin since the default is the upper right corner.

RGB Background & Foreground

Sets the combined quantities of red, green and blue to produce colors for the background or foreground.

Text style mapping

Select Settings > Text Fonts in the Export CGM File dialog to map fonts. The first step is to select the MicroStation font you want to change from the Current Font Mapping list. Then select, or enter, the CGM text style to which you want to map the font.

Select File > Attach to open the Attach Font Table File dialog, which is used to attach a font translation table.

Select File > Save to save the font mapping to the attached font translation table, so that the changes remain in effect for subsequent translations.


CGM Output

Line style mapping

Select Settings > Line Styles in the Export CGM File dialog to map line styles. The options here work like the options for text style remapping.

Reference file settings

Select Settings > References in the Export CGM File dialog to set how MicroStation DGN file levels are converted to CGM layers.

Select the view to process and then whether to merge or ignore reference files, clipped attachments and master file attachments.

Weights

Select Settings > Weights in the Export CGM File dialog to set how MicroStation line weights are converted to polyline widths in the CGM file.

First select the polyline width and then enter, or select, the line weight you want to convert it to.

Importing

Import CGM files by selecting File > Import > CGM. The Import CGM File dialog lets you set options for importing a CGM file. Use items on the dialog’s Settings menu to set attributes.

General settings

Select Settings > General in the Import CGM File dialog to set import settings that control how data is imported.

Translation Units

Sets how CGM file units are converted. Master equates CGM file units to the master units of the active file. Sub equates CGM file units to sub-units of the active file.

Color Palette

Sets whether to use the color palette in the CGM file or active DGN file.

Font mapping

Select Settings > Text Fonts in the Import CGM File dialog to specify mappings between fonts in the CGM file and the file.


Raster Files

The first step is to select the CGM font you want to change. Then, select the MicroStation font to which you want to map the CGM font.

Select File > Attach to open the Attach Font Table File dialog, which is used to attach a font translation table.

Select File > Save to save the font mapping to the attached font translation table so that the changes remain in effect for subsequent translations.

Level mapping

Select Settings > Levels in the Import CGM File dialog to set how CGM layers are converted to MicroStation levels. The Level Table field shows the currently attached level table.

The CGM Layers and uStn Levels columns show how CGM layers are converted to MicroStation levels. The field below the uStn Levels column sets the MicroStation level to which the selected CGM layer is converted.

Line style mapping

Select Settings > Line Styles in the Import CGM File dialog to map line styles. The options here work like the options for font mapping.

Weights

Select Settings > Weights in the Import CGM File dialog to set how CGM polyline widths are converted to MicroStation line weights. The Polyline Widths and Line Weights columns show how CGM polyline widths are converted to MicroStation line weights. The field below Polyline Widths column sets the polyline width that is converted to the selected MicroStation line weight.

Raster Files

A Raster Reference is a link to an external image that resides outside a DGN file and is managed with the Raster Manager. Raster attachments are treated like any standard element.

They can be displayed between vector elements and they can be placed on a level. An element, the raster frame type 94, is generated each time a raster is attached. The type 90 element is also present and is linked to the new raster frame. A raster frame is automatically generated for each type 90 present in a file.


Raster Files

Display planes

You can display rasters in the background plane, the design plane or the foreground plane. This generates three separate groups of rasters. The tools that modify the display order; bring to front, send to back, bring forward and send backward, work inside a single group in the active file.

By default all raster images are attached in the background plane. This is a user preference that can be changed in the Raster Manager category of the Preferences dialog. You can also use options here to specify a default level for rasters to be placed on. You can even create a new level. You can also set a default border style and weight.

Exercise: Place rasters in the design plane


Project: General

2 Open Raster.dgn.

3 Open the Display Priority model.

4 Select File > Raster Manager.

The attached rasters lie behind the vector data.

5 In the Raster Manager, select the first entry and click on the Plane icon.

6 Select Background and click OK.

The image is moved to the same plane as the vector graphics and its entry in the Raster Manager moves.

7 Select the second entry and move it to the Foreground.

8 Press the Ctrl key, select all three entries, and move them to the design plane.

Display priority

The Display Priority column lets you set the display priority of a raster. The column displays a valid priority value only if the raster is in the raster is on the design plane.

Note: For 2D rasters, the display priority manages the display order. For 3D rasters, the Z elevation manages the display order.


Raster Files

Exercise: Add vector elements with a display priority

1 Continuing in Raster.dgn, in the Attributes toolbox, set the Active Element Priority to 12.

Any element with a priority value less than active priority will display behind the new elements, while those with a higher priority will display in front of the new element.

2 Set the following in the Attributes toolbox:

Level: Object3

Color, Weight, Style: ByLevel

3 With the Drawing tasks active, select Place Block and place blocks in the design where the rasters overlap.

4 In the Raster Manager, set the display priority for the third entry to 100.

It moves in front of the blocks you placed.

5 Select Element Selection.

6 Place the pointer over the edge of the image at the back.

7 Right press and select Properties from the pop-up menu.

This selects the image and opens the Element Info dialog.

8 In the Element Info dialog, in the General section, set Priority to 25.

The image moves to the front.

Level priority and transparency

Rasters can be assigned to a level and all elements on that level can then be assigned a display priority and transparency. Raster attachments are treated as standard elements with regard to level-related operations, such as display, freeze, lock, plot and viewport freeze.

Exercise: Level display priority and transparency

1 Continuing in Raster.dgn, open the Level Support model.

2 Set the active level to Object2.

3 Select Place Block and place blocks in the design where the rasters overlap.


Raster Files

4 In the Raster Manager, right click on a column heading and enable display of the Level column.

5 In the Raster Manager, move all three rasters to the Design plane.

6 Select all three rasters, click in the Level column, select Object from the pop-up menu and click OK.

Now all the rasters are on the design plane and on the same level.

7 Open the Level Manager.

8 Right click on a column heading and enable display of the Priority and Transparency columns if they are not already displayed.

9 Set the priority of the Object level to 100.

The shapes now lie behind the rasters.

10 Set the Transparency of the Object level to 50.

11 Close the Level Manager.

PDF support

Raster Manager supports the PDF multi-page format.

Exercise: Attach a PDF as a raster reference

1 Continuing in Raster.dgn, open the PDF Reference model.

2 In the Raster Manager, click Attach.

3 Set Files of type to *.pdf.

4 Navigate to ...\WorkSpace\Projects\Examples\General\Data.

5 Select 2DExample.pdf and click Open.

6 Enter two diagonal data points to place the PDF in the file.

Cache Manager

Use this utility to manage raster image cache files generated on your hard drive. To open it, select Settings > Cache Manager in the Raster Manager dialog.

You can select when and how to delete cached image files and you can specify the amount of disk space they use. You can also specify a cache files location. Set the settings and click Run Now to run interactively.


Appendix Review

Binary enhancement

If a view is zoomed out so far that it causes loss of detail in the display of binary raster attachments, enable Settings > Enhance Binary to enhance their display, similar to a bold foreground.

Draping

When dcdrape.pal is added to a material table, .mat, which is attached to a DGN file, and the Drape is on for these files in Bentley Descartes, the draping is preserved and can be viewed directly in MicroStation and can also be rendered.

Appendix Review

Review questions

1 What is the benefit of using a PostScript printer driver?

2 What is unique about the HPGL2 printer driver?

3 Why would you use the CGM format?

4 Name the planes on which you can place rasters.

Review answers

1 It is optimized for printing graphics and text. It describes images in a device independent manner.

2 It includes many raster controls and commands. It produces HPGL-2 vectors from vector data sources and RTL rasters from raster data sources.

3 To exchange picture data that is device and environment independent between different graphics software. They are useful for showing technical designs and maps, where detail can be lost in a raster image and it is useful to zoom in on details.

4 Background, foreground and design.


Appendix Review


Micro Station v 8 i 4 Advanced Users

Documents

Transcript of Micro Station v 8 i 4 Advanced Users